Mil Dod STD 00100d (Ar)

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com on 2010-06-04T12:38:27.
‘,
-. _.— \
DOD-STD-OOIOOD(AR)
3 APRIL 1987
O USED
DOD-
IN LIEU
STD-1O O C
OF
22 DECEMBER 1978
.
MILITARY STANDARD
●
<.< ENGINEERING DRAWING PRACTICES
\
.
.
● ANsc ti/A
AREA DRPR
f) ISTRIBUTION STATEM~ . APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE ; DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIMITED.
A
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR )
\
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE
WASHINGTON, DC 20301
@
Engineering Drawing Practices
DOD-STD-00 100D(AR )
1. This Military Standard is approved for uae by all elements of the U;S.
Army Tank-Automotive Command and U.S. Army Armament, Munitions and Chemical
Command.
2. genef icial comments (recommendation, additiona, deletions) and anY .

pertinent data which ❑ay be of use in improving this document should be
addreaaed to: Commander, IJ. S. Army Armament Research, Development and
Engineering Center, ATTN: SMCAR-ESC-S, Picatinny Arsenal, NJ 07306-5000, by .
using the self-addreaaed Standardization Oocument Improving Proposal (DD Form
1426) appearing at the end of this document or by letter.
0
4.
.
ii
a
DOD-STD-00 10OD (AR)
foiimosu)
This interim Military Standard provides:
Drawing Dractioes for preparation of engineering drawings and drawing

fotiat mat=riale.
Definitions and examplea of types of engineering drawings to be prepared

for the Department of Defense. These are cataloged for appropriate selection
and uee. in support of Levels of engineering drawings being prepared under the
requirements of DOD-D-1OOO.
Procedures for the creation of titles for engineering drawings.
Numbering, coding and identification procedures for engineering drawings,

associated lists and-documents referenced on these engineering drawings and
aafiociated 1iste.
Methods for revision of engineering drawings and methods for recording of

such revisiona.
Requirements for preparation of associated lists.
This docwment applies to all TACOM and AMCCOMcontracta which specify

delivery of Level 3 drawings in accordance with DOD-D-1000. All drawings.
which define the Product %seline shall conform to Level 3. Level 3 drawings
should also ‘be acquired for definition of the Allocated Baaeline.
iii
DOD-STD-00 IOOD(AR)
THIS PA(X IEFC BLANK INTENTIONALLY
iv
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
o
SCOPE
This standard prescribes general requirements for the preparation and

revision of engineering drawings and associated lists prepared by or for
elements of U.S. Army Tank-Automotive Command and U.S. Army Armament,
Munitions and Chemical Command.
1
DOD-STD-00 100D(AR)
REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
Government documents.
c
Speclf Icatlons, standards, and handbooks. Unless otherwise specified,
the following speoif ications, standards, and handbooks of the issue listed in
that issue OF the Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards
(DoDISS) specific in the solicitation form a part of this standard to the
extent specified herein.
SPECIFICATIONS
Federal
L-F-340 Film, Diazot ype, Sensitized, Moist and try

Process, Roll and Sheet
L-P-5 19 Plastic Sheet, Tracing, Glazed and Matte Finish
TT-I-1795 Ink, Marking, Stencil, Opaque (Porous and Non

Porous Surf aces)
UU-P-221 Paper, Direct Positive Sensitized, (Diazotype -

Moist and Dry Process)
UU-P-561 Paper, Tracing
CCC-C-531 Cloth, Tracing
Militar~
DOD-D-1 000 tiawings, Engineering and Associated Lists
MIL-D-5480 Data, Engineering and Technical, Reproduction

Q)
sRequirements for
MIL-H-6088 Heat Treatment of. Aluminun Alloys
MIL-S-6090 Steel, Carburizing and Nitriding, Procesees for
MIL-H-6875 Heat Treatment of Steel, Process for
MIL-O-851O Drawing, Undimensioned, Reproducible,

Photographic and Contact, Preparation of
NIL-M-9868 Microfilming of Engineering Dccuments, 35mm

Requirements for
MIL-W-1 3855 Weapon, Small Arms and Airoraft Armament

Subsystems, General Speoif ioation for
MIL-M-3851O Microcircuits, General Specification for
2
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (tint’ d)
● SPECIFICATIONS
Military
MIL-M-38761 Microfilming and Photographing of Engineering/ “.

Technical Data and Related Documents: PCAM
Card Preparation, Engineering Data Micro-repro-
duction System, General Requirements for,
Preparation of
MIL-P-55010 Plastic Sheet, Polyethylene Terephthalate
STANDARDS
Military
MIL-STD-12 Abbrev i at ion for Use on Drawings, Specifications,

Standards and in Technical Documents
MIL-STD-14 Architectural Symbols
MIL-STD-15-2 Electrical Wiring Equipment Symbols for Shipst

Plans
MIL-STD-17-1 Mechanical Symbols
MIL-STD-17-2 Mechanical Symbols for Aeronautical, Aerospace-

craft and Spacecraft Use
MIL-STD-25 Ship Structural Symbols for Use on Ship Drawings
MIL-STD-34 Preparation of Drawings for Optical Elements and

Optical Systems, Oeneral Requirements for
DOD-STD-100 Engineering Drawing Practices
MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-STD-130 Identification Marking of U.S. Military Property
MIL-STD-171 Finishing of Metal and Wood Surfaces
MIL-STD-190 Identification Marking of Rubber Products
MIL-sTD-275 Printed Wiring for Electronic Equipment
DOD-STD-48O Configuration Control - Engineering Changes,

Deviations and Waivers
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (Contld)
STANDARDS
Military
MIL-STD-481 Configuration Control - Engineering Changes,

Deviations and Waivers (Short Form)
MIL-STD-490 Specification Practices
MIL-STD-681 Identification Coding and Application of

Hookup and Lead Wire
MIL-STD-961 Military Specifications and Associated

Documents, Preparation of
MIL-STD-1 174 Associated Lists for ARRADCOM Engineering

Drawings
MIL-STD-1267 Dimensioning of Barrel Chambers of Small Arms

Weapons
MIL-STD-1 306 Fluerics Terminology and Symbols
MIL-STD-1 464 Army Nomenclature System
DOD-STD-1 476
DOD-STD-1686
Metric System,
Electrostatic
Protection
Application
Discharge
of Electrical
Control
in
Program
and Electronic
for
New Design
Parts,
0
Assemblies, and Equipment (excluding Electrically
Initiated Explosive Devices) (Metric)
DOD-STD-2 167 Defense System Software Development
MIL-STD-21 75 Castings, Classification and Inspection of
HANDBOOKS
DOD-HDBK-263 Electrostatic Discharge Control Handbook for

Protection of Electrical and Electronic Parts,
Assemblies and Equipment (Excluding Electrically
Initiated Explosive Devices) Metric
Other Government documents, drawings, and publications. The following

other Government documents, drawings, and publications form a part of this
standard to the extent specified herein.
12579607 Geometric Symbols for Dimensioning and Tolerancing
H4/H8 Commercial and Caernment Entity ( CAGE)
H6 Federal Item Name Directory for Supply Cataloging
H7 Manufacturers Part and Drawing Number ing Systems

4
/
DOD 5220.22-M DOD Industrial Security Manual for Safeguarding
Classified Information -—. -4/ “
● DOD 5230. 25-PH Control

Military
of Unclassified Technical
or Space Application
.
Data with
DODISS Department of Defense Index of Specificatlona and

Standards
( Copies of specifications, standards, handbooks, drawings, and

publications required by contractors in connection with specific acquisition
functions should be obtained from the contracting activity or aa directed by
the contracting officer. )
Other publications. The following documents form a part of this

standard to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the
issues of the documents which are lbD adopted shall be those listed in the
issue of the I&DISS SDeCif led in the solicitation. The issues of documents
which have not been a~opted shall “be those in ef feet on the date of the cited
IbDISS.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI B46. 1-85 Surface Texture (Surface roughness, waviness,

and lay)
ANSI B92. 1-70 Involute Splines and Inspection

WI B92. la-76
ANSI B94. 6-84 Knurling
ANSI X3. 5-70 Flowchart Symbols and their Usage in

Information Processing. Same as FIPS-24,
Federal Information Processing Standards.
ANSI Y1 0.3-68 Letter Symbols for Quantities Used in

Mechanica of Solids
ANSI Y1 0.20-75 Mathematical Signs and Symbols for Use in

w/ANSI Y1O. 20a-75 Physical Sciences and Technology
ANSI Y14.1-80 Drawing Sheet Size and Format, Engineering

Drawing and Related Documentation Practices
ANSI Y14. 2M-79 Line Conventions and Lettering, Engineering

Drawing and Related Lbcumentation Practices
ANSI Y1 4.3-75 Multi and Sectional View Drawings,

Engineering Orawings and Related bcumentation
Practices ,.,
ANSI Y14.5-73 Dimensioning and Toleranclng
ANSI Y14.5M-82 Dimensioning and Tolerancing ,,
ANS~ Y14. 6-78 Screw Thread Representation
ANSI Y14. 6AM Metric Supplement

5
, . AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) (tint’ d)

k
-%._+s -A.
ANSI Yi?:7..l-@_ Gear Drawing Standards, Part 1: for Spur,
Helical, Double Helical, and Rack, Drafting
Practices
ANSI Y14.7.2-78 Gear and Spline Drawing Standards - Part 2:

Bevel and Hypoid Gears, Engineering Drawing
and Related Documentation Practices
ANSI Y14.13M-81 Mechanical Spring Representation, Engineering

Drawing and Related Ibcumentation Fractices
ANSI Y1 U. 15-66 Electrical and Electronics Diagrams including

Proposed USA Standards for Connection Diagrams
and Technical Diagrams
ANSI Yl!. 15a-71 Interconnection Diagrams

-1
ANSI Y14. 15b-73 Supplement to ANSI Y 14.15-66 snd
ANSI Y14. 15a-70
ANSI Y14. 17-66 Fluid Power Diagrans
ANSI Y14. 26.3-75 Dictionary of Terms for Computer-aided

Preparation of Product Definition Data
(Including Engineering Drawings), Engineering
Drawing and Related Documentation Practices.
ANSI Y14. 36-78 Surface Texture Symbols, Engineering Drawing

and Related Documentation Practices
ANSI Y32. U-77 Graphic Symbols for Plumbing Fixtures for

Diagrams. Used in Architecture and Building
Construction
ANSI Y32. 9-’72 Graphic Symbols for Electric and Layout

Drawings Used in Architecture and Building
Construction
ANSI Y32. 10-67 Graphic Symbols for Fluid Power Diagrams
ANSI/AWS A2. ti-79 .Symbols for Welding and Nondestructive Testing-
ANSI/IEEE 260-78 Latter Symbols for Units of Measurement (S1

Units, Customary Inch-Pound Units, and Certain
Other Units)
,,, ,,
ANSIIIPC-D-350-77 Printed Soard Description in Digital Form
ANSI/IPC-T-50C-85 Interconnecting and Packaging Electronic

Circuits, Terms and Definitions for
6
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
ANSI/SAE AS1290-75 Graphic Symbols for Aircraft Hydraulic and

Pneumatic System
ASTM
ASTM E380-84 Metric Practice, Standard for
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY, INC. (AWS)
AWS A3. O-85 Welding Terms and Definitions
THE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS, INC.
IEEE STD 91-84 Graphic Symbols for Logic Functions
IEEE STD 200-75 Reference Ceaignations for Electric and

Electronics Parta and Equipment (Ssme as
ANSI Y32. 16-1 975)
IEEE STD 280-85 Letter Symbols for Cwantities used in

Electrical Science and Electrical Engineering
(Ssme as ANSI Y1 O. 5-1968)
IEEE STD 315-75 Graphic Symbols for Electrical and Electronics

Diagrams ( including Reference Designation. Class
Designation Lettera). (Same as ANSI Y32. 2-1975)
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS, INC.
SAE HSJ 1086-83/ Unified Numbering System, Metals and Alloys

ASTM DS56B
Order of precedence. In the event of a conflict between the text of

this standard and the references cited herein, the text of this standard
shall take precedence. ..
Source of documents.
Government specifications, standards, and handbooka. Copies of the

referenced federal and military apecif ications, standards, and handbooks are
available from the Department of Defense Single Stock” Point, Commanding
Officer, Naval Publications and Forms Center, 5801 Tabor Avenue,
Philadelphia, PA 19120. For specific acquisition functions, these documents
should be obtained from the contracting activity or as directed by the
t
contracting officer.
Other Government documents. Copies of other government documents

required by contractors in connection with specific acquisition functions
should be obtained from the contracting activity or aa directed by the
contracting off icer.
Sources for nongovernment publications. Nongovernment documents are

generally available for reference from libraries and technical groups. The
documents lieted may be obtained as follows:
7
DOD-STD-00 10OD ( AR)
a. ANSI: Application for copies should be addressed to the American

National Standards Institute, 1430 Broadway, New York, NY 10018.
b. ASTM: Application
1916 Race Street,
for copies
Philadelphia,
should
PA
be addressed
19103.
to ASTM, 0
c. AWSZ Application for copies should be addressed to the American
Welding Society, Inc., 2501 NW 7th Street, Miami, FL 33125.
d. IEEE: Application for copies should be addressed to the Institute

for Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., 345 E. 47th Street,
New York, NY 10017.
e. IPC: Application for copies should be addressed to the Institute

of Interconnecting and Packaging Electronic Circuits, 3451 Church
Street, Skokie, IL 60076.
f. SAE: Application for copies should be addressed to the Society of

Automotive Engineers, Inc., 400 Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA
15096.
A
..\
9
● CHAPTER PAGE
100 Preparation of Engineering Drawing 100-1
200 Types of Engineering Lkawings 200-1
300 Drawing Titles 300-1
400 Numbering, Coding, and Identification 400-1
500 Revision of Engineering Drawinga 500-1
600 Associated Lists 600-1
700 Definitions (General) 700-1
Appendix A Drawing format and supplementary blocks A-1

entries
Appendix B Security classification marking and B-1

notations
Appendix C Interpretation of dimensioning and tolerancing c-1
● Appendix
Appendix
D
E
Sample
Revision
drawings
of drawings
D-1
E-1
: Appendix F Commonly Used CAGE Codes F-1
Appendix G Initial/signature requirements G-1
Appendix H Marking and distribution statement for H-1
-)3
technical documents
Appendix I Order of precedence for selection of standards I-1

and specifications
Appendix J Index J-1
9
DOD-STD-OOIOOD(AR )
C(wKQKS
Para , Description ~
100 General 100-1

100.1 Definitions and requirements 100-1,
101 Basic practices 100-1
101.1 Size and format of engineering drawings 100-1
101.1.1 Continuation Sheets 100-2
101.2 Line conventions and lettering 100-2
101.3 Multi and sectional view drawings 100-3
101.3.1 Isometric and pictorial views 100-6
101.4 Metric values 100-6
101.4.1 Application in new design 100-6
101.5 Dimensioning and tolerancing 100-6
101.6 Surface texture 100-13
101.6.1 Surface texture symbols 100-13
101.7 Screw thread representation 100-13
101.8 Gears 100-13
101.9 Mechanical springs 100-13
101.10 Optical elements and optical ayatams 100-13
101.11 Comouter-aided vreDaration of DrOdUCt definition data 100-13
101.11.1 Computer-aided “~s~gn ( CAD) dr;wings 100-13
101.11.2 Obviations from CAD 100-13
101.11.3 CAD line conventions variation 100-13
102 Graphic symbols, designations, letter symbols, snd 100-14
abbreviations
102.1 Graphic symbols 100-14
102.1.1 Graphic symbols for electrical and electronics 100-14
diagrams
102. 1.2
102.1.3
Graphic
Graphic
symbols
symbols
for logic,
for flowchart
functions
diagrams
100-14
100-14 ‘x
102. 1.4
102.1.5
Graphic
Graphic
symbols
symbols
for flueric
for electrical
power diagrams
wiring-and layout
100-14
100-14 .,\
diagrams used in architecture and building instruction
102. .6 Mechanical symbols 100-14
102. .6.1 Graphic symbols for plumbing fixtures 100-14
102. .7 Mechanical symbols for aeronautical, aerospacecrsft, 100-15
and spacecraft use
102. .7.1 Graphic symbols for aircraft hydraulic and pneumatic 100-15
systems
102. .8 Ship structural symbols 100-15
102. .9 Architectural symbols ioo-ls
102. .10 Electrical wiring equipment symbols for shlps~ drawings 100-15
102. .11 Welding symbols. 100-15
102. .12 Nondestructive testing symbols 100-15
102.1.13 Graphic symbols for fluid power ,disgrams 100-16
102.2 Designations 100-16
102.2.1 Reference designations for electrical and electronics 100-16
parts and equipment
102.3 Letter symbols and abbreviations 100-16
102.3.1 Letter symbols 100-16
102.3.2 Mathematical signs and symbols 100-16
102.3.3 Abbreviations 100-16
10
OOD4TD.OO1OOD(AR)
cQnImTs (Cmt~d)
Para Description ~
103 Dlagrsma 100-16

103.1 Electrical and electronics diagrams 100-16
103.2 Fluid power diagrams 100-16
103.3 Printed wiring drawinga 100-16
103.3.1 Printed board description in digital form 100-16
104’ Drawing material 100-16
104.1 Duplicate original 100-16
105 security classification and notation 100-16
106 Scale 100-17
106.1 Selection of scale 100-17
106.2 Indication of scale 100-17
106.2.1 Fractional method 100-17
106.3 Drawings not to scale 100-17
106.4 Dimensions not to scale 100-17
107 Radioactive materials 100-17
108 Marking and marking location 100-17
108.1 Identification marking requirements 100-17
108. 1.1 Drawing requirements 100-18
108. 1.2 Matched parts 100-20
108. 1.3 Markings other than part number identification 100-21
108. 1.3.1 Rubber prod uct a 100-21
108.1.3.2 CARC painted item 100-21
108.1.3.3 Sensitive electronic device (SED) items 100-21
109 Optional/Alternative designs 100-22
110 Depiction of part 100-22
111 Module Osta 100-23
112 Analog signal processing circuits 100-23
113 Digital signal processing clrcuita 100-23
114 Reference identifiers 100-24
115 Application block entries 100-24
116 Microcircuits 100-24
117 Drawing notes 100-25
117.1 Language style 100-25
117.2 Commonly used wcrds and phrases 100-25
117.3 Use of “shall”, “willn, ‘shouldn, and ‘mayn 100-25
117.4 Indefinite terms 100-25
117.5 Lccation of notes 100-25
117.6 Note contents 100-26
118 Material notes 100-30
119’ Signing and Dating Crawings 100-31
119.1 Dating drawings 100-31
119.1.1 Sign ing for another 100-31
119.1.2 Redrawn drawings 100-31
119.2 Dating drawings 100-31
119.3 Initial and eignature block 100-32
119.4 Additional signature 100-32
119.5 CAD prepared drawings 100-32
119.6 Microfilm aperture card signatures 100-32
200 General 200-1
201 Definitions and requirements 200-1
11
DDD-sTD-OOIOI)D(M)
mllTemTs (Conttd)
Para Description ~
201.1 Engineering drawing 200-1

201.1.1 Application 200-1
201.1.2 Integral parts llst 200-1
201.2 Detail drawing 200-1
201.2.1 Monodetail drawing 200-1
201.2.2 Multidetail drawing 200-2
201.2.3 Tabulated detail drawing 200-5
201.2.4 Tube bend drawing 200-6
201.3 Assembly drawing 200-8
201.3.1 Detail assembly drawing 200-10
201.3.2 Tabulated assembly drawing 200-11
201.3.3 Photo-assembly drawing 200-12
201.3.4 Inseparable assembly 200-12
201.3.5 Installation assembly drawing 200-14
201.3.6 Exploded asaembly drawing 200-14
201.3.7 Matched parts drawing 200-14
201.3.8 Arrangement drawing 200-16
201.4 Control drawing 200-17
201.4.1 Envelope drawing 200-17
201.4.2 Specification control drawing 200-19
201.4.3 Source control drawing 200-22
201.4.4 Altered item drawing 200-26
201.4.5 Selected item drawing 200-28
201.4.6 Interface control drawing 200-30
201.4.7 Installation control drawing 200-31
201.5 Installation drawing 200-32
201.6 Elevation drawing 200-34
201.7 Diagrammatic drawing 200-35
201.7.1 .%hematic diagram 200-35
201.7.2 Connection or wiring diagram 200-37
201.7.3 Interconnection diagram 200-38
201.7.4 Single-line or one-line diagram 200-40
201.7.5 Logic diagram 200-41
201.7.6 Mechanical schematic diagram 200-42
201.7.7 Piping diagram 200-43
201’.8 Construction drawing 200-44
201.8.1 Erection drawing 200-44
201.8.2 Plan drawing 200-44
201.8.3 Plot ( plat) plan drawing 200-46
201.8.4 Vicinity plan or site drawing 200-46
201.9 Special purpose drawing 200-46
201.9.1 Sook-form drawing 200-46
201.9.2 Wiring list 200-53
201.9.3 Numerical control drawing 200-53
201.9.4 Optical elements and optical system drawings 200-55
201.9.5 Wiring harness drawing 200-55
201.9.6 Cable assembly drawing 200-57
Undimensional drawing .,, 200-58
201.9.7
12 .”..
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
C43W3’EHTS(Cent’d)
Para Description ~
201.9.8 Printed wiring master (stable base artwork) 200-60

pattern drawing
201.9 .8.1.1 Digital form 200-60
201.9.9 Printed wiring master drawing 200-62
201.9.10 Kit drawing 200-64
201.9 .10.2 Rework drawing requirement 200-65
201.9 .10.3 Installation instruction drawing 200-66
201.9.11 Combinations of adopted items drawing 200-69
201.9.12 Ship equipment (marine item) drawing 200-71
201.9 .12.2 Weight 200-71
201.9 .12.3 Conformance with specification 200-71
201.9.13 Certification data sheet 200-73
201.9 .13.1 Contents 200-73
201.9.14 Correlation drawing 200-75
201.9.15 Formulation drawing 200-75
201.9.16 Contour definition drawing 200-77
201.9.17 Modification drawings 200-77
201.10 Layout drawing 200-77
201. 10.1 Application guidelines 200-77
201.11 Camouflage basis drawing 200-80
201.12 Camouflage pattern drawing 200-88
201.13 Vehicle drawing (top assembly) 200-94
201.14 Vehicle camouflage pattern drawing 200-94
201.15 Package content drawing 200-97
201.16 Software and Firmware data” 200-99
201.16.1 Software control drawing 200-99
201.16.2 Firmware drawing 200-100
300 General 300-1
301 Definitions 300-1
301.1 Drawing title 300-1
301.2 Approved item name 300-1
301.3 Type designation 300-1
301.4 Assembly 300-1
302 Procedures for creating drawing titles 300-1
302.1 General rules 300-1
II
302.2 First part of title 300-2
302.3 second part of title 300-4
303 Disclosure of security categories 300-5
304 Titles for kit drawings 300-5
400 General 400-1
401.1 Referenced documents 400-1
401.2 Contractor and Government Entity Code ( CAGE Code) 400-1
401.3 Lbcument identification number 400-1
401.4 Drawing number 400-1
401.5 Part numbers 400-1
401.6 Find number 400-2
402 Identification requirements 400-2
402.1 New drawings and associated lists 400-2
402.2 Existing drawings and associated lists 400-2
402.3 Referenced documents 400-2
13
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
~ (Cent’d)
Para Description ~
402.4 (kmtractor and Government Entity Code for 400-2

Manufacturer
402.5 Orawing number 400-2
402.6 Part numbers 400-4
402.7 Records 400-5
402.8 Associated lists 400-5
uoz. g Transferring design responsibility to another activity 400-5
402.9.1 Source control drawing 400-5
402.9.2 Maintaining design activities identities 400-6.
402.9.3 Drawing with “00000” CAGE Code (CODE IDENT) 400-7
402.10 Item identification and part numbering 400-9
402.10.1 Reidentification 400-9
402.11 Identification on drawinga 400-10
402.11.1 Specification control and source control drawings 400-12
402.11.2 Parenthetical identifier 400-12
402.12 CAGE Code and part numbering 400-12
402.13 Numbering of related parta 400-13
402.13.1 Matched parta designation 400-13
402.13.2 Symmetrically opposite parts 400-13
402.13.3 Inseparable assembly 400-13
402.14 Changes requiring new identification 400-13
402.15 Changes not requiring new identification 400-14
402.16 Identification of material a, processes and protective 400-14
treatment
402.16.1 Group identification 400-14
402.16.2 Other identification 400-14
402.16.3 Formulation identification 400-14
402.16.4 Bulk materials identification 400-14
402.16.5 Identification of precious metals 400-16
402. 16.6 Nuclear hardness critical items and processes 400-18
402.16.6.1 Items 400-18
402.16.6.2 Procesaea 400-18
402.16.6.3 Marking 400-18
402.16.7 Critical Safety Items 400-19
402.16.7.1 Critical Safety Item Drawing 400-19
402.16 .7.1.1 Critical Safety Item Note 400-19
402.16.7.2 Critical .Sefety Item Assembly 400-20
402.16.8 Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Items 400-21
402.17 Original date 400-23
402.18 Order of precedence of specification and standards 400-23
402.19 Interface Control Identification Symbol 400-23
402.19.1 Location of symbol 400-23
402.20 Part replacement notation 400-24
402.20.1 Interchangeable parts 400-24
402.20.2 Non-Interchangeable parts 400-25
402.20.3 Obsoleted parts 400-26
402.20.4 Superseded parts 400-27
402.20.5 Notation size and location 400-28
402.21 Ordnance Engineering Standards (TAXI ) 400-28
14
OOD-.STD-OO’IOOD(AR)
COUTEIITS (Cent’d)
Para Description ~
402.22 Identifying optional parts 400-28

402.23 Distribution Statement 400-28
402.24 LWplicate Original 400-29
500 Oeneral 500-1
502 Revision methods 500-1
502.1 Change in dimensions 500-1
502.2 Creasing out 500-1
502.3 Drawing practices 500-1
503 Identifying revisiona on drawinga 500-1
503.1 Identifying revision location 500-1
503.2 Ravision letters 500-1
503.3 Multiple changes 500-1
503.4 Additions 500-2
503.5 Change in righta to technical data 500-2
503.6 Required revisions 500-3
504 Recording revisions on drawinga 500-3
504.1 Revision block 500-3
504.1.1 Letter 500-3
504.1.2 Description 500-3
504.1.3 Approval 500-3
504.1.4 Zoning 500-3
504.1.5 Revision date 500-3
504.1.6 Separating revisions 500-3
505 Revision of multi-sheet and book-fcrm drawings 500-4
505.1 Procedure 500-4
505.2 Adding sheets to multi-sheet and book-form drawings 500-4
505.3 Deleting sheets from multi-sheet 500-4
and book-form drawinga
505.4 Computer-generated/revised drawings 500-6
506 Redrawn or replaced drawinga 500-6
507 Reinstating a replacedlsupersededlobsoleted drawing 500-10
508 Associated List(s) revisions 500-10
509 Identification of Configuration Management Baseline 500-10
600 Oeneral 600-1
601.1 Parts list (PL) 600-1
601.2” Psrts list requirement 600-1
602 Oeneral requirements 600-1
602; 1 List preparation 600-1
602.1.1 Manual preparation 600-1
602.1.2 Automatic data processing system (ADPS) preparation 600-3
602.2 Multiple sheets 600-5
602.2.1 Sheet numbering 600-5
602.2.2 Legibility requirements 600-5
602.2i3 List maintenance 600-5
602.3 Revisions 600-5.
602..3.1 Revision identification 600-5 ~
602.3.2 Deleting items 600-5
15
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
CfJnYEllTS (Cent’d)
Para Description ~
602.3.3 Adding items 600-5

602.3.4 Revision description 600-5
602.4 Design activity identification 600-5
602.5 Block and column size and arrangement 600-5
602.6 Additional blocks and columns 600-5
603 Parts list preparation 600-5
603.1 Format 600-5
603.2 Entries 600-6
603.2.1 Block 1, Design Activity Identification 600-6
603.2.2 Block 2, CAGE Code 600-6
603.2.3 Block 3, Original Date 600-6
603.2.4 Block 4, Parts List Number 600-6
603.2.5 Block 5, List Title 600-6
603.2.6 Block 6, Authentication Signature 600-6
603.2.7 Block 7, Sheet Number 600-6
603.2.8 Block 8. Drawintz Number 600-6
603.2.9 Column ‘g, Find ~umber 600-6
603.2.10 Column 10, Quantity Required 600-7
603.2.11 Column 11, CAGE Code 600-7
603.2.12 Column 12, Part or Identifying Number 600-7
603.2.13 Column 13, Drawing Size 600-7
603.2.14 Column 14, Drawing/Document Number 600-8
603.2.15 Column 15, Nomenclature or Description 600-9
603.2.16 Column 16, Supplemental List 600-9
603.2.17 column 17, Notes 600-9
603.2.18 Block 18, Revision Letter/Description/Date/Approval 600-9
603.2.19 Revision Letter/Date/Approval of ADPS Prepared Lists 600-10
604 On Vehicle Equipment List (OVE) 600-10
604.1 Basic Issue Items (BII) 600-10
604.2 Additional Authorized List (AAL) 600-10
605 Special Tool Set List 600-10
605.1 Special Tool Sets 600-10
16
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
LIST OF IU.USIEAIIOIIS
FIGURE ILLUSTRATIONS PAGE
100-1 Lettering Sizes 100-3

100-2 Auxiliary and Sectional View 100-4
Rotation From Perpendicular
Projection
100-3 Locations of Viewsl Sections 100-4
100-4 Positioning Requirements 100-5
100-5 Angle Projection Symbols 100-5
100-6 Tabular Dimensioning Method 100-8
100-7 Tabular Dimensioning Method 100-9
— (Circular Part)
100-8 Interpretation of Dimensions Shown to 100-11
Implied Intersections
100-9 Example of Drawing Requirement for Edge Radius 100-12
100-1o Permissible Variation in Part Configuration 100-12
100-11 Example of Radiographic Position Diagram 100-15
100-12 Sample Microfilm Aperture Card Signature/ 100-33
—- Revision Block
200-1 Monodetail drawing 200-2
200-2 Multi-detail drawing 200-3
200-3 Tabulated detail drawing 200-5
200-4 Tube bend drawing 200-6
● 200-5
200-6
200-7
Tube bend drawing
Assembly
Detail
drawing
assembly drawing
200-7
200-9
200-10
200-8 Tabulated assembly drawing 200-11
200-9 Inseparable assembly drawing 200-13
200-10 Matched parts drawing 200-15
200-11 Arrangement drawing 200-16
200-12 Envelope drawing 200-18
200-13 Specification control drawing 200-21
200-1 4a .%urce control drawing (with replaceable parts) 200-24
200-1 4b Source control drawing (replacement part) 200-25
200-15 Altered item part (part controlled by 200-26
(IJ 200-16
Military
Selected
Standard)
item drawing (part controlled by 200-29
Military Standard)
200-17 Interface control drawing 200-30
200-18 Installation control drawing 200-31
200-19 Installation drawing 200-33
200-20 Elevation drawing 200-34
200-21 Schematic diagram drawing 200-36
200-22 Connection or wiring diagram drawing 200-37
200-23a Interconnection diagram drawing (cabling type) 200-38
200-23b Interconnection diagram 200-39
200-24 Single-line diagram drawing 200-40
200-25 Logic diagram drawing 200-41
200-26 Mechanical schematic diagram drawing 200-42
200-27 Piping diagram drawing 200-43
0
200-28 Plan drawing 200-45
17
DOD-STD-00 100D( AR)
LIST OF ILLUSTSATIOUS (Cattd)
-FIGURE ILLUSTRATION PAGE
200-29a Sook-form drawing (Title sheet) 200-47

200-29b Sook-form drawing (continuation sheet ) 200-48
200-29c Book-form drawinfi ( Continuation sheet) 200-49
200-29d Sook-form drawin~ (List of Units) 200-50
200-29e Book-form drawing ( Cable wiring sheet) 200-51
2oo-2gf Sook-form drawing (Wiring List) 200-52
200-30 Numerical control drawing 200-54
200-31 Wiring harness drawing 200-56
200-32 Cable assembly drawing 200-57
200-33 Undimensioned drawing 200-59
200-34 Printed wiring master pattern drawing 200-61
200-35 “ Printed wiring master drawing (board detail) 200-63
200-36 Installation instruction drawing 200-68
200-37 Combination of adopted items drawing 200-70
200-38 Ship equipment (marine item) drawing 200-72
200-39 Certification data sheet 200-74
200-40 Formulation drawing 200-76
200-41 Layout drawing 200-79
200-42 Camouflage basis drawing 200-81
200-43 Camouflage pattern drawing 200-89
200-44 Vehicle drawing (top assembly) 200-95
200-45 Vehicle camouflage pattern drawing 200-96
200-46 Package content drawing 200-98
200-47 Software control drawing 200-99
200-48 Altered item drawing (Firmware) 200-100
400-1 Example of CAGE @de, Drawing No., Design Activity 400-3
Relationship as originally specified
400-2 Example of Drawing Notation when Eesign 400-6
Responsibility is Transferred
400-3a Example of Drawing Entries when Redrawn after 400-6
Design Responsibility waa Transferred
400-3b Example of “00000” CAGE Code (CODE IDENT) 400-7
prior to change
400-3C Example of change to the current CAGE Code of the 400-7
original design activity
400-3d Example of change to the current CAGE Code of the 400-8
original design activity —
400-4 Precious Metals Indicator Code 400-17
400-5 Radiation Hardness Assurance ( RNA) Level 400-18
400-6 Sensitive electronic devices (SED) symbol 400-.21
400-6a Alternative Sensitive electronic devices (SED) 400-21
a ymbol
400-7 Example of Interchangeable Parta Notation 400-24
400-8 Example of Non-Interchangeable Parta Notation 400-25
400-9 Example of Obsolete Notation 400-26
400-10 Example of Superaeded Notation 400-27
400-11 Example of Duplicate Original Notation 400-29
500-1 Example of Revision Block Notation for 500-2
Multi-Sheet Drawing
500-2 Example of Revision Block Notation for 500-2
Changea in Drawing Rights
18
DOD-STD..OO1OOD(AR )
LIST OF ILUJSTRATIOSS ( Cmt 1d)
500-3 Typical change and effect on revision status blook 500-5

and revision status of drawing sheets (1 through 5)
500-4 Revision status to existing drawings 500-5
500-5 Superseding (new) Drawing Notations Redrswn 500-6
with Same Number
500-6 Superseded (old ) Drawing Notations Redrawn 500-7
with Same Number
500-7 Superseding (new) Drawing tbtations Replaoing 500-8
Drawing with Different Number
500-8 Superseded (old) Drawing Notations Replaoed by 500-9
Drawing with Different Number
500-9 Example of Notation for Allocated Saaeline 500-10
500-10 Example of Notation for Product Saaellne 500-10
600-1 Manually Prepared Parta List Format 600-2
600-2 Sample Format for Automatic Data Processing 600-3
System (ADPS) Prepared Parta List
600-3 Example of ADPS Prepared Parta List 600-4
19
DOD-STD-00 IOOD(AR)
LIST OF ILLUSIRAIIOMS ( Cmt’ d)
APPENDIX A Drawing Format and Supplementary Blocks Entries

A-1 Title/ Revision/Supplementary Block Entries A-2
A-2 CAD Generated Microfilm Approval Blocks Format A-3
A-3 Integral parts lists ( format and location) A-4
A-4 Drawing Format for B size and larger A-5
A-5 Drawing Format for A size A-6
A-6 Drawing Format for A size continuation sheet A-7
A-7 Drawing Format for Book-form drawing (Title sheet) A-8
A-8 Drawing Format for Combination of Adopted Items A-9
drawing
A-9 Drawing Format for Package Contents drawing A-1 O
APPENDIX B Security classification markings and notations

B-1 Location of Security Markings on Drawings B-4
B-2 Location of Security Markings on Roll Size Drawings B-4
B-3 Location of Security Markings on Associated Lists B-5
B-4 Location of Security Markings on Computer Generated B-5
Associated Lists
B-5 Location of Security Markings on Book-Form hawings B-6
B-6 Regrading Classification Location B-7
APPENDIX C Drawing changes to previously released drawings

c-1 Dimensioning and tolerancing matrix c-2
APPENDIX D Sample drawings

D-1 Spring, Compression D-2
D-2 Assembly (with Find Numbers) D-3
D-3 Spring, compression D-4
D-u Spring, Torsion D-5
D-5 Radioactive material drawing D-6
D-6 Interface control drawing D-7
D-7 Electronic Assembly (with Hardness Critical Items) D-8
D-8 Apparatus List D-9
D-9 Vehicle drawing (top assembly) D-10
D-10 Altered item drawing D-11
D-1 1 Printed wiring hole location drawing D-1 2
D-12 Specification control drawing D-18
D-1 3 Specification control drawing D-19
D-14 Radioactive assembly drawing D-20
D-1 5 Involute Spline Data Drawing D-2 1
D-1 6 Spur Gear Data Drawing D-22
D-1 7 Spur Gear Data Drawing D-23
D-18 General requirements drawing D-24
D-1 9 Interface control drawing D-25
D-20 Photo assembly drawing D-26
D-2 1 Rework drawing D-27
D-22 Cable assembly drawing D-28
D-23 Modification drawing (before) D-29
D-24 Modification drawing ( after) D-30
D-25 Altered item drawing D-3 1
20
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Cent’ d)
FIGURE ILLUSTRATION PAGE
D-26 Altered item drawing D-32

D-27 selected item drawing D-33
D-28 Altered Item drawing/part controlled by D-34
Source Control Drawing)
D-29 .%urce control drawing D-35
D-30 Wiring diagram D-36
APPENDIX E Revision of drawings

E-1 Example of Recording Revisions in accordance with E-4
METHOD A
METHOD B
METHOD C
METHOD D
E-5a Example of Recording Revisions for Formal E-9
Engineering Change Control in accordance with
METHOD E
E-5b Example of Recording Product Baseline and Revisions E-9
in accordance with METHOD E
● E-6
E-7
Example of.
METHOD F
Example of
Recording
Recording
Revisions
Revision
in accordance
on manually
with
prepared
E-10
E-1 1
parts list
APPENDIX F Commonly used CAGE Codes F-2
APPENDIX G Initial/Signature Requirements

G-1 Initial/Signature Requirements G-2
APPENDIX H Marking and distribution statements for technical

documents
a~ “-1
Distribution Statement location for ‘lAn size format H-4
H-2 Distribution Statement location for ‘A~V size H-5
continuation sheet
H-3 Distribution Statement location for nB“ size format H-6
H-4 Distribution Statement location for C, D, E, F, H H-7
and K size format
H-5 Distribution Statement location for ADPS prepared H-8
parts liata
H-6 Distribution Statement location for manually H-9
prepared parts lists
21
DOD-STD-00100D( AR)
o
22
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
CNAYTER 100
PREPARATIOII OF EUGINEERIliG DRAWIWGS
100 General. This chapter lists standards used for the preparation of
Level 3 engineering drawings in accordance with DOD-D-1OOO. It is essential
that drawings possess the following adequacy requirements for competitive
procurements: Detail, subasaembl y, and assembly drawings shall completely
delineate directly or by reference to other documents, engineering
requirements and characteristics such as materials, dimensions, tolerances,
form and finish. The requirements and characteristics shall alao include, as
applicable, anY electrical, mechanical performance, and other requirements
necessary for function and interchangeability. Requirements and
characteristics for all drawings required to be delivered shall be
sufficiently complete and detailed to enable the Government to perform
engineering approval design evaluation, acceptance, inspection, and
installation. These drawings shall also contain sufficient data to enable
the Government or its contractors to competitively procure or reprocure tha
like items.
100.1 Definitions and requirements. Definitions for words and terms

marked with an asteriak (*) are located in Chapter 700.
101 Basic practices.
101.1 Size and format of engineering drawings. “Engineering drawing sheet
● size and format
a. Title block.
shall be In accordance with ANSI Y14. 1 except:
The title block shall be as shown in Appendix A. The

title block is required on continuation sheets. Exception is, that e title
block is not required on continuation sheets for book form drawings.
b.. ‘!Aif size format. ~~A~lsize format shall be .uaed for book form and
word type drawings only.
c. ‘J!! size format. ‘J1! size format shall not be used.
d. Supplemental drawing number blocks. K size drawings shall have the

drawing number, frame number, and revision letter entered in the appropriate
blocks for multi freme microfilming as shown below. Sheet numbers shall be
entered only on multiple sheet drawings. Size of blocks shall be in
accordance with ANSI Y14. 1. Starting direction from right or left requirea
prior approval of the Government Design Activity.
s! RfV y..:
I I 1(
(1) K size drawings shall have a 2.00 margin minimum on each end
with the drawing number (and sheet number for multiple sheet documents)
entered on opposite ende ao as to be readable when the drawings are rolled
from either end and stored.
100-1
DOD-STD-OO1OOD ( AR)
e. Mechanical properties block. A mechanical properties block,” when

required by the Government Design Activity, shall be included on the drawing
as shown in APPENDIX A.
f. Revision block. The revision block shall be as shown in APPENDIX A

for all drawings. (See para 504.1. )
g. Application block. An application block shall be included on the

drawing as ahown in APPENDIX A.
101. 1.1 Continuation sheets. Continuation sheeta of multi-sheet drawings

shall always be the same size as sheet one (1 ) except for roll size; the
lengths may vary.
101.2 Line conventions and lettering. Line conventions and lettering shall
be in accordance with ANSI Y14. 2M except as follows and shall be oapable of
meeting the requirements of MIL-D-5480 except:
a. Lead type. Drawings shall be prepared using black plastic or

plastic carbon combination type lead or ink.
b. Lettering and/or Numerals. Letters and numbers shall be vertical and

applied Using guides, templates or machines. Sizes (letter height) shall
conform to those shown in FIGURE 100-1. All letters and numbers on the same
drawing shall be of uniform size. Alpha and numeric character that are
similar, shall be readily distinguishable to the reader. Notations that
contain a combination of alpha-numeric characters which could be
misinterpreted, shall be shown as follows:
( 1) Letter I shall be shown as “I”, not ~)I~.
(2) Letter O shall be ahown as !lOn not ‘i @t,, !!@’!!, or !!@l.
(3) Letter Z shall be shown aa !1?”, not llZ~l.
(4) Nwneral zero shall be slaahed. The symbol used when slashed
shall be square or oval and not round.
i.e. ‘# #
Acceptabtt M Not accembfe

a Zw Mamno
●
100-2
DOD-STD-001 OOD(AR)
(5) Typewritten characters are permissible where indicated.

Size shall be .10 minimum, maximum shall be as indicated.
LETTERING SIZE
DRAWING SIZE
APPLICATION A, B, C, D, E, F, K
DRAWING NO. .24-.25 .24-.31
PART NO. .19-.25 .24- .25
DWG TITLES, CALLOUTS .19-.25 (1) .24. -25
SUPPLEMENTARY
DATA BLOCK ENTRIES .19-.25 (1) .24-.25
DIMS, NOTES, REV . 14-.16(1) .16-.19
IISECTION” IIVIEW,,
‘vDETAIL* . 14-.16(1) .19-.25
ItA-AI! , u B~! .19-.25 (1) .24-.25
FIGURE 100-1. Lettering Sizes
c. Typewriter ink. Typewriter ink shall be prevented from penetrating

the matte finish or mylar. It is recommended ‘that Pounce No. 58-0690,
Keuffel and Esser Company, or equivalent, be applied to the drawing
immediately after typing.
d. Photo copies (Silver image copy wash off). The use of a

reprographic processing system in the preparation of original engineering
documentation is acceptable with prior approval of the Government Design
Activity. When this method is employed, the documentation generated shall be
regulated by established requirements for original drawings including
reproducibility and microfilming. Material used shall be in accordance with
applicable rewirementa specified in paragraph 104.
101.3 Multi and sectional view drawings. Multi and sectional viewS as
shown on engineering drawings shall be in accordance with ANSI Y14.3 except:
a. Auxiliary and sectional views. Auxiliary and sectional views shall

not be rotated from perpendicular projection except when unavoidable. When
rotation of a view becomes necessary, the degree and direction of rotation
shall appear beneath the view identification. see FIGURE 100-2.
100-3
DOD-STD-00100D (AR)
4,
A O
30” REF
&y)’ fyp
VIEW A-A
SCALE 2/1
.
ROTATED 30” CW
FIGURE 100-2. Auxiliary and Sectional View Rotation From Perpandioular

Pro jection
views
b. Identification
andlor
alphabetical
sections
order
and location
appear
from left
of views
on the same sheet,
to right.
and sections.
If views
If two or more
they are to be arranged
andlor sections
in
are located
●
on different sheets, from where taken, cross reference locations shall be
indicated. See FIGURE 100-3.
4A
30° REF ‘ \
.
>A SH 3, H3
,-~
-y-
E.
VIEW’ A-A”
SHEET” I SH 1, C3
FIGUitS 100-3. bcation of Views andlor Seotiona

o
100-4
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
c. Positioning of items. Items shall be positioned in accordance with

pointing direction specified in FIGURE 100-4.
ITEM POINTING DIRECTION
Artillery Right
Artillery Ammunition Right
Bombs Left
Guided Missiles Left
Jatos Right
. Pyrotechnics Left
Rockets Right
*all Arms Right
. Small Arms Ammunition Right
Vehicles Left
FIOOSE 100-4. positioning Requirements
d. Angle projection symbol. The symbol for third and/or first angle
projection shall be shown on drawinga and so labeled, when required, aa
follows :
( 1) Dual dimensioned drawings shall apecif y the angle of projection.
(2) Metric dimensioned drawings shall specify the angle of

projection.
(3) Decimal inch dimensioned drawings shall specify the angle of

projection if other than third angle.
Pro ject ion Symbol

I
‘ 31
m
FIGURE 100+. Angle Projection Symbols
100-5
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
101.3.1 Isometric and pictorial views. Isometric, pictorial, etc., views

may be shown on engineering drawings providing there is some particular
advantage
101
and clarity
. . . ..U. Metric ——
is not degraded.
. ---. --- values.

--— - Metric values. when used on engineering drawings.
●
shall be in accordance with ASTM E380 and the followi~g. -
a. Paragraph 8.5, method B, of ASTM E380 shall be used in converting and

rounding off decimal numbers to metric. The exact relation, 1 inch = 25. 4MM
applies.
b. When metric values are used on drawings, the following applies:

.
( 1) The following note shall be specified:
‘ASTM E380 APPLIES. METHOD B SHALL BE USED IN

CONVERTING AND ROUNOING OFF. I INCH = 25.4 MM “APPLIES: =
(2) The symbol “ @F7E@ “ shall be shown adjacent to the title

block in .25 high lettering.
101.4.1 Application in new design. The application of the metric system

in new design shall be in accordance with the requirements of Ix3D-STD-l 476.
101.5 Dimensioning and tolerancing. Dimensioning and tolerancing shall be

in accordance with ANSI Y14. 5M-1 982 except for the following: (Pages and
paragraph numbers referenced are from ANSI Y14. 5M-1982. )
a. Where fitting at assembly, selective assembly or locating holes at

assembly is required, the detail of each component shall clearly denote the o
specific dimension or dimensions of features which.will require fitting,
selection, or qualification at assembly. In addition, the fitting or
selection criteria shall be indicated, e.g. , “LOCATEWITHy?ti.fl~ --AT ASSEhiSLYg
i
shall be used to establiah alignment and location of” holes between w
two or more parts. Dimensions shall be specified on the pertinent assembly
drawing.
b. Dimensions and tolerances shall be selected to assure that buildup of

maximum tolerances will not cause functional or assembly difficulties. .
Tolerances shall be as liberal as possible, consistent with assembly,
functional, and reliability requirements, but under no circumstances shall
the desirability of maximizing tolerance limits on a component be permitted
to compromise the feasibility y of assembly and adjustments, or to compromise
performance requirements of the assembled item.
c. The terms “ADVISORY” and “TYPICAL” shall not be used in conjunction

with any dimension or tolerance.
d. Page 29, Para 3.2, Use of Notes to Supplement Symbols. The

symbology system shall be used. Notes may be used to supplement “a geometric
requirement, but shall not be used in plsce of symbols.
e. Page 3, Para 1. 4(h) , Fundamental Rules. Except for electrical Wire,

when gage or code
linear dimensions
numbers are
and identified
shown on drawinga,
by gaging system.
they shall be defined by
●
For example, (BS) Bro~ and $harpe shall be shown aS “,“S3SAGE16[.oaoa]”
(AWG) American Wire Gage shall be shown as “AWGS2 (.0253)”
100-6.
~
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
f. Page 7, Para 1.7.6, Reference Dimensions. Reference dimensions or

reference data shall be labeled ‘l REF1r. Enclosing references within
parenthesis shall not be used.
s. Page 20, Para 2.4.1, Plated or Coated Parts:
( 1) Inorganic Coatings. Dimensional limits and surface texture

requirements normally apply after the application of inorganic type coatings
such as electroplated or chemlcall y displaced metals, ceramic, anodized,
chromated, or oxide conversion type finishes, etc.
(2) Organic Coatings. Dimensional limits and surface texture

requirements normally apply before the application of organic type coatings
such as paint, lacquer, varnishes, enamels, phosphate coating, dry film
lubricants, or other non-integral barrier-type coatings. When both types
(organic and inorganic type) are complemented by an enamel or other top
coating, the dimensional and surface texture requirements would apply after
initial surface treatment.
(3) Drawing Requirements. Unless apecif ied in applicable

specifications and standards, drawings shall contain requirements as part of
the protective finish note regarding
.- dimensional and surfaces texture
requirements, e.g. :
‘DIMENSIONAL LIMITS AND SURFACE TEXTURE APPLY WITH

PLATING.”
‘:JCIJ}:IONAL .LIMITS AND SURFACE. TEXTURE APPLY WITHOUT
. .
“OIMENSIONAt LIMITS AND SURFACE TiXT”URE. APPLY WITH PLATING
ANO WITHOUT PAIN T.”
“:pA&J;;ONAL LIMITs AND >uRfACE, .TEXTURE APPLY.”WI?HOUT
.
.
h. Page 19, Para 2.1.1, App lication. Oeneral Tolerance block shall
not be used for angular tolerance. Angular tolerances shall be shown on
the body of the drawing with each angle specified.
100-7
i. Page 20, Para 2.2 (b), Plus and Minus Tolerance. Linear tolerances
shall be specified as shown in the following examples: For 45 degree anglea,
the tolerance shall be specified as ~, e.g. 450 ~ Q? not 43° + 4° , or
@ - 40.
NOT ACCEPTABLE ACCEPTABLE
.25:::1 .25 k .01 .25+.01 .250 -.005
.25+.0 .25 with twmber of ploces to ogree wit+ ttwxe

-.01 for tolerances shown in general tdemnce Mock.
.250:.: .250 +.010 .25-.01

-.005
j. Page 35, Para 4.2, Datum Features. Featurea that are selected as
datmns shall, be clearly defined and recognizable. To be useful, a datum
shall be accessible on the finished item and shall be a feature preferably
with a small tolerance.
k. Page 16, Para 1.9, Location of Features. When tabular dimensioning

methods are used to locate a large number of similarly shaped features on an
item having mutually perpendicular planes, the method depicted in FIGURE
100-6 may be used. If the part does not have readily identifiable planes
which can be considered mutually perpendicular, as, for example, a circular
part, such planes, shall be established by note or symbol and the origin of
measurement considered to be at the intersection of the planes so
eatabliahed. The direction of measurement shall be clearly indicated, as in
FIGURE 100-7.
H:~E DI%:$ION5 POWJJON HOLE
P A- x-l Yt 0
I .5
“iiiiiq:n
-c-
x
S50-”.01
FIGURE 100-6. Tabular Dimensioning Method
100-8
1. Page 13, Figure 35, Slotted Holes. Method (b) as illustrated is

not acceptable and shall not be used.
~. 10X 24
/-- 2,,.,,s
I
I ?
<–++-)
6)
FIG.35 SLOTTED HOLES
HOLE BASIC DIMENSIONS POSITION HOLE

NO. +X -x +y -y TOL a
I - 2.500 - - L*IO .010@ [A@2] .250 +no7
2 - 1.820 1.360 - .5CKI+.006
3 - .750 2.4C0 - .250 +.C07
4J 1.480 - 2.060 - .250 +.002
5 2.250 - - - .375 +.006
6 1.480 - - 1.720 .375 +.ooa
7 .600 - — 2.450 T .500 +.005
8 - L820 — I.720 lela 0106!)1A@ .250 + .006
“-XL+,
FIGURE 100-7. Tabular Dimensioning Method (Circular Part)
100-9
m. Page 4, Para 1.7 Application of dimensions. Dimensions shall not be

shown to hidden features. Another view, sectional view or broken out
section, shall be used.
i.e.
I
l-~~~
Acceptable
S
Not Acceptable
o
‘$
n. Page 7, Para 1.7.8 Dimensioning Within the Outline of a View.
Dimensions shall always be placed outside the outline. Dimension, extension,
or leader lines shall be arranged to keep them as short as practicable. :
~
100-1o
DOD-STD-00 100D ( AR)
o. Conversion of old dimensioning and tolerancing standards to ANSI

Y14.5F!-1982. When preparing new drawings (new numbers) from old originala
● using
Activity.
the Photo
to ANSI Y14.5M-1982
Copy System,
will
The same standard
updating
require
shall
the dimensioning
the prior approval
be used throughout
and toleranoing
of the Government
a drawing. An
system
Design
.approPriate ISOtatiOII shall be made. See paragraph 118.6x. If ANSI

Y14.5-1973 is applicable, the following exceptions shall apply. ParagraPh
numbers are from ANSI Y14.5-1973.
(1) Para 5-1 11.1.1, Indicating Diameter. Only the diameter

symbol will be used. The symbol will also be used when the feature is shown
as a diameter and wil: follow the value.
(2) Para 5-1 10.5; Reference Dimensions. only the abbrevlatlm
✌ ‘REFn shall
(3)
be used.
Para 5-2.12, Indicating MMC or RFS. The requirements of

RULE.2 apply. ‘MMCti or ‘t RFSt! will always be specified.
(4) Para 5-3.4.2 and FIGURE 9, Feature Control Symbol Incorporating

Datum References. Only the method identified as the ‘usual sequencen in
FIGuRE 79 will be used.
(5) Para 5-1.8.4, Dual Linear Units. Dual linear units (Inch and
Metric units) will be shown only when specifically directed by the Government
Design Activity. See 101.4, Metric Values.
● control
the term
(6)
svmbols
Para 5-6.7.2,
shall include
Types of Runout Control.
“CIRCULAR” Or’ “TOTAL” shall

the type of runout
be entered
All runout
control
below
required.
the feature
feature
Either
control
symbol. On drawings. where there are numerous runout control symbols. a note
such as “UALESSOTHERWISE SPECIFl~ALL RUNOUTCCWROLS ARE.001” may be
used instead of individual entries.
✎ to
P.
implied
Implied intersection.
intersections
Unless
of features,
otherwise
as illustrated
specified,
in
dimensions
FIGURE 100-8,
shown
shall
be interpreted as applying to the theoretical intersection of the surfaces.
‘ FIGURE 100-8. Interpretation of Dimensions Shown to Implied Intersection.
● \
100-u
r. Interior and/or exterior radius. Requirements for interior snd/or

exterior radius may be specified as shown in example FIGURE 100-9.
J
,,
I!!t &TOM :JVO R OF
‘R TO TWORof
.13 MIN
I
FIGURE 100-9. Esample of Drawing Requirement for Edge Radius.
s. Variation in Conf Igurstion. Permissible varistlon In part

configuration shall be as shown in FIGURE 100-10.
R.06 MIN
f-
●
- IL \
FULL RAOIUS (EQUAL m
TO ~ WIOTHI)
WIDTH I r
~,DT”,~?oNEAc,~
FULL RAOIUS (EQUAL To

: WIOTH2 )
\E;TERIOR EOGE) R (EQuAL To
# WIDTH2 )
FIGURE 100-10. Permissible Variation in Part Configuration
ioo-12
0
DOD-.STD-OO1 OOD(AR)
t. Small arms weapons barrel chambers. Barrel chambers shall be

dimensioned in accordance with MIL-STD-1 267.
U. Knurl dimensioning. Knurl dimensioning shall be in accordance with

0
ANSI B94.6.
101.6 Surface texture. Surface texture, waviness and lay shall be

indicated in accordance with ANSI B46. 1.
101.6.1 Surface texture symbols. Surface texture symbols shall be in

accordance with ANSI Y14. 36.
101.7 Screw thread representation. Screw threads shall be represented in

accordance with ANSI Y14.6 and Y14.6aM.
101.8 Gears. Gears shall be delineated in accordance with ANSI Y14. 7.1 ‘
.
and Y14.7.2.
101.9 Mechanical springs. Mechanical springs shall be delineated in

accordance with ANSI Y14. 13.
101.10 Optical elements and optical systems. Optical elements and optical
systems shall be delineated in accordance with MIL-STD-34.
101.11 Computer-aided preparation of product def inition data. Terms and

definitions used in computer-aided preparation of product definition data as
applicable tO engineering drawings shall be in accordance with ANSI Y14. 26.3.
● 101 .11.1
preparing
Computer-Aided
drawings
Design
is acceptable
(CAD) Drawinga.
provided:
The use of CAD in
a. The system is capable of generating full size drawings.
b. The full size drzwings are prepared on material as specified in

paragraph 104 and printing is on the front side of the format.
c. The full size drawings are capable of being revised in a conventional

manner by any activity.
~~ d. Microfilming requirements of MIL-M-9868 can be met.
101. 11.2 Prior Gwernment Design Activity approval is required for any
deviation from para 101.11.1.
101. 11.3 Line conventions may vary for CAD prepared drawings as follows:
a. All lines and letters on originals may be spplied using ink.
b. All lines may be the same width provided microfilm requirements

are met. It Is preferred that lines for the outline of and features of the
item be wider than dimension and extension lines.
●
o. Legibility is adequate to meet the requirements of MIL-D-5480.
100-13
102 Graphic symbols, designations, letter symbols and abbreviations.

Graphic symbols, designations, letter symbols and abbreviations used on
engineering
following
and abbreviations
drawings
standards.
and associated
Where graphic
are not covered
lists
symbols,
by the listed
shall be in accordance
designations,
standard;
letter
with the
symbols
they may be used
0
provided they are explained on each drawing or referenced to an explanatory
document. The referenced explanatory documents shall be furnished with the
engineering drawings. When non-standard graphic symbols, designations,
letter symbols and abbreviations are used repeatedly, they should be
forwarded to the custodian of this standard for possible inclusion in the
respective standard. (See also paragraph 502. 3.)
102.1 Graphic symbols.
.102. 1.1 Graphic symbols for electrical and electronics diagrams. Graphic
symbols for electrical and electronics diagrams shall be in accordance with
IEEE Std 315.
102. 1.2 Graphic symbols for logic functions. Graphic symbols for logic
functions shall be in accordance with IEEE Std 91.
102. 1.3 Graphic symbols for flowchart diagrams. Flowchart symbols for use
in information processing shall be in accordance with ANSI X3:5.
102. 1.4 Graphic symbols for flueric power diagrams. Graphic symbols for
flueric power diagrams shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-1 306.
102. 1.5
architecture
wiring
shall
Graphic
and layout
symbols
and building
diagrams
be in accordance
for electrical
construction.
wiring
Graphic
used in architecture
with ANSI Y32. 9.
and layout
symbols
diagrams
for electrical
and building
used
construction
in
0
102. 1.6 Mechanical symbols. Mechanical and piping symbols shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-17-1.
s-
102. 1.6.1 Graphic symbols for plumbing fixtures. Graphic symbols for
plumbing fixtures for diagrams used in architecture and building conatructlon
shall be in accordance with ANSI Y32. 4.
100-14
102. 1.7 Mechanical symbols for aeronautical, aeroapacecraft, and spacecraft

use. Graphic symbols for aeronautical aerospacecraft, and spacecraft
~rams shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-17-2.
o
102. 1.7.1 Graphic symbols for aircraft hydraulic and pneumatic systems.
Graphic symbols for aircraft hydraulic and pneumatic systems diagrams shall
be in accordance with ANSI/SAE AS1290.
102.1.8 Ship structural symbols. Ship structural symbols shall be in

accordance with MIL-STD-25.
102. 1.9 Architectural symbols. Architectural symbols used’ on

architectural drawings shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-14.
102.1.10 Electrical wiring equipment symbols for shipat drawings. Graphic

symbols for electrical wiring equipment for ships 1 drawings shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-15-2.
102.1.11 Welding symbols. Welding symbols shall be ,in accordance with

ANSI/AWS A2. 4 together with terms and definitions in accordance with AWS
A3. O. ,,
102.1.12 Nondestructive testing symbols. Nondestructive testing symbols

shall be indicated in accordance with ANSI/AWS A2. 4.
a. Nondestructive Examination. Nondestructive examination

requirements shall be specified on the product drawing (See FIGURE “1OO-11 ) or
● on a separate drawing, using symbols in conformance with ANSI/AWS A2. 4.
f“
RT-@EE NOTE
PT+sEE NOTE
0’
Ill+ste NOTE”
46*
-+l,.,
RU OIAGR~
WHEN MORE THAN ONE CASTING IS
SIMULTANEOUSLY X- RAYEO, THE RAOIATION
SOURCE SHALL BE PLACEO OVER THE CENTER
Of EACN 6ROUP.
FIGURE 100-11. Example of Radiographic Position Diagram
100-15
DOD-STD-001 OOD( AR)
102.1.13 Graphic symbols for fluid power diagrams. Graphic symbols for
fluid diagrams shall be in accordance with ANSI Y32. 10.
102.2 Designations.
102.2.1 Reference designations for electrical and electronics parts and

equipment. Reference designations shall be assigned in accordance with IEEE
Stds 200 and 315.
102.3 Letter symbols and abbreviations.
102.3.1 Letter symbols. Letter symbols, when used on engineering

drawings, shall be in accordance with ANSI Y1 0.3 and IEEE Stds 260 and 280.
102. 3.2 Mathematical signs and symbols. Mathematical signs and symbols
shall be in accordance with ANSI Y1O. 20 and Y1 0.20a.
102.3.3 Abbreviations. Abbreviations shall be in accordance with

MIL-STD-12.
103 Diagrams..
103.1 Electrical and electronics diagrams. Electrical and electronics

diagrams and Interconnection diagrams shall be prepared in accordance with
ANSI Y14. 15, Y14. 15a and Y14.15b.
103.2 Fluid power diagrams. Fluid power diagrams shall be prepared in

accordance with ANSI Y1 4.17.
103.3 Printed wiring drawings. Printed wiring drawings shall be in

accordance. with, as applicable, the requirements of MIL-STD-2’75 and ANSI/
IPC-T-50B .
103.3.1 Printed board description in digital form. When printed board

descriptions are in digital form (defined either by metric or customary
units) the description and form. shall be in accordance with ANSI/I PC-D-350.
104 Drawing Material. Drawing material shall be plastic sheet in

accordance with L-P-51 9, Type 1, Class 2, .003 thick or Type 1, Class 1, .004
thick . Stable base plastic sheet shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-2T5 for
printed circuit boards.
104.1 Duplicate Original. Brownline Sepia and ammonia devloped

reproductions are not acceptable as duplicate originals or stable base
mastera. The uae of silver image duplicate origials on material as specified
in paragraph 104 requires approval by the Government Design Activity, as
specified in paragraph 101. 2d.
105 Security classification and notation. See APPENDIX B.
100-16
DOD-STD-00100D (AR )
106 Scale. All drawings shall be drawn to soale except those described in
o parag~06.
106.1
full
reduced
Selection
scale.
3.
When full
or enlarged
of scale.
scale
scale.
Drawings should
ia not practicable,
It la desirable,
ahow
drawings
whenever
an object
may be prepared
practicable, that
or
to
assembly to
detail drawinga be prepared to the same scale as pertinent assembly drawings.
106.2 Indication of scale. The scale or scales to which drawings are

prepared shall be indicated thereon by the fractional method in the drawing
soale block. The scales to which the majority of views and sections are
drawn shall be entered as a fraction ( 1/1, 1/4, 2/1, etc .), after ‘SCALE” in
the space provided on the drawing format. me scale cf each view or section
drawn to other than the predominating scale shall be entered directly below
the title of the view or section. e.g. SECTION A-A
SCALE-2A
106.2.1 Fractional method. The fractional method expresaea, in” the form
of a ccmmon fraction, the ratio of the size of the object as drawn to its
full size.
Full size - 1/1

Enlarged - 10/1, 4/1, 2/1
Reduced - 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/10, 1/20, 1/30, c ~/40i 1/50, 1/60, 1/100
106.3 Drawinga not to scale. In the case of diagrams, isometrics,

perspective, tabulated and similar drawings not prepared to any ,.scale, the
● word “NONE” Shall

drawing format.
be entered after %CALE” in the wime Provided on the
106.4 Dimensions not to scale. Where drawings were :or,iginally drawn to

scale, but due to revision of the drawing some dimensions are not to scale,
the not-to-scale dimension shall be underlined with a straight line. The
configuration depicted shall be corrected a,t the firat drawing redraw.
107 Radioactive materials. All drawings pertaining to Items using

radioactive materials shall be suitably marked with a caution note. See
Append ix D for example.
108 Marking and marking location.
+’ 108.1 Identification
the physical application
marking requirements.
of identification
The criteria
numbers
fcr determining
and what parta require ‘
identification shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-130.
100-17
DOD-STD-00 100D(AR)
108. 1.1 Drawing requirements. When an item requires identification

markings, its drawing shall specify the exact marking requirements. Those
requirements shall define the method and contents of the marking(s). For
markings to be applied by rubber stamp, stencil, silk screening and similar
o
processes, the material to be used in marking and any protective coatinga
shall also be specified. The Desi!.cn Activity CAGE Code soecifled shall be
that of the Design Activity that o~iginally isaigned the ~tem~ a drawing
number, even though it may be different than a design activity identified on
the drawing as ‘t CURRE~!. lhe identifying number shall be the part number of
the item as shown on ita drawing. Example of requirements to be specified on
drawings is as follows:
n2M mcN71FlcA710N: METALs7AMp,ENGRAVECR

ELECIRO ETCH lHE FOLLOWINGMARKINGSIN
ACCORDANCEWITH MIL-STO -130 IN .13~2
HIGH CHARACTERS
192cc -123_
MFR- C----
F MANFAC7URER%CAGECODE
ITEM IDENTIFICATION:METALSIAMP THE F0LLcwlN6

MARKINGSIN ACCORDANCE WITH MlL- SID -8S0.
?9207ASSY823WB-
‘FR-%=ACT”REF?S CAGECODE
ITEM IDEN7irIcA780FJRUBBERSTAMPOR STENCIL

THE FOLLOWINGMARKING5IN AccOROANcEwmi
,~~~~~;DH;&O&T&c~~&C INK 11-1-1795 IN
192C4-12340009-
.J4FR-C---~
t MANUFACTURER%
CAGECODE
i3ARKING55HALL BE cOATEOWITH CLEAR
LACQUERTT-L-~
o
a. The manufacturer rs CAGE Code (or FSCM or NSCM) will be the code of
the prime contractor ( not subcontractor) who is furnishing the part under k
contract with the government. For items defined by specification or source
‘&
ccntrcl drawings, the MFR CAGE Code to be applied will be that of the
manufacturer of the item. In addition, Speciflcaticn Control Items shall
alao be marked with the Government Design Activity CAGE Cede and drawing
number. Examples of requirements to be-specified-on drawings are as foilows:
( 1) For Scurce Control items:
I1OJMENTIF!CA1low RUBBERSTAMPOR SIENCIL

THE FOL1OWINGMARKINGSIN ACCORDANCE WITH
MIL- STD-130 WITH WHITE INK 11-1-1795 IN
.13*.02 H,GH CHARAC,ER2,
?92CCS0CN1450CJY31-
,MFR-i=_.--x
~~ \MANu,Ac,uRER% ~,, ~,,
MARKINGSSHALL OE c0A7Eo wnrn cNAR
LACQUER11-L-SC
(2) For Specification Control Items:
ITEM ,DENIIFICATIOF! RUBBERSTAMPOR STENCIL

THE FOLLOWINGMP.RKINCJm AccOROANcSWITH
MIL-s70- cc w17H CONTRACTING.wLOR INK
17+-1795.
79207 -155CC03-
“F’-zzzi%ix
100-18
DOD-STD-001 OOD(AR)
● shall
b. me location
be specified
to functional/fit
and Size (if
on the depiction
requirements
necessary) of the identification
of the item if it must be controlled
or subsequent finish application
marking
(paint.
due
.etc. ). The location shall be identified by =! leader POinting to the surface

or, if necessary, by dimensional y locating the marking.
The location of identification marking on items that are subsequent Y

camouflaged shall also be controlled and should be specified on aurfacas that
are not sub jetted to additional painting.
c. Items, which by their nature cannot be physloall y marked, shall be

identified on their container in addition to or in combination with
requirements of MIL-STD-129. An example of requirements to be specified on
drawings is ahown below:
( 1) For other than Specification or Source Control items:
llEW!DENTIFIC&TlON:APPLY THE FOLLWIIN6

MARKING10 CONTAINERIN ACCORDANCE
WITH MI1-SID -130
*9200 -123000er
‘FR-c-\eN,RAc,oR.s ,.,,,,,,
(2) For Specification Control items:
ITEM IDENTIFICATION:APPLY THE FOLL~,NC

MARKINGTO CONTMNCR M ACCORDANCE
WITH 211 L- STD-1%
. 792C0 -12300023-
.,,-~~-=:;~
MANUFACWRERs
CAGECODE PARTNO
(3) For Source Control items:
ITEM IDENTIFICATION:&PPLY THE FOLLGWING

MARKING10 CONThlNER IN ACCORDANCE
WITH MIL-STD -1%
7920730cN76 *323.
‘FR-%%ACT”RER’S CA,, .0,;
100-19
d. Requirements for identification marking of aaaembllea shall be

0.
specified on the assembly drawing. If aasembly marking is physically applied
to a part at the component level, the actual marking requirements shall be
specified on the component drawing. The aaaembly drawing shall specify the,
marking requirement by reference to the component drawing.
e.g., on assembly drawing 1230008
In general notea
@ FOR IDENTIFICATION
MARIUN6
REQuIREMENTSSEE 12320?7
,.
+“
s
8RACKE1
-1230077
On component drawing 1230077
In general notes
@lTEM ,DENT,F,cAT,ON:
METALs,hMP 1“, FOLLOWING
MARKINGIN ACCORDANCE
V9207ASSY1230008-
WITH MIL-STO -830.
25
a
%’
“R”--”q&!,#E&
;
‘,
2
.,23.0s
.“,~
J3tD
108. 1.2 Matched parts. Matched parts require additional and specific part
_number markings. The part number of the item aa aaaembled shall be applied
to all parts of the matched aet. The individual parta shall not have
separate, individual part numbers applied.
a. Matched (parts) sets shall be serialized with a aerial number

composed of the last group of numerals of the applicable government contraot
under which the parts are manufactured followed by a consecutive serial
number. For example, for contract DAAA09-85-C-0630, the f irat matched set
serial number would be “SET 0630-1 n , and the second set would be ‘SET
0630-2n, etc.
“o
100-20
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
b. Drawing requirements for matched parts shall include identification

and serial number marking. An example of requirements to be specified on
drawings is shown below.
@
nEU IDENTIFICATION:MET.4LSTkMP,ENGRAvEOR.
ELECTRO ETCH w FOLLOWINGMARKIN* IN
ACCORDANCEWITH t!lL-STD-l~
19?04-?796510
UFR- c:-YMUFACIURCR’S CAGE(XXX
SE1-~:d-~.-~
c. In addition, the drawing shall contain the following note:
MATCHEDSET SERIAL NUMBER9iALL BE APPLIED

BEL0w THE ITEM IDENTIFICATION+ND BE CCMFfJEED
, OF THE WORD%E1- FOLLOWED67 THE Ltil FWR
NUMERALSOF THE CONIRACT NuMBER, A CASH
AFQA CONSECUTIVESERIALNUMBER.
108. 1.3 Markings other than part number identification.
108. 1.3.1 Rubber products. Rubber products shall also be marked with
identification in accordance with MIL-STD-190. Drawings shall specify the
type of marking, the marking material, the color(a) for environmental
resistance and any exceptions to the MIL-STD-190 requirements.
108.1 .3.2 CARC painted items. All items, i.e., tsnka, trucks, howitzera,
etc. , coated with chemical agent resistant coating ( CARC) shall have the word
“cARCm and date applied near the data plate or nameplate of the item. The
word ●cARC” shall be in contrasting color, black or green, in block letters,
.31 high minimum. The marking may be applied directly or by label or decal.
● The drawing shall specify the exact method of applying and location of the
word ‘CARC”,.
108. 1.3.3 Sensitive Electronic Device (SED) Items.
a. SED items shall be marked in accordance with MIL-STD-130.
b. Detail drawings of SED items and drawings of assemblies, equipment

and equipment enclosures containing SED items, that are physically marked,
shall specify the method, location and contents of the marking. For those
applied by rubber stamp, stencil, silk screening and similar processes, the
Q material to be used in marking and any protective coatings shall also be
specified.
c. Marking symbols:
( 1) For SED items, the symbol shall be in accordance with

MIL-STD-1285, i .e. :
100-21
(2) For assemblies, equipment and equipment enclosures, the symbol

and accompanying note shall be as shown below.
+-# THIS EQUIPMENT CON%’ti:l?!RTS AND ASSEMBLIES
{J t’
SUBJECT.
FORCES.
TO DAMAGE BY ENVIRONMENTAL
USE PRECAUTIONARY
HAN OLING THIS EQUIPMENT.
FIELD
PROCEDURES WHEN
(3) The size of the marking shall be consistent with size. of item to
be marked.
(4) When the physical size of the item precludes the above marking,
the marking will be applied on the unit package. In those cases, the
following marking requirement shall be specified on the drawing in the
general notes:
‘SENSITIVE ELECTRONIC DEVICE CAUTION

SYMBOL IS REQUIRED ON CONTAINER”
109 Optionsl/Alternative Designs. Optional/alternative designs of

manufacturing a part, such as ‘Icastingtt vs ‘weldment~ may be specified.
Where the differences between the designs would cause confusion in one set of
views, an additional view or views shall be prepared with complete
dimensional and other data specified thereon. ‘fhe additional view or views
shall be labeled ‘! Optional Designn or ‘t Alternative Designti. Multiple sheet
drawings shall be prepared when necessary.
110 Depiction of part. Drawings shall show the finished part (end item).
Depiction of forgings, castings, blanks, etc., prior to–finishing operations
shall not be delineated (either separately or on Item drawing). As forgedl
cast/etc. , surfaces remaining after finishing operations is permissible.
Except for heat treatment and joining operations, e.g. , soldering, brazing,
riveting, etc. , the drawing shall not specify the process to achieve or
obtain the part.
100-22
DOD-STD-OOIOOD(AR)
@
111 Module Data.
a. For a module, complete requirements covering all input and output

parameters shall be specified. Typically, the data shall include, but not be
limited to:
(I) A description of t;he modulets function
(2) Input power
(3) Input and output signal characteristics in terms of voltage

levels, wave shapes, pulse widths, rise and delay times, and settling ~ime.
b. Where necessary to define a functional requirement, complete

inspection test methods and procedures, including schematic diagrams of all
inspection equipment setups shall be specified on the drawing or in a
separate document referenced on the drawing.
c. In densely packaged modules, assemblies, units, wire harnesses and

cables, the precise wire lay of leads carrying video, RF, IF, audio aignala,
logic pulses, as well as DC power, should, if necessary, be controlled by
specific requirements on the drawings to preclude the adverse effects of
coupling crosstalk, signal interference, etc. In those cases where special,
particular or peculiar requirements can only be defined by step-by-step
assembly, procedures, such information shall be specified.
d. In addition, if inspection and alignment procedures are necessary to

define functional requirements, the data required to functionally duplicate
electrical inspection setups, including all alignment procedures used in
adjustment and measurement of performance, shall also be specified. Complete
step-by-step sequences shall be delineated, if necessary. Data shall include
the electrical or mechanical characteristics for which the alignment is
performed; e.g., wave shapes, oscillating frequencies, voltage and power
levels, rise times, delay times, etc.
112 Analog signal processing circuits. Performance requirements for

analog circuits shall include and completely define all input and output
signal parameter.
113 Digital signal processing circuits. Performance requirements for

digital circuits shall include all possible combinations of inputs and
resulting outputs. Input and output signal parameters shall b; explicitly
defined. Truth tables alone will not be considered sufficient to specify the
input and/or output characteristics of a given digital circuit. Truth tables
may be provided as supplementary information. GO/NO-GO type acceptance
criteria shall be acceptable only in those measurements where test
effectiveness is not compromised. System clocks to which generated test
signals are referenced shall meet the same frequency accuracy and short term
stability requirem~ts as the end item clock or of the system clock used to
● generate input
when applicable:
signals to the end item. The following shall be specified
100-23
a. Rise and fall times
b. Amplitude and levels
c. Phase relationships to other inputs
d. Pulse width
e. Overshoot and ringing
f. Source impedance characteristics If non-linear
g. Jitter
h. Frequency and atability
i. Bit patterna or ‘wordsn
j. Interface circuitry required
114 Reference Identifiers. A reference identifier Is issued to provide

supplementary identification of an item that has been identified previously
on the drawing or on a subordinate assembly. The uae of reference
identifiers shall be limit.@ to instances that add substantially to drawing
clarity. In order to differentiate from the item identification csllouta,
the following format shall be used:
a. Reference identifier shall be either the baaic name or the basic name
preceded by modifier(s) or part number as necessary (in instances where there
are more than one part with the same basic name such aa ‘PLATE!! ltSCREWn
etc.).
b. Reference identifier shall be followed by the word I!REFN.
Sxemples: ~ RANSMISSION - ~
*FRONT BUMPER -R2F’
*123xxxx-2 -Rff=
115 Application block entries. Cross references shall be entered in the

drawing application block on sheet one (1) only aa follows: The entry in the
‘NEXT ASSY!t column shall be the drawing number(a) of the aaaemblies to which
the detsil or aasembly pertaina. The entry in the “USED ONn column shall be
the nomenclature of the syatemlsubayatem to which the item pertaina. As a
minimum, the nomenclature entered shall include the Model designator and
basic noun or baslo noun phrase.
116 Microcircuit. Drawings for. microcirculta shall contain requirements

as specified in MIL-M-3851o, which include detail apecificationa, required
tablea, diagrams, schematics, interfacing connections and configuration.
100-24
DOD-STD-00 100D (AR)
117 Drawing Notes.
,0’ 117.1
technical
using
Language
essence,
the aimpleat
style.
presented
The
in language
words and phraaes that
paramount
free
will
consideration
of vague and ambiguous
convey the intended
on
terms,
meaning.
a drawing ia its
Inclusion of essential Information shall be complete, whether by direct

statements or reference to other documents. Consistency in terminology and
organization of material will contribute to the drawing!s clarity and
usefulness. Sentences shall be short and concise. Punctuation must aid in
reading and prevent misreading. Well-planned word order requires a minimum
of punctuation. When extensive punctuation Is necessary for clarity, the
sentence(s) shall be rewritten. Sentences with compound clauaes shall be
qonverted into short and concise separate sentences.
117.2 Commonly used worda and phrases. Certain words and phraaea are
frequently used on a drawing. The following rules shall be applied:
a. Reference documents shall be citad aa follows:
(1) “conforming to... n
(2) “as specified in... ”
(3) ‘in accordance with...”
In any case, use the same wording throughout the drawing.
0
b. !Iunlesa otherwise apecifiedn shall be used to indicate an alternative
course of action. The phrase shall always come at the beginning of the
sentence, and, if poaaible, at the beginning of the note. This phraae shall
be used only when it is possible to clarify its meaning by providing a
reference such aa another requirement or document.
117.3 .Use of ‘shalln, ‘willn, ‘should” and “may”.
‘“”8. a.
whenever
‘Shalln. ‘Shalln,
a requirement is
the emphatic
intended
form
to express
of the verb,
a provision
shall
that
be used
is binding,
b. nwilln. ‘Willn may be used to express a declaration of purpose

on the part of the Government. It may be necessary to uae “will” in cases
when simple futurity is required.
c. ‘Shouldn and ‘Mayn. Use “should!! and “may” whenever it ia

necessary to axpresa non-mandatory provisions.
117.4 Indefinite terms. The terms ”andlor”, “etc. n, “e.g.!, and “i. e.n
shall not be used. On drawinga, definite, precise hhgUage ia imperative.
Indefinite terms shall not be used.
117.5 Location of notes. The notes shall be placed in column form

starting, at the top left hand, corner of the drawing or beneath the gear
and/or apline data block.
●’ 100-25
a. Multi-sheet drawings. For multi-sheet drawings, except for book

form, all notes shall be on sheet 1 and continued on sheet 2, if necessary,
and numbered consecutively starting with 1*111on sheet T and continuing with
next sequential number on sheet 2.
b. Book-form drawings. For book form drawings, the notes shall be

located on sheet 2 and subsequent sheets if required.
c. Local notes. Local notes or notes on the face or field of the

drawing should be avoided. Local notes should only be used to clarify.
requirements when a general note will not suffice.
117.6 Note contents. Drawing notes are pertinent data given in word form
and used to complement the delineation of other given data. The arrangement
of the notes shall not be interpreted as an order of precedence or sequence
in manufacturing, assembly, etc., unless so specified on the drawing. ‘he
following shall be applicable in the preparation/use of notes.
a. Notes shall be numbered consecutively starting with NOTE 1 at the top

of the column.
b. Subparagraphs shall be indented and identified by capital letters in

alphabetical order.
c. Note form requirements shall supplement depiction on assembly

drawings where necessary to define the required degree of looseness,
tightness, rotation, or extent of travel without bind under spring .action,
orientation of parts or slots, etc. ”
d. Filling in voids (open spaces) to accommodate deletions and additions

is not required and is not preferred.
e. When a note is deleted from a drawing, do not delete the number or

renumber notes. Leave visible to indicate its previous use and potential
future use.
f. Specifications and standards shall be listed without revision level

or date, except for Dimensioning and Tolerancing Standard, ANSI Y14.5M-1982,
ANSI Y14.5-1973, and D3D-STD-O0100D( AR).
K. On tabulated drawings, different materiala may be tabulated or

specified by notes.
h. All specifications and standards to be used on drawings shall be

reviewed for currency, adequacy, applicability, limitations and determination
of need and also for class, grade, type, form, etc. , ,and any other
options required shall be specified.
100-26
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
i. A 3/8 hexagon shall be placed around
●
the note number when the note la
referenced in the field of the drawing.
Example: (In general notea)
IN ACCORDANCE WITH MIL- R-10509~

DIMENSIONAL LIMITS AND SURFACE TExTURE APPLY WITJ@JT PLATING.
Ii ACCORDANCE WITH WW- C-440, TYPE 1, GRAOE B, SIZE 1/2.
FINISH 5.1.1 PLUS 24.1 OF MIL-510-171, 3S3.GREEN,
PRIMEO BEFORE ASSEMBLY.
ITEMIDENTIFICATION: METALSTAMP,ENGRAVEOR
ELECTRO ETCH THE FOLLOWINGMARKINGSIN
ACCORDANCEWITH MIL- STO-130 IN .13=2
HIGHCHARACTERS.
“1920D-12300D07
MFR- ~.;-~
qOAUFACTUR~RJS CAGE COOE
Examples: (In field of drawing)
,6- RESISTOR -RN60C24S2f @
3- CLAMPS” @
● drawing.
❊✎ Notes shall not duplicate information specified elsewhere on the
k. Where two or more statements are being considered for uae in a single
note, it is usually better to make each statement in a separate note.
1. Each drawing for which a QAP is prepared shall have the following
note entered in the general note column. The QAP number specified shall be
that associated with the itam.
j-) ‘IXJALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS (QAP) 12345XX8

APPLY TO THIS ITEM:
m. Information conveyed by notea shall be accurate, complete and should

have only one interpretation.
n. Drawings for all new items shall referenoe ANSI Y14. 5M-1982 (Ref:
See 101.50. )
Other pertinent standarda which are used and not speoified in

D3D-%D-OOIOOD( AR) shall be listed in the notes.
100-27
p. Any required processes (see paragraph 110) for an item shall be

specified in the general notes. The note must be complete and define all of
the pertinent variables. The hex symbol shall be used, if necessary, to
reference specific locations or restriction of the procees, as related to
item conf Iguration.
r. Protective finishes shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-171 and

specified in’ the general notes.
Example:
“FINISH 5.1.1 PLUS 20.24.1 OF MIL-STD-1~1 ,

3S3 GREEN, PRIMEO BEFORE ASSEMBLY.
s. Drawings shall contain protective finish requirements consistent with

repair psrt provisioning, application of additional finishes either at
subsequent assemblies (next or at system level) ( e.g. , finish painting or
camouflage painting).
t. Threaded fasteners. Torque requirements for threaded fasteners

shown on assembly drawings shall be specified as a general note when
necessary.
u. General edge* /corner*

break* requirements shall be specified as a
general ncte. Requirements specificfor feature(s) shall be shcwn where
applicable in the field of the drawing. If applicable in more than one
place, the requirement may be identified with the hexagon symbol method and
specified in the general nctes.
ExamPlea: (In general notes)
“ALL EDGES AND CORNERS SHALL BE FREE FROM BURRS.”
WALL EOGES AND CORNERS SHALL BE BROKEN .005 + .010.”

~tALL ExTERIOR CORNERS SHALL BE BROKEN R.02’+.D2.”
“@ .OZ MAX EDGE BREAK.”
“ALL “INTERIOR CORNERS ANO EDGES SHALL BE R.03 + .02.”
Examples: (In field of drawing)
“@ 6 PLACES~” %.x @#
100-28
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
v. Reference to special drawings or procedures shall be specified as in

the following examples:
● *FOR .SCHEMATIC,
*FOR PERFORMANCE
SEE’ ORAWING
REQUIREMENTS 9SEE MIL-P-12XXX9

123 XXXX5*:
W. Rights-to-use Note on Government Drawings. men the source of a

privately developed item agrees to furnish the privately owned data thereof
in excess of and in addition to requirements under the contract and to permit
use solely by or for the Government of all or any part of such data including
such use In the preparation of military form drawings, all documents
depicting such data-when furnished will contain the-following in ‘L- “-----’
notes:
“THE BLANK COMPANY. OETROIT. “MIC~~GAN. PART/DRAWING
NUMBER AE 203. OATEO I JANUARY 1980, CORRESPONDS 10.
THE OATA OEPICTEO ON THIS ORAWING IN PART OR IN WHOLE.
THESE DATA ARE Furnished FoR UNRESTRICTED IEEINCON.WCTION
WITH ANY GOVERNMENT MANuFACTURE OR PROCUREMENT. AND
NO OTHER US2 IS AIJTHORIZEO BY AFDRESAIO COMPANY.”
The communication establishing the reference in the above note, as well as

the data unrestricted for government use, is normally acquired during
development of design and in the selection of components.
x. The applicable standards, performance requirements and ❑ission item

specifications, etc., shall be listed in note 1 aa illustrated in the
following examples: (Mission item specification will be those identified by
the Government Design Activity).
●
_APPLICABLE STANDARDS/SPECIFICATIONS:
A. DOO- STO - 001000 (AR)
B. ,ANSI Y14.5M-1982
Co MIL-W-13855”
.
_.APPLICABLE STANDARDS/SPECIFICATIONS:
A. DOO-STD-100
8. ANSI Y14.5-1973*
II
_.APPLlcA8LE”sTANDARos/sPEclFlcATloNs
A. MI L- STD-8ti”
y. Special notes for kits.
( 1) Application note. An application note will alway~e

included, noting the end items involved, for example:
A. Modification kit.
“THIS KIT IS DESIGNED FOR FIELD ‘MODIFICATION (DAMWo)

PURPOSES ONLY AND APPLIES .TO ALL CARGO TRUCKS, M91x”
100-29
DoD-STD-00 10OD (IIR)
B. Accessory” kit.
“THIS KIT IS APPLICABLE TO A“RMOREo
PERSONNEL CARRIER M22X.”
c. Conversion kit. ”THIS KIT IS DESIGNED TO CONVERT A
SEMITRAILER, VAN M51X TO A SHOP VAN M80X.”
(2) Installation note. When kits are to be furnished in quantity

and only a limited number of installation instruction drawings are required,
the following installation note will be used: ‘THIS KIT IS TO BE INSTALLED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH INSTRUCTION OWG XX Xi XXXX WHICH WILL “BE FU,RNISHEOBY THE
GOVERNMENT TO” THE KIT MANUFACTURER AND/OR INSTALLERS IN SUCH QUANTITIES AS MAY
BE OEEMEo NECESSARY. - When an installation fnatruction drawing ia
required with each kit, the Installation instruction drawing will be listed
as an integral part of the package contents drawing.
z. Cross-reference of special tools. Special tools shall be cross-

-referenced on the drawing of the part and aaaembly to which the tool applies.
Cross reference shall be by use of a note as in the following example:
“foR ‘SPECIAL TOOL, SEE DRAWING xxxxxxxx (REF)”
This cross-reference ia required to assure consideration of the tool in the

event of a proposed change to the part.
118 Material Notes.
a. The material note shall specify an adopted non-government standard or

government specification number and applicable compositions), (material
numbers). Unless otherwise indicated, the material specification shall apply
to the finished item.
b. Materials shall be specified by indicating the baaic name,

specification, composition, and UNS designation (if listed in Unified
Numbering System SAE HSJ 1086/ASTM DS 56) as a reference, e.s. , ‘“”STEEL,
ASTM AI08: CF1211 (REF uNS G12110j”. The condition, tamper, class, type,
grade, etc., is not normally specified for material that requirea subsequent
heat treatment. Also the size of the material shall not be indicated as part
of the material requirements unless it reflects the end (finished) item. The
form shall be indicated only if critical to the finished product
requirements.
Sample Notes.
“STEEL, ASTM A108: CF 1211 THRU 1213 (REF: UNS G12110
THRU G12130)”
“STEEL, MIL-S-16974: 4340 (REF: UNS G43400)”
100-30
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
c. Material requirements and selection shall be listed as a note.
● d.
a note
On tabulated
or as one of
detail drawings,
the tabular
the required
requirements.
material may be entered as
e. Commercial materials shall not be specif led on drawings. When

Government or industry speclf ications/standarda are not available, the
commercial material shall be defined in specifications prepared in accordance
with MIL-STD-490 or MIL-STD-961 and that specification shall be used for
material requirements.
f. When an item is a casting, it shall be classified in accordance

with MIL-STD-2175 (See 102.1. 12). A casting classification note, ae in the
following example, shall be specified on the drawing.
“CASTING CLASSIFICATION. MI L- STD-2175: CLASS I,
GRADE B. RADIOGRAPHIC POSITION REQUIREMENTS SHALL
BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIAGRAM SHOWN.”
g. It is recommended that alternative materials also be specified if
available.
119 Signing and dating drawings.
119.1 Signing drawings. Drawings shall be signed to verify technical

content and adherence to applicable standards. See APPENDIX G for initial/
signature requirements for manual and CAD generated drawinga.
119. 1.1 Signing for another. Drawings shall be signed only by designated
●
persons unless responsibility is specifically delegated.
119. 1.2 Redrawn drawings. Redrawn drawings with same number shall be
treated as revised drawings! Signature/Initials entries in all applicable
blocks shall be printed on the new drawing, except for signature/initials for
revision block entries for that revision.
119.2 Dating drawings. The dating of engineering drawings serves to

establish the original date* for historical record purposes. The original
date will be retained for the life of the drawing. The method of specifying
the original date shall be numerical by year-month-day (with a dash between
entries) and shall be entered in the DATE block. For example 10 June 1986
would be “86-06-10! The original date shall be retained on redrawn drawings
(same number) . On multi-sheet drawings, all sheets (except A size
h continuation sheet) shall have the same original date as on sheet 1. (See
paragraph 402.17. )
100-31
119.3 Initial and Signature Block. The drawing format contains a block
for entries to be made by the draftsperson, checker, engineera and
individuals
shall
responsible
be as follows:
for approval of the data. Entries for these blocks
●
a. DRAWN BY - The initials of the person who prepared the original
drawing.
b. CHECKER - lhe initiala of the person who checked the original drawing
for completeness, accuracy, and preciseness.
c. ENGINEER - The signature of the engineer responsible for the design

of the item depicted.
d. DRAWING APPROVAL - The signsture of the authorized Government Design

Activity representative responsible for drawing format and completeness.
Date entry is optional.
e. DESIGN APPROVAL - The signature of the authorized Government Design

Aotivity representative responsible for design technical adequacy and
conformance to end item requirements. Date entry is optional.
f. MATL ENGR - The initials of the authorized Government Design Activity

or authorized contractor representative(a) (or both) responsible for the
adequacy of materiala, heat treatment, mechanical properties, and protective
finish.
●
119.4 Additional signatures. Additional signatures as required by the
preparing activity may be entered in blocks added in the optional use block.
See APPENDIX A.
119.5
signed
printed
CAD prepared
as defined
initials and
drawings.
above. After
names of
CAD prepared
approval,
those who
drawings
subsequent
initially
shall be initially
generations
signed the
may show
first
✼
generation drawing.
119.6 For ❑icrof ilms generated directly from the computer without an
original drawing (prior Government Design Activity approval iS required). the
original date and. signatures shall be applied to the back of a master silver
microfilm aperture card in blocks duplicating those of the drawing format.
see FIGURE 100-12. Subsequent generationa may also show printed initials and
names of those who initially signed the firat generation drawing.
100-32
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR )
,.B
J
“3
EeAwu W DAm—
cHE’awR ,ENMNEER
0RAWN9 —U.
ocuON APPnwu.
UATI, CNGR
‘B.
UR REVISION — DA=—
,
FIGURE 100-12. Sample Mcrofllm Aperture Card Signature/Revision Blooks
.,. .
This sample drawing la informational only and complete to tha degree necessary
tO illustrate ● type of drawing.. Actual format and drawing shall conform to
the textual requirements ●et forth in this atmdard.
100-33
DOD-STDOO1OOD(AR)
THIS PACE IJIFIBIANK INTENTIONALLY

●
●
100-34
DOD-STD-001 OOD(AR )
CNAPTER 200
TYPES OF ENGINEERING DRAWINGS
● 200 General.
engineering
‘his
drawings
chapter
normally
defines
prepared
and illustrates
by and for
the types of
the Departments and
Agencies of the Department of Defense.
201 Definitions and requirements. Definitions for words and terms marked
with an asterisk (*) are located in Chapter 700.
201.1 Engineering drawing. An engineering drawing is an engineering

document that discloses (directly or by reference) by means of pictorial or
textual presentations, or combinations of both, the physical and functional
end-product* requirements of an item.
. 201. 1.1 Application. Normally, several types of engineering drawings

combined into sets with attendant associated lists are required to completely
define the end-product* requirements of an item. As a minimum, a combination
of detail and assembly drawings may suffice to define these requirements.
However, as the complexity of the item increases, specialized engineering :
drawings may be required to provide for full engineering description. As a
rule, combinations of. detail , assembly, control, installation and
dlagrarmnatic drawings will provide the necessary engineering description. In
certain cases, special purpose drawings (paragraph .201. 9) may be required for
management control, logistic purposes, configuration management,
manufacturing aids, and other unique functions as might be required by a
Government Oesign Activity.
● 201. 1.2 Integral

the drawing,
parts
ita location
list.
and size
When a parts
shall
list is prepared
be as specified
integral
in APPENDIX A-3.
with
(See 401. 6.) Additional parts lista blocks may be located to the left of,
and adjacent to, the original block or on a continuation sheet of the ssme
drawing. The integral parts list shall not be utilized without prior
approval of the responsible Government Design Activity.
d
201.2 Detail drawing. A detail drawing depicts complete item requirements
for the part(s) delineated on the drawing except when additional end-product*
requirements are accomplished on inseparable assembly drawings, e.g. , mating
holes.
201.2.1 Monodetail drawing. A monodetail drawing delineates a single part.

see FIGURE 200-1. Except as otherwise specified by the Government Design
Activity, a monodetail or tabulated drawing shall be prepared for each
identifiable part for which there is no existing data.
201.2. 1.1 Requirements. A monodetail drawing shall define all features of

the item depicted, including, as applicable, configuration, dimensions,
tolerances, materials, mandatory processes, surface finish, protective
coating, symbols, etc. Documents required to supplement the detail drawing
In stating end-product~ requirements for the item shall be prescribed by
notes or tables on the drawing.
200-1
DOD-STD-00100D(AR )
@! w-” m, T“.,,,, CJ,TW3 n Ww,,,”cou,,”

,. RA,CP,U+! RN(A?CWSLK,RCE
SI14LL96 *LACED
WJCeI* CCNTIm or CACMcnw+ PART NO, S4XXXX4
,“..,.,...
. .. .........!-C... .-!..0! -- ...- ..!-s.
!“,..-.,
“0.,.,..
Q .C..
;.”.,.<.,...
:-W,c, .--.! -
;. ..__. ..---—: -------- ,:
0
. .— -----– :_:=J5
.. ~wm’~ .,,, ,mc= ,4X,X*4
“F ‘s“,, ..,, ““0.s ..,, ,L.
-,---7----- .-..—...—
-.L - -.!,,, 1-! .! 1-!!
..”.. !-
FIGURE 200-1. Monodetail drawing
201.2.2 Multi-detail drawing. Multi-detail drawings may be used to .

delineate packaging, packing, palletizlng, carloading arrangements and
special tcoling used as manufacturing aids for installation of modification
kits. See FIGURE 200-2.
201.2.2.1 Requirements. Each part depicted on a multi-detail drawing

shall meet the requirements of paragraph 201.2.1.1.
This sample drawing Is informational only and complete to the degree

necessary to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual fcrmat and drawing shall
conform to the textual requirements set fcrth in this standard;
200-2
“a
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
.!
II
Ii
i
This sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree neceecmry
to illustrate e type of drawing.. Actual format and drawing shall conform to

the textual requirementa aet forth in thie standard.
200-3
OOD-STD-OO1OOD( AR)
111111
I - +b
t!l!f
1“
11),,,
I
E
Tlks sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform to
the textual requirements set forth in this standard.
200-4
I
DOD-STD-00 10OD( AR)
201.2.3 Tabulated detail drawing. A tabulated detail drawing depicts

similar items, which as a group, have constant and variable characteristics.
Each item is uniquely identified. See paragrapha 402.5 and 402.6. A
tabulated detail drawing precludes the preparation of an individual drawing
for each item tabulated. Tabulated drawings shall be utilized to the maximum
extent. Each item will have part number assignment using the drawing number
and adding -1, -2, etc., for each item. See FIGURE 200-3.
201.2.3.1 Requirements. The difference (variables) between the items

defined by a tabulated drawing shall be tabulated, and the fixed (constant)
characteristic shall be depicted or stated once. NormallY, a PictOrial
representation of a single item ia shown, with variable dimensions coded by
.. ❑ eans of lettere used as headinga for columns in the tabulation. The
variables are entered in the table under the appropriate headings and on the
same line aa the identifying number. or letter of the item to which they
pertain. The statement of requirements shall be as complete as that required
.:
by paragraph 201.2.1.1 for a single part.
, I D 4 , I
I - ., “,=”!_’ __
-,,., m.,.. !.. ..” ,...,1 —
“07[s:
1. APM!C.OLE STNARDSI WECIFICMIW
& Wow D.cmoomm
. s. NW “1..sla.,w,? o
2. w.KRI.L CORROS!ON RES)S1,NO STEEL, CLASS 301 CM

30?, lEMF’ER IV4 TO FULL “*PO, SPEC 00+?60.
3 PR0KC71Vf ~lNISH FINIS” S, 4. I OF .!!.- 570. !7!
,r..e.
e
! c
— *.) ,: ~ .a.
+ i
1 *
-1
PART NO. (=E 1A{3LEI

.“,.. M.! .. . . _ ““..,
.. H.!., -.,...“!.,...,.
. .. . .... . . . ,M!... ! -’.
.,.”. or... ..!.!..
——- c--.o!-
: ..—-—. ,—- ----- ~T’; .%..
,,, ,____ _____
.. ____ “
. . ---: :~:,~~!
. ..-,: .:. ..: -w&, .-,.”., .!?. c.. -
= =r-&. ! .,.. “-” - ..,, ,..”
;:.., “,.,”.... . . ..
‘-- ;:i;,..
, —-. )“.; =..-.. . ..
“., . ..”” .,...,,. .. . .
FIGURE 200-3. Tabulated detail drawing
TMS sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree

necessary to Illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall
conform to the textual requirements aet forth in this standard.
I 200-5
201.2.4 Tube bend drawing. A tube bend drawing depicts, by means of

pictorial or tabular delineation, or combinations thereof, complete bend data
required to describe the configuration of a rigid metal tube. Two basic
methods of delineating the tube bend data are illustrated. see FIGURES 200-4
and 200-5.
201.2.4.1 Requirements. A tube bend drawing shall disclose, as applicable,

tube material, type ends, identification and quantity of fittings, bend radii
and angles, intersection points, intermediate and overall lengtha and all ,
other data required to define the item. Tubing of complex configuration
shall be disclosed by utilizing combinations of pictorial and tabular
delineation; while tubing having simple configuration may be defined by means
of tabular presentation.
PART NO.
. . ... .. -. . .-....””..
. .. ..,. . . . -“,,
.. . . C- I...! —. -... -!..,! !
“e...,..
7. . __ ,!.....
.,.., ?,,c.
, ..” -,. -,-
,,, ..___. ._. _._. .,
‘-??E -,--,
.! . .
.,.-
. ..”..!
—.—
..”.,
?,-
““” ,,.,
,-,
!. ,...
!
,.
- -—.....—.
“,! ... . .+?-R .. ----,---
FIGURE 200-0. Tube bend drawing
This sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree

necessary to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall
conform to the textual requirements aet forth In this standard.
200-6
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR )
r #
●
I # i D
i , I
.,”!,~m.
-,,., “K”>- ,“. ,.--, -
mm
1 A?uunu smcmam
ST-OS)
L wD-irc-mOOmM)
9. ANSI Vu.w.lwz
c UU.-D.,9W
..
Y.m!!s
PART NO,
..,.. -.. “.0 . M,., .!...”. .“1... em...,<—. ..”. ..!-,.
-.!., -, “m. .“ .--,
I I .O.,.,e,m
I I “m..?- 1-”’”‘-- I 1-””””””

““””’””-” ,.., ]&! ., 1;.,,
I I
FIGURE 200-5. Tube bend drawing
“?”
This SSMple drawing is informational only and complete to the degree
necessary to Illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall
oonform to the textual requirements set forth in this standard.
200-7
.,..
201.3 Assembly drawing. An assembly drawing depicts the assembled

relationship of (a) two or more parts, (b) a combination of parts and
subordinate assemblies, or (c) a group of assemblies required to form an
assembly of higher order. It shall contain sufficient views to show the
relationship between each subordinate assembly and parts in the assembly
depicted. Subordinate assemblies and parts shall be called out in the field
of the drawing, either by their identifying (part) numbers or by find (item)
numbers cross-referenced to the identifying numbers in a table on the
drawing. The nomenclature shall be entered as it appears on its own drawing,
but may be abbreviated by using the basic noun or noun phrase. When
information regarding the assembled relationship and identification of parts
is shown on assembly drawings. of subordinate assemblies, it should not be
repeated on the assembly drawings of higher order. Only the identifying
number of each subordinate assembly, its configuration and location shall be
shown. Assembly drawings shall contain references to pertinent associated
lists, installation drawings, wiring and schematic diagrams, etc. The
division of an item Into subordinate assemblies shall be, when possible, in
accordance with practical assembly and disassembly procedures. Assembly
drawings shall be prepared for the system/subsystem and for each level of
subassembly required for repair parts supply, bench subassembly y and testing,
localization of major functional requirements and adjustments, and clarity ,of
parts identification, assembly and diagnostic procedures. If applicable,
each subassembly drawing shall include pertinent functional requirements.
See FIGURE 200-6.
NOTE 1: Electrical items shall be shown and identified on assembly drawings

depicting where mounted; however, small electrical items mounted by means of
wires affixed hereto may be shown and identified either on the aasembly
drawing or on the pertinent wiring diagram.
NOTE 2: Attaching parts (bolts, nuts, washers, etc. ) required to mount and
retain assemblies on foundations or on assemblies of higher order shall be
called out on the drawing showing the item on which the attachment takes
place.
200-8
DOD-STD-001 oOD(AR )
PARTNo.
,“-w., -. ~.t:.”#i:.-.:::. ,!.,,.,, -.. “.- .e..#!.
-,,...,
;?:::,-: &, ---,-
6., . .
. 0.,..,, 0.,,,..”.., a
,. - ,“,..,” ..-,,
C...., -“., .“. .-
*V
.“,..,e.-- - “.,,,.”
I
.“” 4.,”0..
,.., .. . . w,,
1 ——. —
*
FIGURE 200-6. Assembly drawing

necessary to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing
shall conform to the textual requirements set forth in this standard.
200-9
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
201.3.1 Detail assembly drawing. P. detail assembly drawing depicts an

assembly on which one or more parts are detailed in the asaembly view or on
detail views. Except as provided below, separate engineering drawings are
not “required for parts so delineated.
a. Detail Assembly drawings covering inseparable asaembliea may be

prepared in lieu of individual Monodetail drawings provided that none of the
parta detailed thereon are stocked for repair of the item and that olarity la
not adversely affected. Example: a welded, riveted, or sewn assembly ( box,
bracket, canvaa case) intended to be procured and replaced aa a unit,
however, may be subject to repair by replacement of individual part-a.
Military Standard parts shall be specified on Oetail Assembly drawings, as
applicable. A glass priem bonded to an aluminum plate would require support
by monodetail drawings. Monodetail drawinga shall be used whenever they are
necessary for clarity of complex configurations.
b. Detail aasembly drawings may also be used for matched parta and
special tooling used as manufacturing aids for installation of modification
kits . See FIGURE 200-7.
201.3. 1.1 Requirements. Details of parts and aasembly views. in datail

assembly drawings shall have the completeness required by paragrapha
201.2. 1.1 and 201.3.
4 I # i * I 1
., W!,W,
-,(., !.,,”! 1- lb..-.-, —
I , mr a
NOTES
3
t APPLICABLE s1Mi4ms/8PEctmA1m88
A. DoD-sTD.oOlemM)
0
0. ANSI V14.51A-$*S2
H
2. FINISH “ticxcwl ,s S$mlF,m
&L fCG?S 91AL L BE -EN ._*.010 UILESS

OT”mmsf SFfwm
4 ,l”m Pmmc?,vf rww n“lsll 7.2,2. w

M, L. STD.IW COLOHUW, w.3msn w
,10.s,0-,93.
5 DIMENSIONAL LIUlm MD SUnFACI lEX?IJRE

,,ml~,.o, — \
Am” WIT” Fi,lmo
e
+’i __ fl-
%-,2.
‘fij
‘w .237-,CQO mm
PARTNO,
“ 0..-., -. -,.,
-“K..
m!...”
.. .
,“,...
.e.o
,!. !...! . . . !“ .0. ”!!!
m.!.,
,?.,.”s., - -,--
K ,m.G4 ,.-
. .
q+ “.” ,. ,,.. -..
r“
.
c-c...
“ . .
.,- . . . .
.—— .—. —
..— a44xxxx5
“,,f~,,_ _ .~. “ “,, ,-
I ---- . ._. - . ..
FIGURE 200-7. Detail aaaemDly arawlng

necessary tc illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing
shall ccnform to the textual requirements aet forth in this standard.
200-10
DOD-STD-OOIOOD(AR)
201.3.2 Tabulated assembly drawing. An assembly drawing depicting more

than one assembly by tabulation such as the requirement for, a tabulated
● detail
between
402.5
drawing (see
each tabulated
and 402.6.
paragraph
assembly,
See FIGURE 200-8.
201.2.3)
and
shall
uniquely
clearly
identify
delineate
each.
the difference
See paragraphs
I , I 9 ,
I 1’ 1
.-!w.,,,,,.., ,.”,...,,_
i
“O,E$ -,,.,
I I
FIGURE 200-8. Tabulatad assembly drawing

conform to the textual requirements set forth in this standard.
200-11’- \ \
DOD-STD-00100D ( AR)
201.3.3 Photo-assembly drawing. When applicable, photo-assembly drawings

may be prepared using halftone (screened) photographs of an item(s) in a
format and incorporating the additional information required to complete the
drawing. Photo-assembly drawings shall be of such clarity that subsequent
full or reduced size copies are sufficiently legible, and the configuration
must be clear and easily understood.
NOTE 1: When microfilm is required, delivery of full size drawings, as in

the case of undimensioned drawings of photo-masters used for printed circuit
requirements, may be required when specified in the contract or order.
NOTE 2: The word ‘Iassemblytt as used in the name of the type of drawing for
this requirement, means an assemblage of halftone photographs) and line work
to complete the drawing requirements. It ia not intended to mean an assembly
of parts, although it is frequently used for that purpose.
.
NOTE 3: Reprographic drawings or tracings are those drawings reproduced
(duplicated) by a photographic technique and are not to be construed as
meeting the requirements for a photo-assembly drawing. See paragraph 101.2c.
201.3.4 Inseparable assembly drawing. An inseparable assembly drawing

delineatea items, (pieces) which are separately fabricated and are permanently
joined together (e.g., welded, brazed, riveted, sewed, glued, etc. ) to form
an integral unit (part) not capable of being disassembled for replacement or
repair of the individual pieces. An inseparable assembly drawing may be
prepared in lieu of individual monodetail drawings for inseparable (welded,
brazed, bonded, riveted, sewn, or glued) assemblies intended to be procured
and replaced as a unit, where (except for standard hardware) the separate
parts are of similar materials. Example: A welded or riveted bracket, a
wood, metal, or plastic chest, or a canvas case may be covered by an
inseparable assembly drawing without monodetail drawings. See FIGURE 200-9.
201.3.4.1 Requirements. Ari inseparable assembly drawing shall filiy

define the end-product* as assembled. pieces of the inseparable assembly may
be detailed either on separate detail drawings or on the inseparable assembly
drawing itself.
200-12
●
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
#--
rfww.mxr,.l
t /
O EM. lRNO KCWIANX MbRKINO SM.iLL

w, m ,07.AN,WL, ,Fmm ,0 MS,,
!
PART NO.
-.-., .H . ..”,,, ..%.mr ... .. . . ----,.-”
-.,., .“”w, .“ .--, -- ‘~,”-,
?, :_- — — :?,,..CT’
::.- ‘-’”””:
$., __ —. .,
m... ,. ..?,,..”... *
. —.
.. ...” .-,.
- . ..— -,___ -:,”7-, .! .$,. .-
. ..
_“,.~:.~, ..,, w ~= 844 XXXX4
. . “.,-
T ,..,,, ,Wr .! ,,.,,
FIGURE 200-9. Inseparable assembly drawing
,’
‘Ibis sample drawing is informational only and complete to the tiegree

shall conform to the textual-requirements aet forth in this ‘standard.
.,
200-13
201.3.5 Installation assembly drawing. An Installation assembly drawing

shows the installed and aasembled position of an item(s) relative to its
supporting structure or to associated items. Installation assembly drawings
for vehicle applications shall be used to depict the installation of items
forming a separate vehicle sub-system such as hydraulic, electrical, brake,
steering, and suspension. If a detail or assembly, not a part of the
installation, ia shown for clarity or related items or position, the detail
or assembly shall be ahown in phantom. There will be no part number above
---m the title block. See Appendix D.
201.3.5.1 Requirements. An installation asaembly drawing shall Include

the following, aa applicable:
“k
\
Listing of items to be installed.
‘ ‘\. a”
>.
. .Locating dimenaiona and associated tolerance.
\
\\
c. Type? and quantities of attachment.
\
d. Process >id=special installation requirements.
e. Adjustment dat~.
\..
f. Special test or inspection requirements.
g. Detail definition of special installation parts.
NOTE: Such drawings are used to install and asaemble bellcranks, electrical
wiring harnesses, tubing, etc. , into the supporting structure of the
end-product*.
201 .3.6 Exploded aasembly drawing. An exploded assembly drawing, using

either isometric or perspective drawing techniques, depicts the individual
items that make up a part in a manner whereby they are separated from each
other but related to each other by. the use of a center line. The use of
‘exploded assembly drawings require prior approval of the responsible
Government Design ‘Agency.
201.3.6.1 Requirements. An exploded assembly drawing may be used to

illustrate a particular. requirement which necessitates the delineation of a
part in either assembly or disassemble y arrangement. They are usually
required for illustrated parts breakdown or provisioning.
201 .3.7 Matched parts drawing. A matched parts drawing depicts parta
which are machine matched, or otherwise mated , and for which replacement as a
matched set or pair is essential. See FIGURE 200-10.
200-14
DOD-STD-OO1OOD (AR)
201.3.7.1 Requirements. The operating or mating characteristics of the

matched parts (set) shall be stated. The matched parts may be detailed on
the matched parts drawing or on separate drawings. A single part number
shall be aasianed to each of the matched Darts and to the matched Dair or
aet; the draw~ng shall require unique ide~tification marking of th~ matched
set .* FuI?FJISH ObJLY As A MA112HE0 SE~or a similar note shall be on the
drawing.
a. When Monodetail drawing concept is used. the note shall be applied to

each of the drawings including the assembly drawings. The unique identifi-
cation marking of the matched set shall be a aerial number composed aa
specified in 108.1.2.
b. Matched parts drawings shall have the following specified in the

general notes:. “
‘ASSEMBLY !jHALL BE MANUFACTURED, INSPECTED. PACKAGED

OR ASSEMBLED, STOCKED OR REPLACED, PERMANENTLY 10ENT”lFIEO
AND RETAINED AS A SERIALIZED
———...MATCHED
. . .. . sET.”
. . ..
4. I 1 i i I 8
.,”!,..,
-,,., ,..!..W. ,..... -, —
noms
L WPUUBLC $1N4MRDS18PUIFK47KW
A DOD-51D-mOOmm
S O%t.ALL CICCKW@ ON4 41 &SSCMU-t

.UErl Uullm amm ARE Mscuaco w
HWSNO , WC OEARS SHALL RML f~ELV
WIII+W1 #lNDIW .ND SIMLL MEET W
WWLMH RCGIMCMCNT8 W ~$ MllllW
tOOl MX!MW hIiAWWO CU lIW PITCH
Cmu
L;c,. &.
IZ,xxkw
L
‘ PARTNO,
..-. . . m,...
-.- .. .....-.,
. .“,... ,-..0! ..”” “... .,!.!,.
-.!.,
. —. !a,.,.”,
,.- m
!...! -,-$, - :
:,, -— -- .,
. . — —.- “
.--—.. —
- —._~ —..—— ——. -. . —,.! . --
_..:. ”.., -_”.. _ ~i”, . ==—.” I
“.,.. !.. I -.., ,-- l.!...
T
FIGURE 200-10. Matched parta drawl~

200-15
201.3.8 Arrangement drawing. An arrangement drawing is a drawing that

depicts in any projection or perspective drawing technique, with or without
controlling dimensions,
See FIGURE 200-11.
the relationship of major units of the item depicted.
●
201.3.8.1 Requirements. An arrangement drawing Shall Show sufficient
views of the item ao that a general understanding is conveyed of the
configuration and location of major units. Overall, locating and other
general dimensions necessary to define the configuration may be shown. Major
units shall be identified.
a I 8 i 1 I &
1
-,
m-
!++.. . .— .-,
1. —.—
L —(M)
*
I
I I
●
‘L
‘N
— nn -
--- . . -&”=z7---- —- “- -
.
-t”
1
,.,
.
.
,- “ ,-,
r
FTCIIRF -“”—
------ 9nn_l ...
1- a-... ---.-.+
. -..5-U.=.. “
a-.-.-
“r -“M,Q

200-16
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
,21)1.11 control drawing. A control drawing is an engineering drawing that

defines configuration and configuration li~itations; performance, test,
inspection and acceptance requirements, weight and space limitations; access
o clearance, pipe and cable attachments, etc. , to the extent necessary to
ensure function in a particular application and so that an item can be
developed or acquired in the commercial market to the requirements stated on
the drawing or in a detail specification supporting the drawing. Also, for
the installation and co-functioning of an item to be installed/used with
related items. Control drawings are identified as envelope, specification
control, source control, altered item, selected item, interface control and
installation control.
NOTE 1: Control drawings of items that are subjected to alteration or

selection as defined by Altered and Selected Item drawings (paragraph 201.4.4
and 201. 4.5) shall be annotated with the fOllOwing applicable nOte:
a. For Altered Items.
“ALL VENDORS’ ITEMS SHALL BE CAPABLE &

ALTERATION AS SPECIFIED ON DWG(Altered Item Ah)
WITHOUT ADVERSE EFFECT ON REQUIREMENTS OF
THIS ORAWING.”
b. For Selected Items.
“ALL VENOORS’ITEMS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF

SELECTION AS SPECIFIED ON OWG(Selectedltem NO.).”
●
201.4.1 Envelope drawing. An envelope drawing defines an item where all
~characteristics, other than those shown on the drawing, are left to the
ingenuity of the producer in order to meet the specified performance and
design requirements. The notation% NV ELOPE DRAW ING%hall be placed above
the title block.
NOTE 1: The term “performance requirements” meana a listing of those

physical and functional characteristics under specified operating conditions
(loads, speeds, etc. ) and environmental conditions, aa required, to fully
describe the essential operating characteristics under which the item must
operate and perform. The characteristics so listed shall be defined to the
degree that interchangeability of substitute items produced by any
manufacturer is assured if the specified performance is. possessed by these
items.
NOTE 2: The term “design requirements*O means the minimum performance

requirements an item must meet in order to satisfy system functional
performance requirements.
201.4. 1.1 Requirements. Envelope drawing disclosure requirements are

identifical to those for Specification Control drawings; paragraph 201.4.2.1.
NOTE 1: When development is completed, an envelope drawing shall evolve into

s set of complete design disclosure drawinga, a Government apecificstion, or
if source(s) of supply are established, into a specification or source
control drawing. Envelope drawings shall not be used for the Product
● Configuration Identification. * See FIGuRE 200-12.

200-17
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
,. OwslLiml
*.L.S,7’2
0. T-US
WAL,Bf”, mmx+xsm
SlULLEtSNlFWWU8XT~
+ =11
G il’
Fwmam
Cmm
m+om”-
0A0n4M
& y+&muLcfsuuru i3#m0mArnv
?,alcccncc(mwm:wm Mm.,nlwtn
x, ,, ,,,” ,,!4TlEsrma,nI, SuLL
Em 24” * M mm . Lam w m Ml ,Cms
W*, 34. w+ IMOmvml,u WML
E nKuaTEo Wnm , 00%
~jl “ ’5 II T“4’-
L-1,., m”d D=+%+’=
ENVELOPE DRAWING PART NO.

-, . .. . .. -, ,, 7 o“..~_ -,,. . .. .. . .. .. . . ,-!..,! ----- “ ..- .$!”!,.
..-.,., 0----- .“ .-.,
!. “..,,, & -...., -
7, — — .-... -.— : .L.c, :....
. . . . .
“
.
..- -. . .-
“,, “,. ——
.._ . . .._. . ..S!.X _. ..,, ,.. &= —. I
“.!.. !#c. U.., ,-! .! l“, !
FIGURE 200-12. Envelope drauin~

necessary to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format end drawing
200-18
0
201.4.2 Specification control drawing. A specification control drawing

def inea an item that was previously shown on an envelope drawing, a source
control drawinga or that ia an existing commercial* item or vendor* -developed
item. The commercial or vendor-developed item that is advertised or
0’
‘cataloged as available on an unrestricted basis on order or as an
off-the-shelf item or an item, while not commercially available, must be
available on order from a apec.ialized segment of industrY. The drawing,
under the heading “SUGGESTED SOURCE(S)w SUPPL* shall list the nsme (and
address if known), “rnariufacturer ts CAGE Code and item identif icatlon number of
two’or more known sources unless, after a search it is determined that there
is only one source. Quality conformance inspection and approval requirements
‘Shall be apeclfied in a separate document referenced on the drawing. In
addition, the notation %PEC IF I CATION CON TR(l DRAWING~t. shall be placed above
,the title block. See FIGURE 200-13. The following note shall appear in the
body of the drawing.
‘10EN71FIcA710NOF THE5uGGE5.TEDSOURCE(S)OF suppLy HEREONIs tL07 To BE

CONSTRUEOAS A GUARANT
OF SUPFV.YFOR .,”, ,TEM~s~F ‘WE.NT .OR coNTINuEO AVAILABILITYAS A SC4JRCE
NOTE 1: The suggested source(s) listed on a specification control drawing

are not intended to represent the only source(s) for the item.
NOTE 2: Qualification testing of items is not a prerequisite for inclusion

Of another vendor IS item. However, any items must be capable of meeting all
of the specified requirements. If such pre-qualification and approval is
necessary, the item should be defined on a source control drawing.
● NOTE 3:
normally
Vendor* -developed
provide customer
items
application
are those products
engineering
of industries
services
which
for a conmiercial
product line, and their products are commercially available from a
specialized segment of an industry. Typical examplea of such items are:
special motors, synchros, transformer, potentiometers, hydraulic valves,
carburetor, potted servo-amplifiers, keyboards and tape readers.
A9
.. I
NOTE 4: Altered items, selected items and items defined in Federal, Military
and recognized non-government standards or specifications shall not be
delineated on specification control drawings.
NOTE 5: Specification control drawings shall not be used to define

commercial or vendor-developed items upon which a design activity has placed
requirements that the item in its advertise~form may not be capable of
meeting and/or has not been subjected to tests during the development of the
end itemlsystem. These kinds of items shall be defined on either altered or
selected ite,m drawings as appropriate. Commercial or vendor-developed items
that were used in development and successfully met the end item/system
requirements shall be described by performance and design requirements
necessary to ensure acceptable form, fit and function that is compatible with
their final end item/system use. These requirements are necessary to ensure
that items acquired in the future are essentially the same as those used in
the end item/system development. They also provide complete definition for
acceptance of additional sources of suPPlY.
● 200-19
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
NOTE 6: It is not intended that this ,standard, by itself, cause preparation

of specification control drawinga for all applicable vendor items.
Preparation criteria for engineering drawings is governed by the contract or
order.
NOTE 7: Preparation of Specification Control drawinga requires prior

aPPrOval of the Government Design Activity.
NOTE 8: Specification control drawings may be prepared only for items which
will not normally require replacement of any of their component parta during
the life of the item. Any exception to this requirement will require that
separate drawings be prepared for each repair part not already covered by
other drawings, government or non-government specif icationa and standarda.
NOTE 9: Specification control drawinga shall not be prepared in

circumstances where a Military Detail Specification would be more
appropriate.
NOTE 10: Specification control data shall not be tailored to the

characteristics of a single vendor!s product to the exclusion of other
equally suitable products. Conversely, specification data shall not be ao
broad aa to permit acceptance of products which will not perform in the
equipment under all required environmental conditions.
201.4.2.1 Requirements. A specification control drawing shall disclose as

applicable, configuration, dimenslona of envelope, mounting and mating
dimensions, interface dimensional. characteristics, and limits thereto. In
addition, as necessary, inspection and acceptance test requirements,
performance, reliability, maintainability, environmental and other functional
requirements, to insure identification and adequate reprocurement of an
interchangeable item. If an electrical or electronics (or other engineering)
circuit is involved, a schematic and connection or other appropriate
diagrammatic disclosure shall be included on the drawing (or referenced
thereon), thereby providing sufficient information for making external
connections.
200-20
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR )
, 4 .
r , I 1
M.,.,*,
balm . ...,., .-...-. 1...--’1
—
.m.m
II
-fEJ
.. WKIW41CAL
A, CWACIW ‘-
SIAWC
@Ax MNAMC— lmOOl.0
B.
C
D,
L,W,.C ,,. —
LIM(l LMO WVNAMC1
LIFfi $00 “O~S
X6m
‘,.~-
MIN. Al EASIC DYIIAWC
ml
0“-i%i3-
CAPACITY AND ,,h “m Mu.
‘ ,E”fm.,uw. Mmm, -MT m .3007
FIGURE 200-13. Specification control drawing
‘lhis sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree

shall conform to the textual requirements aet forth in this standard.
200-21
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR )
2P1. u.3 Source control drawing. A source control drawing defines an item
that waa previously ahowo on an envelope drawing or an existing commercial~
or vendor* item which is the only known item which exclusively-provides the
performance, installation and interchangeable characteristics required for a
specific critical application. Quality conformance inspection, qualification
testing and approval requirements shall be specified in a separate document
referenced on the drawing. The drawing shall include the following
notationa.
‘CNLYTHEITEMOESCRISEC ONTHISORAWING WHEN
PROCURECFROMTHEvENOOR(S)LISTEDHEREON
W APPROVEO BY(Nmnoond4ddre$s of Cognkant &s@
Activity) FOR USE IN THE APPLICATION E) SPECIFIED
HEREON. A SUBSTITUTE ITEM SHAU NOT eE USEO
WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL BY (Name of Cvgntiont ~
&tkity)~
“IDENTIFICATION OF THE APPRWEO SOURCE(S) OF SUPPLY

HEREON IS NOT TO BE CONSTRUEO AS A GUARANTEE OF
PRESENT OR CONTINUED AVAILABILITY AS A SOURCE OF
SUPPLY FOR THE ITEM OESCRIBEO ON TISE ORAWING.”
The drawing shall include under the heading ““’iPPRovEOSOURCE(S) OFSLJppLy”

the manufacturer!s name, address, CAGE Code and item identification number of
each item that has been tested and approved for use in the apeci f ic
applications stated on the drawing in the application block. In addition,
“SOURCECONTROL ORAWING- shall be shcwn above the title blcck. The item(s)
thus ‘disclosed shall be identified in all subsequent actions ( including
procurement) by the source ccntrol drawing number. See paragraph 402.10,
Ncte 2. Nhenever another vendorfs item is qualified for the stated
applications or when a new critical application is found and all vendor items
that are cited on the drawing are apprcved for use in the new critical
application, the drawing shall be revised, rather than a new drawing issued
to show the new vendor or application. Each new vendor added must be
aPProved for all stated applications. See FIGURE 200-1 4a and FIGURE 200-14b.
NOTE 1: Altered items, selected items and those defined in Government and
recognized non-government ( Industrial acciet y) specifications or standards
shall net be delineated on source control drawinga.
NOTE 2: qualification testing and approval of Items is a prerequisite for

Inclusion of another vendorfs item on a source control drawing. It should be
noted that an item defined on a source control drawing is not in itself
juatificaticn for other than competitive procurement and may be solicited on
the open market. Therefore, it is imperative that complete performance and
design requirements be specified.
NOTE 3: Preparation of Source Control drawings requires prior approval of

the Government Design Activity. Source control drawings shall not be used
for items only available from the development contractor unless the intent to
do ao waa previously accepted by the Government aa a condition of that
contract.
200-22 ●
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
NOTE 4: When a source control item has repairable parts, those parts shall
be identified andlor listed on ,the drawing. Separate government, drawings
shall be prepared for repair parta not already covered by other government
drawinga, government or recognized non-government aPecif ications or .‘
standards.
NOTE 5: Privately developed items, such as items defined as patented,

proprietary or with limited rights shall only be used in accordance with
oontract requirements and prior approval of the Government Design Activity.
NOTE 6: The name of the cognizant design activity in the approval note
(paragraph 201. 4.3) shall be:
a. For Armament, Munitiona, Tools and Equipment items:
. ‘U.S ARMY ARMAMENT RESEARCH, DEVELOPMENT AND ENGINEERING CENTER”
b. For Chemicai items:
“US. ARMY CHEMICAL RESEARCH, DEVELOPMENT AND ENGINEERING CENTER”
c. For Tank-Automotive items:
“U. S. ARMY TANK-AUTOMOTIVE COMMAND”
NOTE 7: Address of Government Design Activity. The address of the

cognizant design activity in the approval note shall be for drawings with
CAGE Codes as follows:
a. For 19200 - “PICATINNY ARSENAL, NJ 07806-5000”
b. For 19204 - “ROCK ISLAND, IL 61299-5000”
.“$) c. For 19206 - “WATERVLIET,NY. 12189-4Q50M

.. d. For 19207 - aWARREN, Ml 48397-5000”
,.
e. For 59678 - ‘ROCK ISLAND,IL 61299-5000”
l’. For 81361 - “ABERDEEN PROVING GROUND, M021010-5423m
201.4. s.1 Requirements. Source control drawing disclosure requirements

are identical to those for specification control drawings, paragraph
201’.4.2.1.
200-23
DOD-STD-00 10OD ( AR )
. .
t t I
~is
shall
Sample drawing
necessary to illustrate
COnfOrM to the
is informational
a type of
teXtUal
only
drawing.
requirements
and
set
complete
Actual
forth
to
format
in this
the degree
and drawing
standard.
●
200-24
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
.,
FIGURE 200-14b. Source control drawing (replacement part)

necessary “to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and draw%
200-25
201.4.4 Altered item drawing. When the design of an item is to be altered,

the requirements for the alteration shall be specified on an altered item
drawing.
@mnerclal
the altered
The drawing
item drawing
shall
and vendor-developed
describe
items
or separately
the item without
shall be completely
by complete
and with alteration.
design
defined,
disclosure
either on 0
specification control/source control as appropriate. Items with mutiple
sources that, due to configuration differences, require a different
. alteration, shall be defined on the same altered item drawing where possible
with sufficient description to define the alteration for each vendor 1a item
provided.
a. Altered items are physically and functionally interchangeable.
b. Items prior to alteration are completely defined on the same drawing

or another drawing.
Items not meeting the preceding criteria “shall be defined on separate altered
item drawings. Quality conformance inspection and approval requfrementa
shall be specified in a separate document that is referenced on the altered
item drawing. See FIGURES 15 and 200-48.
201.4.4.1 Requirements. An Altered item drawing shall delineate the

complete details of the alteration in terms of final configuration. The
drawing shall define “what’! the alteration is and included necessary
information to identify the item without alteration, including the original
Identifying part number and, if a commercial or vendor-developed item, the
original manufacturer?s name, address if known, and CAGE Cede. This
information
supporting
shall
drawings,
The name and address
be shown on the altered
(specification
of the source
item drawing
control/scurce
need not be specified
control)
or on separate
if available.
if the original part
●
is a Government or recognized non-government standard item. me notation,
‘ALTEREDITEMC4?AWlffi9 shall be applied above the title block. The
Y’
identification of the item so depicted shall be in accordance with
paragraph 402. 10e.
NOTE 1: The following general note shall be used:
‘! Nameof/tem SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH REQuIREMENTS OF

&owi)@tiecifibatian/MS krt No. etc. EXCEPT A!j sPECIFIEQ
HE REON.=
or
if all requirements are specified on the altered item drawing:
Note numbti
“c ALTERED FEATURE(S)”
200-26
●
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
, I 1 1 * I 1
.,.,. !O~,_
-,,., “Oc”!- ,“” “.--, —
NOTES
, ,PFMO.Wt STAMD.RDS ?5PEWICA1 ,wS
:,. y“;; S;::,mmaw
2 SWISH v bLL 4L,ER,L! -c,.
3 m mm SHALL BE mKEN 00s.542 UNI159

OTHERWISE SEC~tD.
● BOLT SHNL 9C !. UCWOANCC Will!

WO”IR!M, N,S WI .S,490.5 EXCW7
.s s=cctnfo nrnccu
ALTCRID’ITEM DRAWING PART NO.

, , .4.”=-.””6:: “ .C.!.xl .-”. “ - -“m.
:::.7.’; =
—. — !-,.-,, m -,-~,-
— —— . ..m ;..”
..”... m. w.! l-! . .

●
FIGURE 200-15. AIterad item drawing (part controlled by Military Standard)
This sample drawing is informational only and’ complete to the degree

200-27
201.4.5 Selected item drawing. A Selected item drawing defines an

existing
selection
within
completely
standard,
or restriction
the range,
describe:
commercial
or limits,
for
the item prior

or vendor-developed
fit, tolerance,
inherent in that
to selection
item.
Item with further
performance or reliability
The drawing
and; the requirements
shall
required
for
o
selection. Commercial and vendor-developed items shall be completely defined
on the Selected item drawing or separately by complete design disclosure/
apecif ication cOntrol/source control as appropriate. Quality conformance
inspection and approval requirements shall be specified in a separate
document that is referenced on the selected item drawing. Although physical
modification of the design is not necessary, the item, by virtue of selected
requirements is different than that from which the selection ia made. see
FIGURE 200-1 6s
201.4.5.1 Requirements. A selected item drawing shall delineate the

complete detaila on which selection of the item is predicated with a full
disclosure of the range or limit restrictions for fit, tolerance, performance
or reliability. The drawing shall include all necessary information to
identify the item prior to its selection, including the original identifying
part number and, if a commercial or vendor-developed Item, the original
manufacturer 1s name, address if known and CAGE Code. This information shall
be shown on the selected Item drawing or on separate supporting drawinga,
(specification control/source control ) if available. The name and address of
the source need not be specified if the original part is a Government or
recognized non-government standard item. me notation, IISELECTED ITEM
DRAWlN6n shall be applied adjacent to the title block. The identification of
the item so depicted shall be in accordance with paragraph 402. 10e.
NOTE 1: The following general note shall be used: ●

“. tVuimeof/tem SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH REQUIREMENTS OF
@owin@Specificotion/MS Fbrt No. e!c. EXCEPT AS SPECIFIED
or
HE REON.-”
+
if all requirements are specified
Note
on
numbti
the selected item drawing:
.
:6 SELECTED FEATURE(S)”
200-28
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
I 4 I 1 r I I
7a0T6.008
-d
,.
SELECTED ITEM ORAWCNG PART NO.

“,..-., r- . w,.,
r .....!.. — -..-..!..-,.. ..... . . ee....e!-.
.--.C.. “,,. .0,..,
.
.. .......
,.,.=,
c.:“.C.
t-,.. c,-
. .
y
A . a
“ .=. -..! . “--
-,, .,,.
.m.,
_-? ___ ..,,
I
,.” “,.. -..!
“.,.., - ,s!” lh.w
*
..
FIGURE 200-16. Selected item drawing (part controlled by Military Standard)

shall conform to the textual requirements set forth In this standard.
o 200-29
201.4.6 Interface control drawing. An interface control drawing depicts

physical and functional interface engineering requirements of an item which
affect the design or operation of co-functioning Items. These drawings are
used as design control documents, delineating interface engineering data
coordinated for purpose of: (a) establishing and maintaining compatibility
between co-functioning items; (b) controlling interface designs thereby
preventing changes to each item’s requirements which would affect
compatibility with co-functioning sub-systems; (c) communicating design
decisions and changes to participating activities. See FIGURE 200-17.
201.4.6.1 Requirements. An interface control drawing shall delineate as

necessary: (a) configuration and all interface dimensional data applicable
to the envelope, mounting and mating of the items; (b) complete interface
engineering requirements, such as mechanical, electrical, electronic,
hydraulio, pneumatic, optical, etc., which affect the physical or functional
characteristic of co-functioning items; and (c) any other characteristics
which cannot be changed without affecting system design criteria. Interface
drawings may be categorized as mechanical, electrical, interconnection,
configuration and installation, operational sequence requirement:, system
switching, etc. , as necessary. The notation interface CONTROL DRAWING*
shall be shown adjacent to the title block.
● I 3 1 2 I I
FIGURE 200-17. Interface control drawing
This sample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree

necessary to illustrate a type .of drawing. Actual format and drawing
200-30
201.4.7 Installation control drawing. An installation control drawing

sets forth Information for an item in terms of area, weight and space,’ access
alearance, draining clearances, pipe and cable attachments required for the
installation and co-functioning of the item to be”installed with related
items. See FIGURE 200-18.
201.4.7.1 Requirements. An installation control drawing shall include the

following information ae applicable: Overall and principal dimen,eiona in
sufficient detail to establish the limits of space in all directions required
for installation, operation and serviofng. The amount of clearance required
to permit the opening of doors or the removal of plug-in units shall be
included. Clearance for travel or rotation of any moving parts shall be
shown, including the centers of rotation, angles of train. in azimuth,
elevation and depression, and radii from each pivot to the end of each
rotating element involved in clearance determination. In addition, the
notation, \~lN~TULATION CONTRoL DRAwl.NG* shall be shown adjacent to the title
block.
I I . 1 . 1 . 1
b~ .. . .— .-
m,
I.p--yg----
,
“1-----r I
L!z+i.1
.— I
—“.?. - INSTALLATIONCONTROL
--------DRAWING
.. ... .
. —
1
k 1
‘:J=---
.“.”- “ - .x ““”. 1 I
1 r I -, ,.., “ ,-”
●
FIGURE 200-18. Installation control drawing
This sample drawing 1s informational only and complete to the degree

shall conform to the textual requirements set forth, In this standard.
200-31
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
201.5 Installation drawing. An installation drawing shows general

configuration and complete information necessary to install an item relative
to its supporting structure or to associated items. See FIGURE 200-19. An
installation drawing may show a specific completed installation.
Installation drawings for one-of-a-kind installation may be revised to record
the as-installed or as-built condition.
201.5.1 Requirements. An installation drawing shall include the following

as applicable:
a. Interface mounting and mating information, such as dimensions of

location for attaching hardware.
b. Interfaoe pipe and cable attachments required for the installation

and co-functioning of the item to be installed with related items.
c. Information necessary for preparation of foundation .plans, including

mounting place details, drilling plans and shock mounting and buffer details.
d. Location, size and arrangement of ducts. —
e. Weight of unit.
f. Location, type and dimensions of cable entrances, terminal tubes and

electrical connectors.
g. Interconnecting and cabling data.
h. Reference notes to applicable lists and assembly drawings.

o
i. When not disclosed on an interface control drawing (paragraph

201.4.6) or other reference documents: CWerall and principal dimensions in
sufficient detail to establish the limits of space in all directions required
for installation, operation and servicing; the amount of clearance required $
to permit the opening of doors or the removal of plug-in units; clearance for. ,
travel or rotation of any moving parts, including the centers of rotation and
angles of elevation and depress ion..
An installation drawing may include an integral parts list to

.I.
indicate the requirements for the installation hardware and if desired, the
items being installed.
k. All lines shown prior to installation shall be in phantom, i.e. ,

outline of baaic vehicle.
200-32
@) PL@cE
,C4w?K,mS“.FIA,,”,,
,”, V,”IU W,*
(3
m
@
.
0.
,,
%
“K. ,-.
Zcmr C.2
.fi
.—-—-- ,.,...,,,
J-, ,
-!..-.,
me,.,.,
Q. _ ..””::”W,.:LW-..HC2Y .-,..,, -. ~,” .,,”,,,
“ -.-.$!-
,_-, ..— . . ,.,.,, ,..-
!,, ,____ _ ..,___ ______ ,,
., ----- —.. .-
‘---k,,, ,__
.
—----- –—— -.”. - -,.===
-..,. ,.”-..
.“ .-. ..- -- “ --
---- -,,,- .,,, -=
m
g
“.! .,,. ,,...,.
.. .....- .._ mTiim— -.——- .;=;-..-—
,.., “.!, ., ..,,
FIGURE 200-19. Installation drawing

shall COnfOrM to the textual requirements set forth in this standard.
200-33
201.6 Elevation drawing. An elevation drawing depicts vertical

projections of buildings or structures; or profiles of equipment such
as aircraft, automotive or marin,e, or portions of the asme. See
FIGURE 200-20.
201.6.1 Requirements. As applicable, an elevation drawing shows

configuration, shapes and sizes of features, walls, bulkheada, compartments,
assignment of space, location and arrangement of machinery or fixed
equipment. An elevation drawing may indicate materials of construction.
. I , 4 8 I 1
““
I t===l
.. . . .—
I
-s
1. M?uu8s ——
a. —ml
I Cuvmoa-a
(ewoenl w amm.Ml I
tLCVATION-B msvanox -o
-., . -----
.. .. . “- —- ..-
.
.
FIGURE 200-20. Elevation drswing
lhis sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree

200-34
.,.,
201.7 Diagrammatic drawing. A diagrammatic drawing delineates features

and relationships of items forming an assembly or. system by means of symbols
and lines. A diagrammatic drawing is a graphic explanation of the manner by
o which an installation, assembly or system (e. g., ❑echanical, electrical,
electronic, hydraulic, pneumatic) performs ita intended function. .ANSI
Y14.15, Y32.9, IEEE STD 315, and MIL-STD-15-2 provide directions for use of
symbology relative to diagrammatic drawings.
201.7.1 Schematic diagram. A schematic or elementary diagram shows, by

means of graphic symbols, the electrical connections and functions of a
specific circuit arrangement. A schematic diagram facilitates tracing the
circuit and its functions without regard to the actual physical size, shape,
,
or location of the component devices or parts.
a. A diagrammatic drawing shall be prepared for each electrically

functional assembly, i.e., one having a measurable input and output
relationship. A connection or wiring diagram; or, for more complex
electronic items, a wiring list, shall be prepared for each subassembly state
covered by an assembly drawing.
b. Diagrams shall be a part of every system drawing, electrical

component drawing, or may be on a separate drawing, but must be referenced on
the drawing to which they apply. The schematic identifies circuits and
functions. See FIGURE 200-21.
d’
.
200-35
O
, 1
-—— . ?!”!?!9!
!.....
.,,
.
,...,
..—
—
,“. !:” !b. ...!-
*OTC%
~&~$’C~SNw&RD&aFWLC+6
*.pm W$RW O,s.,.,

s, DRAWW Izwxxxa.
.
3 m+ Aswmu mAwmG,sw caml”G ,23”””,,.
4.,,FW”lEO
UM”(,5CWE.ATC, SU C87AWW, 123X>XX6,
, ,“,s cam,”, .% P,cTs “AKWIS CRmca ,,,”s m
w!! m (m “WJU55 Cmllul Fncax$su (“cPI.
● , C“*WS 70M PRWOSEO SW5111”7)@i5 W
“,!s AND ,M) “w! .6, n! ,VA,U1!D FM
HAktmss I.mcls BY TIC ING!?4E{RI”8 Acr!vll”
l?csFCus8aLi foe Suwtvululv.
,“C FO,, CWMG ARE EXAMPLES CNL”

W 5vMB%5 “SKDONTH5 DWG
mm No
e ,“,,1 NO
TEST PC4”T
9
mm MO
~HEE, “o LAMP MCwrm
E
@~ ,.,.0 y9;:TEJ ,Fc4Jr~:,,
mm “o
~,Ec, “o UA4”1ENAWX “CWTOR
G
,.S1 fwD .0, ”S,. 10
●
,,,
.
-c..-..
-...,
- . . -&..G.-..&c.”;.
,.,...s. -
‘-! . . . . .
-,”.,
“... ,,
-
.
..,, .. . ...!
..- . . . ...7
?
. em..,. ,-..
. ——.
..- .“.0.- .“. --
_- ..— —.-. ..— _ .——
._.. !- - ..,., - . . “...., ,’”, ~,m ~,,
“,..i!- I
7
.
FIGURE 200-21. Schematic diagram drawing

●
200-36
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
201.7.2 Connection or wiring diagram. Connection or wiring diagrams shall

be made for all electrical systems. The drawing shall be a plan view with
best posture to show approximate location of connecting components and patha
o of wire runa along with designation of components. Circuits must be
Identified in accordance with identifiers on cables, leads, etc. Connectors,
components and wire runs shall be identified and/or shown. The diagram may
be part of the assembly drawing or a separate drawing. See FIGURE 200-22. A
connection or wiring diagram may be prepared in the form of a Itwiring list!!.
See FIGURE 200-2gf.
,,, “m .,.
-c--.! .- ,. -,,, .!”..!,, ,.,.., m,..,! -,. .,, . . . ...4..

-.!., . . .. . . . . . .
,e,,.”,t, e. -...e.-
, “.., , ..04
..— ..
“ c.. ”.. .!,, .. . ...! s
,.
.!.,.,. !..-..
----- -..L .!0 . .
-..
“,! ,,,.
. .—. ‘-f ,5_.. . ... ,... — .,- .,,_.., ~,,
.. . ...!- ,-, .! ,,wr
t
FIGURE 200-22. Connection or wiring diagram drawing
‘lhfssample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree

200-37
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
201.7.3 Interconnection diagram. An interconnection diagram is a form of

connection or wiring diagram which shows only external connections between
units, sets, groups and systems. See paragraph 201.9.2 concerning a form of
interconnection diagram known as a wiring list. See FIGURES 200-23a and
200-23b .
, I , i * I 1.
(
“,”,,,0.,
-,,., .,,, ”7- ,.. m-.”, —
uOTES
1, AffuCABLE S1ANMR091 SFU$UAIW
A, DOD-STD.00tWC4AR
)
ZJS
t,,
.2P,
3,,
/.2 3J2
W2PZ
Wm 3 /.4
/.1
mm
LINT I . . ‘J’ 81$
INcna,ca
~rl ‘L~!.. ::
“.M.K. ,- N, ~,,, .,-..,. .“, . . . ,-!..,! - ..-. =.-.

-..., c..., - .# .-,
,, ,M,..m, c. -----
, .L.e, , r..c,
.,
. .
:
..- —. . . . --
“., “.~ ..”. “a,,

,-
1
..”. “..0..
. . . ,e. ,!.,, ,-, .. (.-.!
+
FIGURE 200-23a. Interconnection diagram drawing (cabling type)
This sample drawing la informational only and complete to the degrae

200-38
d * 8
~ i
“ “,,,0.!
-,,., . ,,.., m ,.. .-, -
Nmis.
“c.,,,”, ‘-wu%w.”.s:;’ ---, -“ ,,---”-

.. ,.,...C.. ~ -!..’ !“
. .
..
.
.
!“! .-
.- .“,0,.
FIGURE 200-23b . Interconnection diagram
This sample drawing 1s Informational only and complete to the degree

200-39
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
201.7.4 Single-line or one-line diagram. A single-line or one-line

diagram shows, by meana of single lines and graphic symbols, the course of an
electric circuit, or system of circuits and the component devices or parts
used therein. See FIGURE 200-24.
4 I , J 8 —- I 8
,._”gl,,.”,
!-,,., .O,...!,c. ,-..--.”, -
Norm
1. ,PPL,CABU S,uuum.mffa,,ti,ms
A. 00 D-SID.COC9CMR1
I c. &mM”
,.,,-
4
p~mc
-u
l.c”.=u .- “. ~::=#: :.--=7 m!.., .,.” “.., .s.””,

“c...,.,
,.,...,,, c. --.”.t!-
, .,- , ..e.
,,, .,
. . .
.
.-
“
. . . “,.0.. ,., .-
FIGURE 200-24. Single-line diagram drawing

200-40
201.7.5 Logic diagram. A logic diagram shows by means of graphio symbols

the sequence function of logic circuitry. See FIGURE 200-25.
●
and
d I , i a I I I
.[,, s,..,
-Id . . . . . . .. . I.. f-- L..—
Noms,
, 4P*U ,BL1 llAmAms# Wacwa,lm%
. m. S,O.W4WD
mm
9 ANY V146M.IS*l
z. FOR CW1!MJATW
w CmculSEC
m“., #c Uuw,”o $+38“ ,x i.
,“C”..c., ,“.C . . -;2.=.:4.m.&m-:. -,..., . ..., “,., .,,.,,,

-s.....,
K.”.-. - -!..d!”
, NAo, , ..e,
CL, — .’
—=
a
,..,,
“.!, ,.”
.“,.. !-
1 ,W, m ,-,,
FIGURE 200-25. Logic diagram drawing

200-41
DOD-STD-00100D (AR)
201.7.6 Mechanical schematic dia~ram. A mechanical schematic diagram

illustrates, the operational sequenc~r arrangement of a mechanical
device(s) . A mechanical schematic diagram shall be DreDared for each ma.ior
item or functional assembly comprising-a complex arrangement of geara, -
clutches, linkages, cams, etc., where operating principles. cannot readily be
derived from a etudy of assembly drawings. Diagrams shall be shown as part
of applicable .,assembl y. drawlnga. Separate diagram drawings shall not be
prepared. See FIGURE 200-26.
,.,
NOTES:
1. APWXBLE STAWRDS,WWWC,TW.
. . OC.O-S,D-MDOUAR1
.-.
-!..
- .. .A”..%-ti=:. —, - “- .,,”,I
., !.,”.M, “ ------
,,”” . ..al
. .
...
.
.
~: o. .“. -
““ii .
--- I ,-.. ,-,,
*
FIGURE 200-26. Mechanical schematic diagram drawln~
‘ibissample drawing ie informational only and complete to the degree

200-42
201.7.7 Piping diagram. A piping (hydraulic, pneumatic, or fluid) diagram

depicts the interconnection of components by piping, tubing or tioae, and when
desired, sequential flow of fluids in the ayatem. See FIGURE 200-27.
,,.
201.7.7.1 Requirementa. Sufficient detail shall be shown to either

explain (a) the arrangement of the piping, valves, etc., or (b) operational
sequence. Symbolic line representation may be used to distinguish “functions
of varioua parts. When the objective is to show arrangement, the following
characteristics may be shown: routing of fluids, physical locationa and
arrangement of components, pipe diameters, types and sizes of fittings, flow,
pressure, volume, etc.
w511D9W mm I.W- mxmm
_____
: ?i”iu=l..
i.... -
!-.,, “!...,. .. . . . . ,-!...7 .-r. ..” ..!-!..
/. “1:
:’E: . ~:::,-F;:-
FIGURE 200-27. Piping diagram drawing

200-43
201.8 Construction drawing. A construction drawing delineates the design

of buildings, structures, or related construction, ashore or afloat,
individually or in groups and is normally associated with the architectural-
construction-civil engineering operations. Construction drawings establish
all the interrelated elements of an architectural-civil engineering design,
including pertinent services, equipment, utilities and other engineering
details. Maps, except those accompanying or used in conjunction with
construction drawings, sketches, presentation drawings, perspectives, and
renderings are not considered to be construction drawings.
201.8.1 Erection drawing. An erection drawing shows procedures and

operation sequence for erection or assembly of individual items or assemblies
of items.
201.8. 1.1 Requirements. An erection drawing shall show the location of

each part in the structure, identification markings, types of fastenings
required, approximate weight or heavy structural members, controlling
dimensions, and any other information which will contribute to erection of
the structure.
201.8.2 Plan drawing. A plan drawing depicts a horizontal projection of a

structure, showing the layout of the foundation, floor, deck, roof or utility
system. See FIGURE 200-28.
201.8.2.1 Requirements.’ .As applicable, a plan drawing shall show ‘shapes,

sizes and, materials of the foundation, its relation to the superstructure and
its elevation with reference to fixed datum plane, location of walls,
partitions, bulkheads, stanchions, companionways, openings, columns, stairs,
shapes and sizes of roofs, parapet walls, drainage, skylights, ventilators,
etc. A plan drawing shall specify materials of construction and shall show
the arrangement of structural framing. As applicable, the location of
equipment or furniture may be indicated. A plan drawing for services may
also depict individual layouts for heating, plumbing, air conditioning,
electrical or other utility systems.
200-44
●
.C”mo”s
-,,,”, .-, - ,.”....”,
—
MDT.?%
, A~K&~,&-YFfCWID-!
FLOOR PLAN
/,.,
. !,
/ ‘“
FIGURE 200-28. Plan drawing

200-45
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
201.8.3 Plot (plat) plan drawing. A plot (plat) plan drawing depicts
areas on which structures are clearly indicated with detailed information
regarding their relationship to other structures, existing and proposed
utilities, topography, boundary lines, roads, walks, fences, etc.
201.8.3.1 Requirements. A plot (plat) plan drawing shall show ae

necessary, the property lines and locations, contours and profiles,
shrubbery, existing and new utilities, sewer and waterlines, building lines,
location of structures to be constructed, existing structures, approaches,
finished grades and other pertinent ,data.
201.8.4 Vicinity plan or site drawing. A vicinity plan or site drawing

(or vicinity map used with construction drawings) delineates the relationship ,
of a site to features of the surrounding area, such as town, bodies of water,
railroads, highways, eto.
201.9 Special purpose drawings. Special purpose drawings are other than
end-product* drawings use”d to supplement end-product* requirements. These
kinds of engineering drawings may be required for management control,
logistic purposes, configuration management, manufacturing aids, and other
functions unique to a Government Design Activity. Drawings of a general
nature that describe unique data, processes, methods, heat treatment,
protective finishes, special painting, etc., shall be prepared as a general
requirements drawing in either book-form or larger format.
201.9.1 Book-form drawing. @ook-form drawing basic format shall be aa

illustrated in FIGURE 200-29a. Sook-form continuation sheets shall be aa
illustrated in ,FIGURE 200-29b. A book-form drawing ia an assemblage of
related data disclosing by means of pictorial delineations, text or technical
tabulations, or combination thereof, the engineering requirements of an
item, a family of items, or a system. A book-form drawing is used for
special purpose application .in which it is expeditious to provide a document
consisting of numerous small sheets, suitable for binding. into book form.
bok-form drawings shall not be formatted as a specification. Specifications
shall be prepared in accordance with MIL-STD-49O or MIL-STD-961, as
.. ~ applicable. See FIGURES 200-29a through 200-29f.
‘\-
, 201.9. 1.1 Requirements. Sook-form drawings shall be ‘At! size only.
x~eet 1 shall contain a. revision status sheet. Remaining (continuation)
sheets shall not include a revision block (upper right); however, they shall
contain a revision level block. Wok-form drawings will be prepared only
with prior approval of the Government Design Activity. Specifications will
not be approved as book-form drawings.
200-46
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
●
AP?UCATIOM RSiIW10N8
mc*.smwloll
‘~
lm8mmmaul —
Mm *W UK8 - I
‘o t
,,
.-
“..
1 1 1 I 1 1 1 I I I 1 I 1 I I I I I I
<
SHICT
RN
SMUT
WV 87AWS -v B - A - - - B B B ‘,
w wwm -cc= I 2 3 4 s 6 7
,
I
It
II
-n U4a 1
I
pIslM
I
UPwvn
[*CAU
I I
I UWm W ,-
II
II
I 4“ I
,’
FIGURE 200-29a. Book-form drawing (Title sheet)
This eample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree neceaaary
the textual requirements aet forth in ‘this●tandard.
● 200-47
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR )
0
.
I
1 RNSIDNLW~ 1. [-
●
FIGURE 200-2$!b. Wok-form drawing (Continuation sheat)
200-48
o
DOD-STD-00100D (AR)
.9,8*
11 *.8 w
lUPACIVNCClmLO1m M m JIM
au Dntmm VUK* Au 1171uL U8 1.-
mull s. 7.,, 1“4 C4=*
ALL INPUT PWSES
“’”~F7ti7P-
“’::w nCISm[tlENTS, ALL CIRCUIT DELAYS~
tlEASURLDAT THE .1.5 V LEVEL ff IIPUIX
*W OUTPUT.
m 9,,9t:c -
91WU6. pit. - -..*%
SIZE &-
A 19200 64XXXIOI
I
I REVL90tJ
LEva I IEW 10
FIGURE 200-29c. Book-form drawing (Continuation sheet)
200-49
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
LIST OF UNITS
mm CABLE SIJIWRY
DES1CNATION ~ ~ SHEST No.
1 R.SWIATOR 000177 10
2 SBmumn OOQ278 10
3 sBXnAms 000279 11
b MWSR SUPPLY 000280, 11
5 PCWTRSLIPPLY 000442 11
6 POwzn
DISTSIBbTION 004711 12
FIGURE 200-29d. Book-form drawing (List of Units)
200-50
1“
●
FIGURE 200-29e. Wok-form drawing (Cable wiring sheet)
200-51
FIGURE 200-29f. Book-form drawing (Wiring list)
200-52
201.9.2 Wiring list. A wiring list consists of tabulated data as a

substitute for data indicated and shown on a wiring diagram. These data,
columns, represents wire designators, terminations, whether to an individual
or common connector assembly, or just wires or circuits spliced together. A
wiring diagram should accompany It in order to put the llTeesll (or splices) in
the proper place and perspective if the item is more than a cable assembly.
A wire list may be in computer printout form if authorized by the Government
Design Activity. A wiring list is a form of interconnection or connection
diagram (see paragraphs 201.7.2, 201.7.3, and FIGURE 200-29 f). Book-form
drawing formats lend themselves to the delineation of wiring lists.
201.9.2.1 Requirements. The principal sections of a wiring list shall be

as follows, as appropriate.
a. Title sheet and revision status of sheeta tabulation.

*
b. Referenced documents.
c. Illustrations. Figures necessary to supplement the tabulation shall

be provided.
d. Summaries of wiring or cabling information by units.
e. Wiring connection information.
201.9.3 Numerical control drawing. A numerical control (NC) drawing

depicts complete physical and functional engineering and product requirements
of an item to facilitate production by automated control means. See
FIGURE 200-30.
o
200-53
DOD-STD-00100D(AR)
201.9.3.1 Requirements. A numerical control (NC) drawing shall convey,

directly or by reference, all engineering requirements for the part(s) to be
manufactured either partially or totally with numerical control equipment.
For items capable of production by NC or conventional methods the information
shall be sufficient to permit manufacture by either method. The numerical
control drawing shall integrate any special dimensioning requirements of
numerical control machine planning and operation without compromising design
requirements. The decimal system shall be used for location of features such
as machined surfaces, holes, slots, etc. Features are normally defined in a
rectangular coordinate system. Axis on the drawing shall be considered as
intersecting at an origin and should be common with the datum of the part
view. The part view should preferably be drawn in the first quadrant (see
ANSI Y14. 3) so that positive values will result when the programmer prepares
the tape. Drawing must present required information to facilitate
preparation of the control media in the most economical form and to optimize
use of existing basic dimensioning practices.
, [ D i n I ,
., .,=
--,,., H-!- le.. ,...,, -
“0,ss
—.
2. MA, ERIAL: mu”wukt Son. -”J?,,Pcc 00-,-250/?,
._vq
mM03)o?%
mmmm
f
tI
11~ .L —— 4—–
T ~~~
——J _,&~’m
! ,
.
. 111 -.— :Tm—e—
.~]~~
.lLm,.an
!
-09!
-ma
-m
--m-—
—-— em ——.—.
PART NO,
-.”.-!. -. s,.,
-— .!...-... . . . ... .. . -!..., -. “ - w.”!!.
-.!..
,-,.-,
,.M -
,...!4 -,..., -
+ =. ,,
,,, ——
g! — -—
.
. —-- —.- .._.__ __
._”:::,~T,. __~:-!_ -.,, ,- . . . ..-
.-..!W 1
T
FIGURE 200-30. Iiumericalcontrol drawin~
This sample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree

necessary to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and’drawing shall
conform to the textual requirements aet forth in this standard.
200-54
I
!
201.9.4 optical elements snd optical systems drawings. Definitions and

requirements for drawings pertaining to optical elements and optical systems
are contained in MIL-STD-34.
201.9.5 Wiring harneas drawing. A wiring harness drawing shows the path
of a group of wires laced together in a specified conf Iguration, so formed to
simplify installation. Wiring harness drawings show a harneaa tree; a trunk
with branoh circuits laced or taped together and terminated in connectors (or
aometimea in bare or tinned wire ends). The total configuration is laid out
in accordance with its installation in a box or aasembly. See FIGURE 200-31.
201.9.5.1 Requirements. The drawing shall show all dimensions necessary

to define the harness form and termination points; or a grid system, or
vertical and horizontal graphic scales may be provided, in lieu of
dimensions, for use in ascertaining the required dimensional data or
undimenaioned full scale drawings may be used. The drawing shall also
include a wire data tabulation of wire numbers or color codess circuit.
reference designations, lengths, material specifications, and other data, as
necessary. Included in note form should be instructions, or references
thereto, for the preparation of the harness, associated schematic diagram,
and the wiring diagram.
a. The overall trunk length and various branch lengths shall be

depicted. The part number marker and circuit number identifiers shall be
shown and called out. Applicable documentation, standards, specification
and drawings required for item fabrication shall be on the drawing.
b. A wiring diagram following the pictorial paths shall be on the

drawing along with circuit identifying numbers cr the color code in
accordance with MIL-.STD-681 and wire size indicators.
c. All connectors and parts (as applicable) shall be called out on the
pictorial adjacent to the connector, and the termination shall be noted in
front of it. All materials for fabrication shall be specified on the
applicable drawing.
d. The harness shall be depicted and dimensioned in the configuration as

installed in its sasembly. It shall not be depicted flat unless used in that
configuration.
200-55
DOD-STD-00 IOOD(AR)
I “ 1 . I .
1“ I
:
1?]--”. .,** ● *g:
. I
“
t
.
I

necessary to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual
format and drawing
200-56
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
201.9.6 Cable assembly drawing. A cable assembly drawing depicts power,

signal, radio frequency, or audio frequency cables normally used between
● equipments,
sockets,
assembly
units,
connectors,
drawings
inter-racks,
etc.
previously
etc.
Cable assembly
described,
Cable
except
terminations
drawings
are normally
are similar
it is an electrical
plugs,
to the harneas
cable
connecting boxes and/or electrical components. The pictorial will show
overall length. A wiring diagram is part of the drawing or may be a aeparate
drawing and referenced in the general notes. See FIGURE 200-32.
201.9.6.1 Requirements. A cable assembly drawing shall include the

following information as applicable: overall dimensions, including or
excluding terminations, tolerances, preparation of ends of cable, wiring or
schematic diagram identifying color code of wires and termination terminals,
identification bands or marking, special cable and preparation instructions,
applicable tests, finish if any, all materials and special assembly
instructions. Full or reduced scale undimensioned drawings may be used in
lieu of dimensioned drawings.
1 , I 8 i 8
I I
_.gs~w ,
-,,., .,,,.. !,- ,.,. ,“..,, —
w,,,.
1. ,WL.m,f Stb”mms, 3PECW,C.T4U19

,. Ooo.,,mcmcmmm)
8. &NSb Y14.%.!9Q
@w mmuA”el WITH SPw lm.,-43.3a.
@~ —~ WITH S=c ~lL+13*88

@lAEr,L ,7,., r., ,NOK4,E,.
,2
@ ~EM ‘ENT8F~aTbm’ ‘~7AL ‘TAMP. ENORA= m ;&.z
cmrsm ETCH rm murwm IN mcww WITH
MIL. Sm. m,. ,,5, m H.” C“”rmc,!m
.F32W+33L7XIS MrR-~1.=3htW4.mCT-SW@ !XCI
6 OU&LITV bSSUR4NCE PflWISIONS MAP) 121XK8.31,
.wm” m ,“,s ITEM
~ ,2-, WAY SPLICE GNO-0ND+44,.
@c, .3 WA, SPLICE ,68-368,-%9.
PART No.
.,... =6, .- -,.. . ....!..
..-, . .. . Cv .. ...”.. .. . . ..?,...
-w. .-!... ! —. ..!- ..,.!,.
,, _.. _ .. ... .. .. ~ ~..,..., -
,:, .—— , .,.,. :...,
“,
.— l:--- ‘qF~ ,,,, ,Wm “
. .. . .,,;. ~~~
._&~~._ ~ .— .,= ..-
.-... - ,..,, j-, .! ,-, !
I ?
FIGURE 200-32. Cable assembly drawing

200-57
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
201.9.7 Undimensioned drawing. An undimensioned drawing depicts, to a

preoise scale, on environmental stable material, loft line information, a
template,
cable
a pattern,
assemblies
would be impractical.
panels,
and other
retitles,
components
special scales,
for which dimensioned
sheet metal
detail
parts,
drawings ●
201.9.7.1 Requirements. Undimensioned drawings shall be supplied for
panels, retitles, special scales, and other components for which dimensioned
,detail drawings would be impractical. Undimensioned msster drswlngs shall be
prepared as stable base artwork on dimensionally stable plastic sheets,
meeting the applicable requirements for drawing format materials specified in
paragraph 104. Drawings shall be of high quality, clearly drawm, typed or
scribed with sharp, clean-cut lines to insure a high degree of legible
reproducibility. Appliqued patterns shall be photographically opaque except
for desired open areas. See FIGURE 200-33.
NOTE 1: All undimensioned drawings which should” not be reproduced for.

manufacturing purposes except from the master drawing shall contain the
following note in 1/4 inch lettering located above the title block:
“ANY REPROWCTION W THISDRAWING, EXCEPTTHOSE

MAOE FROM THE FULLSIZEMASTERON STABLEBASE
MATERIAL,~NALL NOT BE USEO FOR MANUFACTURING
PuRPOSES.
NOTE 2: In addition, the following note shall appear in the general notes:
9FOR MANUFACTURINGPuRPOSES,THE PROOUC71CN

MASTER(STABLE BASE ARTWORK] WILL SE FuRNIsNEo,
uPONREOUEST, TO THE MANUFACTURERBY THE
CONTRACTING CfFICEN
.“
200-58
0
I , I 1 4 1 I 1 I
.—
=’?.- .—,.
!C,
..—
,. —-.
——. .~.
I
—
. .--.
. .
—.
ANGERATE ‘
. .— --- mwTlzER+
- —- .-,.
.. —.. —,
-.-.—- .
-—
. —-..
—.—.
4oo~4
‘ =“-”-.=..’:--- 600-7
==~d’%”.’-”-”
“,
- aJxl-9
Iom-11
pm::.
L-
4CEJ16
ZJJo-lo %%w%Em!w+?&
800’13
(000 -6
Izm-zu
14W -24
L4xm,m
-2”--.--% —“””- -—
. . .
.
=
FIGURE 200-33. Undimensioned drawing

200-59
201.9.8 Printed wiring master (stable base artwork) pattern drawing. A

master drawing ia a precise scale pattern which is used to produce the
printed circuit within the accuracy specified on drawing. Stable baae
artwork for production masters shall contains requirements specified In
MIL-STD-275 . See FIGURE 200-34.
201.9.8.1 Requirements. A printed wiring master pattern drawing is a

reproducible copy of the original ink, tape scribed master or computer-
generated photoplot prepared on stable base material. The drawing shall
have both vertical and horizontal register marks with dimensions and adequate
tolerances to control the 1/1 master pattern. The master pattern drawing
shall be suitable for making the 1/1 master pattern.
NOTE: Drawings for Dritzted wirirw? board ( Datterns) to be fabricated uain~ a

production ma=ter shall contain tie follow~ng note in 1/4 inch lettering -
located above the title block.
‘ANY REPRODUCTIONOF THISDRAWING,

EXCEPTTHOSE
MADE FROM THE FULLSIZEMASTERON STAeLEBASE
h&TEJ&:,;HALL NOT BE uSEO FOR MANUFACTURING
NOTE: l?se following note shall appear in the general notes.
“FOR MANuFACTURING
PuRPOSES,
THE PROOUCTICS4
MASTER(STABLEBASEARTWORK) WILL BE Furnished),
UPON REOUEST, TO THE MANuFACTURER BY THE
CONTRACTING OFFICER.”
201.9 .8.1.1 Digital form. Nhen the printed wiring master pattern drawing
is described in digital form, the description and form shall be in accordance
with ANSI/IPC-D-350.
NOTE: The following note shall be shown above the title block.
■ ANY REPRODUCTIONOF THISORAWING

,EXCEPTTHOSE
MAOE FROM A CAOSYSTEM,ON STABLEBASEMATERIAL,
SHALLNOT BE USEOFOR MANUFACTURINGPURPOSES.”
200-60
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
$!\
FIGURE 200-34. Printed wiring ❑ aster pattern drawing

200-61
●
201.9.9 Printed wiring master drawing. A master drawing (board detail) is
one that showa the dimensional limits or urid location aDolicable to any or
all parta of a printed wiring board or a ~rinted circuit-Lard including-the
base. See FIGURE 200-35.
201.9.9.1 Requirements. The master drawing establishes the size and shape
of the board, the size and location of all holes therein, and the ahape or
arrangement of both conductor and non-conductor patterna or elements. Master
drawings shall contain the requirements specified in MIL-STD-275. If the
printed wiring master drawing is described in digital form, the description ,
and form shall be in accordance with ANSI/IPC-D-350.
0
?
200-62
OOD-STD-00 10OD (AR)
This sample drawing ie informetional only end complete to the degree neceeeary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing ehall conform to
the teatual requirements ● et forth in this ●tandard.
200-63
201.9.10 Kit drawing. A kit drawing indicates or

depicts a packaged unit,
item or group of items, instructions, photographs or drawings such as are
used in modification, installation or survival. The items in a kit normally
do not in themselves constitute a complete functional assembly. A kit
drawing may be a listing of part numbers, a pictorial representation of parts
or a combination of both.
a. Modification kit. A modification kit consists of parts,

instructions, special tools, templatea, etc., which are used to incorporate a
change into an item after it has been manufactured.
b. Accessory kit. An accessory kit consists of parts, instructions,

special tools, templates, etc. , which are used to incorporate additional
capabilities into an item; such as heater kits for arctic use or air brake
kits to provide a trailer towing capability. The part number and
nomenclature of accessory kits will be entered on sheet one of the end item
drawing to which they pertain.
c. Software conversion kit. A software conversion kit is a package of

drawings which supplement existing drawings and their combined effect i? a
new end item. Application of conversion kits will change the vehicle
designation.
d. Hardware conversion kit. A hardware conversion kit consists of

parts, instructions, special tools, templates, etc., which is used to convert
an existing hardware item to perform a different function from that which it
now performs.
bulldozer
converted
201.9 .10.1
vehicle
For example,
or to a recovery
to a foreign
Requirements.
vehicle
a personnel
vehicle;
performing
A kit drawing
carrier being
and an American
the same function.
shall include
converted
or reference
to a
vehicle
a list
being
0“
‘k
of the entire kit contents, including part numbers and part nomenclature and
\
quantities required.
a. A or B size format only shall be used. When more than one sheet is
required, continuation sheet format of the same size (as sheet one) shall be
used.
b. An application note shall be included noting the end items involved.

Reference paragraph 118.Y ~.
(1) Modification kit.
‘THIS. KIT IS DESIGNED FOR Insert Nototim From (o), (b)or (c) Below.
PuRPOSES ONLY ANO AppLIES TO ALL CARGO TRUCK %M91X’8
(a) FIELD ”MODIFICATION (DAMWO)
(b) INOUSTRj AL MODIFICATION (IM)
(c) FIELD AND INDUSTRIAL MODIFICATION.
200-64
●
DOD-STD-OO1OOD( AR)
(2) Accessory kit.
“THIS KIT IS Applicably To AR MOAEO PERSONNEL cARRIER M22x.=
(3) Conversion kit.
“THIS KIT IS DE SIGNEO TO CONVERT A

SEMITRAILER, VAN M51X TO A SHOP VAN M80X.”’
c. ,An installation note shall be as follows. Reference paragraph

118.6X.
“THIS KIT IS TO BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH “.”

INSTRUCTION DWG XXXi XXXX WHICH ‘WILL BE FURNISHED
BY THE GOVERNMENT TO THE KIT MANUFACTURER AND/OR
INSTALLERS IN SUCH QUANTITIES AS MAY BE DEEMED
NECESSARY. ”
When more than one instruction drawing is required, all drawings shall be
listed on sheet 1.
d. When special packaging instructions are required for a kit, the

following note shall be added.
“SPECIAL PACKAGING’INSTRUCTIONS 123XXXX7

APPLY TO THIS KIT:
e. Special notes for QAPs and rework drawings shall be included when
required.
f. An integral listing of parts with total quantities is required.
(1) When an assembly is required, only the assembly number shall be

listed and not the Individual detail parts.
(2) When a kit has more than one installation instruction drawing,
the parts list shall be separated to satisfy the quantity requirements of
each installation instruction drawing.
201.9 .10.2 Rework drawing requirements. A rework drawing is used only with
modification and conversion kits and shall be prepared when rework of an old
part is desired rather than furnishing a new part. The requirements for
rework drawings are as follows :
200-65
a. A rework drawing shall depict requirements for rework of an item or

aesembly existing in the end item that la being modified or converted.
b. Sufficient views shall be shown to fully and clearly .define the

rework requirements. The rework requirements shall be shown with solid
lines. The portions of the part/assembly not reworked shall be shown with
phantom lines.
c. In addition to the physical rework requirements, the following

information shall be included on each rework drawing:
(1) The part number of the part/assembly to be reworked.
(2) When the part/assembly is reworked so that it ia interchangeable

with a part/assembly of a later production configuration, the reworked part/
assembly shall be reidentified to reflect the identify of the production
item.
(3) When the part/assembly la reworked so that it la not

interchangeable with a part/assembly of a later production configuration, the
reworked part/assembly shall. be identified by a new part number which will
correspond with the rework drawing number.
(4) Each rework drawing shall contain the notation,. ”$REWORK DRAWINGz~
which will be placed directly above the title blook.
201.9 .10.3 Installation instruction drawing. Each kit shall have an

installation instruction drawing prepared as specified herein. The drawing
may” range from an ‘An size to a multi-sheet ‘Kw size drawing. See FIGURE
200-36. (Reference 201.9.17).
a. For clarity, those parts on the drawing which are new, to be removed
and reueed, reworked, excessed, or removed and diecarded shall be identified
with an appropriate symbol. The symbols and their definitiona as ahown below
shall be included in the general notes. Only the symbols required shall be
used . (Size shall be approximately l/4 inch. )
* NEW PARTS
A PARTS TO BE REMOVED ANO REUSED

~ @ PARTS TO BE REWORKED
# PARTS TO BE REMOVED AND OISCARDED

e SPECIAL INSTRUCTlON NoTES (WHEN NE EOED)
O PARTS ARE EXCESS AND CAN BE USED ELSEWHERE
200-66
00D-STD-00 100D (AR)
b. All installation drawings shall contain the note:
● “THIS
ALL
ORAWING
ITEMS
IS FOR
MA RKED+$
INSTALLATION
ARE INCLUDED
PURPOSES
IN KIT.-
ONLY<
C. The drawing should clearly show the parts which are to be removed,
reworked, etc. , and where the kit parts are installed. Although a display of
the sequence of operations la not required, the drawing must be clear enough
ao that an industrial facility and/or a national maintenance point (local
maintenance representative) can understand the tasks to be performed and
develop sequence and detailed instructions. However, If the sequence is
functionally important, this data shall be specified on the drawing.
.
d. Drawing titles shall be descriptive of the intended installation/
modification. Example:
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
RIFLE RACKS MOUNTING MODIFICATION
KIT 570XXX2
e. The drawing shall reflect the “Before” and ‘! After” condition of the
modification. Only the parta reworked and areas affected shall be shown in
solid, and the remainder of the illustration shall be in phantom.
f. When special tools are required, the tools shall be specified in the
● general
g.
notes.
The reworked item shall be identified by the asaigned part number.

The old part number prior to rework and the rework drawing shall be placed in
parenthesis. The callout on the field of the drawing shall be as follows:
“COVER, 123 XX XXI
(REwORK 123 XXXX3 IN ACCORDANCE WITH DRAWING 123 XXXX2)*
200-67
DOD-STD-00 100D(AR )
w%
2.,7 Y!Ewa
PART NO,
“,....., - ,, ““,.. .,.-,. . .. . . .-!.-! -“ ..- .,, -.!.
-.!., . . .. . .. . . . .
._ ,.,., -,, ,.U,
,.ac, - ~~,...,-
,,
. ———. . ..—
-..” -.. .- -.
-“. ! ..,. . .. ~— .. -r
“.,..!- .,,,, ,Wr. . .-,.
1
FIGURE 200-36. Installation instruction drawing

necessary to Illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing
shall conform to the textual requirements aet forth in this stsndard.
200-68
201.9.11 Combinations of adopted items drawing. A combination of adopted

items drawing depicts the items constituting a combination of items and
● assigns a unique identification number to the combination.

serves as
combination.
the basic document for
See FIGURE 200-37.
The drawing
assignment of a stock number to the
201.9 .11.1 Requirements. Drawing format shall be in accordance with

FIGURE A-E of APPENDIX A. Entries on the drawing shall be in accordance with
lettering requirements .of paragraph 101.2. Entries in each column shall be
aa follows:
a. NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER: Self Explanatory. If no Stock Number exists,

enter ‘I NONE!!.
b. COMBINATIONS OF AOOPTED ITEMS: The necessary description of the

combination of adopted items represented by the drawing shall be entered in
the “Combinations of Adopted Itemsfr column. The first and main entry shall
be the necessary description of the combination of adopted items for which
the drawing is prepared. The words “COMPOSED OF:” shall be entered below the
first entry. The items contained in the combination described in the first
entry shall then be listed by complete nomenclature. The quantity of each
item, listed below the words ‘COMPOSED OF:tt necessary to complete one unit of
the combination shall precede the description of each item. See FIGURE
200-37.
c . CAGE CODE: The code number of the Design Activity whose part number
is assigned to the item(a) listed.
● d.
exists,
PART NO:
enter
The part
‘t NONE!!.
number(s) of the item(s) listed. If no Part no.
200-69
DOD-STD-00100D (AR)
o
U$mau
m COMBINATIONS
OF AOOPTEOITEWS
MI*SIS Uacrau ?AS7m
52Yx-x1-24x-2&xmF3TXGE,23.?!,
=1+, !4792
mm Ma I,mKs,
Pm m mw-405— 192cQ U5XXM0
— m,
LOX-X2-lZX-35%i1- CARiTum, Z+n, m-r, H792 192Q0 lzomo
EJX-X3,lXHSXX l-l.nw MS?Mu.Y,2SU, MZ, 55m
19200 12mxx13
KJm - a’ P&mm 55mxINa, 2s?4,m
ua.uo5m — 192W 96KZ.XC+
“w MA . . — .Eslnll
aemvlrl
*CVISIOW
. ,“”,”,0”:% ~ —
ciFwNATIfN
mu17F3w lln5:
—
— u ,,E’m.-
— .,- ‘—
— —
— OWN. Aw- S,,,--
— — ,19200 125W0
— -w. -“-
UNlrwl swrcf
I
●
FIGURE 200-37. Combination of adopted items drawing

200-70
201.9.12 Ship equipment (marine item) drawing. A ship equipment drawing

depicts components, equipment and systems, e.g., pumps or radar systems that
may be used on one or more ships. See FIGURE 200-38.
201.9 .12.1 Requirements. Ship equipment drawings shall be considered for

each application in three divisions, as follows:
a. Equipment drawings previously accepted for shipboard use and also

approved for the particular application.
b. Equipment drawings previously a&epted for shipboard use but not

approved for the particular application.
c. Equipment drawings not previously accepted for shipboard use.
201.9 .12.2 Weight. The net weight and alsc the operating weight with
fluids, where applicable, shall be indicated. In addition, the vertical,
longitudinal, and transverse locaticn of the center cf gravity (wet or dry,
as appropriate) of each separate ship-installed unit or assembly weighing 100
pounds or more shall be ahown on the outline drawings, assembly drawings,
❑anufacturer~s control drawings, or installation drawings.
201.9 .12.2.1 Weighta of units and assemblies shown on ship construction

drawings shall be entered in the parts lists.
201.9 .12.3 Conformance with specification. A statement shall be made on

the Certification Data Sheet, assembly drawings, or outline drawings, as
applicable, that
“ THIS EOUIPMENT IS IN ACCORDANCE WITH .SpECIFICATION
“r u THIS ~QUlpMENT IS IN ACCORDANCE
h%mbe~ (including revisims tmd amendments).”
WITH SPECIFICATl~ Numbe< (including revisik md amendments). WITH THE FOLLOWING
EXCEPTIONS: ,Cite A@icoNe Ex&pti~. ‘
200-71
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
“W,,*
.0.,,”, .-mm ,.....”, -
wE%
L ,PPI.CABLC
STDliMRDW-C.lT~l
A W04TD-LVKKOIW
=:
B,ANSIv14.
$u-i-Z
..-
m
“&.
!
-.
-------
+—-.
-r...
EEilil
“..
‘7
,!
&
-w!.! .
& .
——.
_ PART No.
*A -,,, 0$-- . .. . . .Um — . . —
“—% H-----
1-. 1-
I
I
FIGUUE 200-38. Ship equipment (marine item) drawin&

conform to the textual requirements set forth in this standard.
200-72
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
201.9.13 Certification data sheet. Certification data sheets are

supplemental drawings which contain certain contract data, equipment
characterist 1 cs data, drawing references, etc. ,“ which are contractually
required to be furnished for each contract, purchase order, or equipment
produced or procured by a contractor, except when an outline drawing, drawing
list, or other type of document is specified in lieu of a certification data
sheet. In that event, the applicable certification data shall be included in
the document specified. See FIGURE 200-3g.
201.9 .13.1 Contents. Certification data sheets shall include the

following, as applicable:
a. Manufacturer 1s &awing number assigned to identify the certification

data sheet.
b. Manufacturer fs drawing number and revision symbol of drawing(s) for

which the certification data sheets are prepared.
c. Specifications applicable to the equipment, date of specification(s) ,

and any exceptions thereto.
d. Government contract or order number(s) and the contractor *s order

number(s) and date(s).
e. Manufacturer 1s order number.
f. Manufacturer 1s identification , rating of equipment, model number, and

other pertinent information.
g. Ship system where used.
h. Ship identification number(s) when known.
i. Number of items per ship and per contract, when known.
j. Reference drawings, including applicable certification data sheets

(unless other provided), giving manufacturer’s drawing number (e. g., exciter,
controller, rheostat, complete unit assembly drawinga, and related drawing a).
k. Technical manual number, if available.
1. Component Identification Number (Allowance Parts List Number), if

available.
m. Additional data such as remarks, notes, or selection of design

variation applicable to the contract or order.
n. Certifying signature of contractor 1a representative. Government

certification is not required.
o. File number and date of letter of design acceptance, when applicable.
P. Design deviations, if any. These deviationa must be of such minor

nature that existing ship equipment drawings can be made applicable to later
ships or classes of ships without change by Indicating on the ship
construction drawings the minor deviations from the baaic design.
200-73
.
,,,,
v I
APPLICATION nEvl*mna
11?.ss, WIB m ,- I Ocscmlmnll l.”m.r.nu]—
b
m:
1. AfPtlCAW
STAWAAWSPWFICATILHS.
A. TOO-STO-!lllMl
(AR)
B. HIL-O-17M
C. HIL-L-15719
2. CfwT7Ldw’m ND.:Nscm-KA+mJ
3. CsqAch’swuERlb.
I Km-mi
4. Swlmfm‘kwwib! rzsxm7
5. SPESIFICATIWSI
R1L+ZTS6
6. AfWC4TKN:FlpfFiW
“7.omAcTEAIsTlssi
zz5w,z5wsnlm 3msElwllEATz
8. NIJERw SHIPS!
1 IWITS
IKRSUP: 6
9. WTS EA OJITAKT,6
10.NcK.IATEo0FWING6:
(KOIFKWOP.MIN3
NY.ilWOTMTWA/EK.)
11.AIJXILIMY
FW!P/lB7-B-1639/xXUS
PFSWCAT.lb.1B7-B-1-1,SS2
K. TEOWIC.UlWwALb.: 0347-z?z-mlo
13.CWMiWT IOiNTIFltATIIl
SESIONATOR:
lZJXXCM
14.ShWKTESTS NilRI.WIFIO
LWTHISOAIUI
15.BEARINGS
SUPFtIEO
WITH6FfAWIEAltILi.-Z57l9
M. SERTIFIEO
CJRlifCT
RTAOWEASll~j
SFRTIFIEO
BY:WOlHAUAWKA Mm: 67+0s
NA WmAol 9LU5U OEciOll
—
S*m.wiw .mewm
Ic”alo”s
Am !nWC”*, ~m-
“AMU,an
m : mea
.RAWIMA?movAt ● I2Ccaa-
I
UM otuo”U?m,at
,..,8 I““,,
n-l [Wam
+“ j
j
FIGURE 200-39. Certification data sheet

ahall conform to the textual requirements set forth in this standard.
200-74
201.9.14 Correlation drawing. A correlation drawing depicts physical and

functional engineering requirements between or among components of a
subsystem. They are used to correlate interface engineering data between a
o subsystem design activity and others involved in the design of the
subsystems.
201.9 .14.1 Requirements. The requirements prescribed for interface

control drawings (paragraph 201.4.6.1 ) shall apply to correlation drawings,
except the delineation provided on correlation drawings shall be restricted
to components within the subsystems. Correlation drawings shall not contain
requirements intended to control interfaces of associated subsystems. The
notation, ‘CORRELATION DRAWING” shall be shown, adjacent to the title
block. Data prescribed on correlation drawings which cannot be changed
without affecting cc-functioning subsystems shall be suitably identified.
201.9.15 Formulation drawing. A formulation drawing depicts the

constituents of an explosive, propellant, pyrotechnic; s filler, etc. It iS
used to discretely identify (see paragraph 402.16.3) the mixture; ita weight,
volume, or particle size aa used within the particular formulation. See
FIGURE 200-40.
201.9 .15.1 Requirements. Formulation drawings are textual drawings which,

as a minimum, disclose and identify a chemical mixture or compound by use of
a discrete identification. In addition, the weight, volume, percentage
composition, or particle size of the chemical or compound making up the
formulation shall be defined along with the necessary batching and processing
steps required to attain the required formulation. FORMULATION. DRAWING~
● shall be shown, adjacent to the title block.
200-75
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
*
,.
APPLICbTION I
1
Wvmlofu
. o
I 1
lMOnEDIE”Tm *ERCENTAOE
●V wEIQHT
EEEi@El
LAMIMAC 41!6, DWG I15XXXX NOTE3 98.s2 !.0
COBALT NAPMTHENATE DWGI17XXXX 0.5t0.l
mm:
1. #PFilCABLE
SFfCIFICATICWWTAWR&
.4.mwo-mlom (m)
2. USEMIXTURE
I(lTHIN
15MINUTES
AFTER
tlIXING.
3. STORAGE
TEMFWATUM
60FMl. SHALL
NOT6fUSEDIF
SOLIDIFIED.
SHELF
LIFEAWROXIMATELY
6 WTHS.
I
4. STORAGE
TEWERATURI
45F W. SHALL
NOTK USEOIF
WIOIFIEO.
SHELF
LIFEAF?ROXIMATELY
6WTHS.
FORMULATION DRAWING
=
~
1. I
FIGURE 200-40. Formulation drawing

●
200-76
201.9.16 Contour definition drawing. A drawing containing the

mathematical, numeric or graphic definition required to locate any desired
point on a given contoured surface. This drawing is used for either
e conventional or computer assisted part fabrication.
201.9 .16.1 Requirements. The drawing shall contain mathematical equations

for each geometric entity, tabulated coordinate, graphic sections, summary
. of entities and relationship(s) to mOre basic coordinate aYstems.
201.9.17 Modification drawings. Modification drawings delineate changes

to delivered items, assemblies, installations or systems. Modification
drawings are prepared to add, remove or rework item equipment installations,
~ or syatema to satisfy the using activitY’s requirements Or’ to incOrPorat.e
mandatory changes (i.e., safety, reliability, or application extension) in
delivered equipment. Indicate above or adjacent to the title block the worda
: “MODIFICATION ORAWING” . (Reference 201.9.10. 3)..
201.9 .17.1 Requirements. Modification drawings shall contain complete

Information for accomplishing the change, including, as applicable:
a. Instructions for the removal or installation of affected parta.

,,
b. Special notes, including identification by part drawing number of

modified part. ,,
c. Dimensions necessary to accomplish the modification. (These shall be

given from some specific point which is readily identified and accessible,
rather than from some theoretical reference plane) .
o
d. An integral parts list containing all items required for the
modification, items to be deleted, salvaged, and items to compile a kit, as
applicable.
e. Listing of special tools or equipment required or supplied.

>
.\
f. Effectivity (serial number, aircraft tail number) which will identify
the items which are to be modified.
201.10 Layout drawing. A layout drawing provides graphic depiction of

design development. It is similar to a detail, assembly or installation
drawing, except that it contains only the minimum number of lines necessary
to resolve pictorially the design solution. A layout drawing does not
establish item* identification. See FIGURE 200-41.
201. 10.1 Application guidelines. A layout drawing may be prepared for a

complete end products or any portion thereof and is prepared either as:
a. A conceptual design layout to present one or more solutions for

meeting the basic design parameters and to provide a basis for evaluation and
selection of an optimum design approach.
200-77
b. A design approval layout to present sufficient details of the design

aPPrOach for coat estimating and design approval.
c. A detailed design layout depicting the finsl development of the

design in sufficient detail to facilitate preparation of detail and assembly
drawings.
d. A geometric stud y to develop movement of mechanical linkages,

clearances or arrangements.
A layout drawing is not normally used to fabricate equipment; however, a

detailed deSIRn layout drawing is sometimes used as an interim drawing - for
development i~ems. -
201. 10.2 Requirements. A layout drawing shall ,include, ss applicable:
a. Location of primary components.
b. Interface and envelope dimensions including a cross reference to

‘ applicable interface control documentation.
c. Paths of motion.
d. Operating positions.
e. Criticsl fits and alignments.
f. Selected materia.la, finishes, and processes.
g. Wire bundle and ‘pneumatic and hydraulic line routing and slzea,
h. Adjustments.
i. Critical assembly details and sequence.
j. Identification for selected purchased items and new design items.
k. Identification for assembly depicted (when the layout drawing is to

be used aa an interim assembly drawing) .
A layout shall be drawn to scale with sufficient accuracy and completeneaa

for its Intended use.
,,
200-78
e
f * I , & * I , 1
. . .!-— ———
NOTES [?-, . , .-.. r.. .--r ..—
1, &PPLICAOLES1&NDARDStSPECrlCAT10N5
A, DOO-STO-OO1OOD[
At7).
.-----
..—..%
.—--!.
k ‘
-----*9>
-”.
-,!, . . ..-. “e... -“! - .- .“-!

------
—, . ---
i ---
.
._.,1___ - ----- - W.-
“..”-
FIGURE 2G0-41. Layout drawing
This sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessary
to,illustrate e type of drawing. Actual format end drawing ehall conform to
the taxtuel requirements set forth in this etandard.
200-79
DOD-STD-001 ODD( AR)
201.11 Camouflage basis drawing. A camouflage basis drawing graphically

depicts
camouflage
Center,
22060-5606.
exterior
pattern.
~sm~uflage
configuration
Deviations
Applications
(outline) of sll
or exclusions
Team, ATTN:
items that
must be approved
STRBE-JDA, - Ft.
require a
by RD&E
Belvoir, VA e
201. 11.1 Requirements. A camouflage basis drawing shall include the
following requirements and information as a minimum.
a. Drawings shall depict the following views.
( 1) Back
(2) Front
(3) ToP r
(4) Right Side
(5) Left Side
(6) All hidden views, including open position of batches and doors.
b. The drawing scale is dependent upon the actual size of the item as
follows : ‘
( 1) Items whose overall length IS twenty five (25) feet or less. the
drawing scale
(2)
shall be one eighth
Items whose overall

(1/8)
length iS
.
greater than twenty five (25)

●
feet, the drawing scale shall be one tenth ( 1/10).
the size of
(3) Items with excessive
the item. The scale
dimensions
to be used
shall
shall
be scaled
be approved
proportionate
by Ft. Belvoir
to
$.
RD&E Center.
c. Drawing sheet size shall be “D” or “E” in accordance with ANSI Y14. 1.
d. Overall dimensions shall be shown to def Ine length, width, and height
of the item. Also any dimensions required to position the item prior to
application of the pattern sh’all be shown.
e. Depict ional detail shall be sufficiently accurate to show reference

points from which the dimensions emanate.
f. Towed items shall be shown in the towed pOsitiOn. The tYpe(s) of

vehicle that will be used to tow the item shall be specified.
s. Fire control and basic issue items shall be shown in the installed
position.
h. Hatches/doors that could be left in the open position during

operating
the open
mode on self-propelled
and the closed position.
and vehicular items shall be shown In both
●
i. It is preferred that ink be used for drawing and that line width be
narrow enough to permit depiction of necessary details without lines blending
together.
200-80
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
~’is sample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree neceeaary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform~to
the textual requiramente eat forth in thle standard. \
,200-81
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
,
o
d
I
~“
!I-
@-
.
x .,. 1 . * . 1 . 1 . I .
i
‘lhissample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree neceaaary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drewing shall conform to
●
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
, , . 1 i . & . 1 .
.,
‘\
\\
\
Th’issample drawing la informational only and complete to the degree necesemy
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing ah.ellconform~to
the textual requir&oenta aet forth in this etandard.
● ‘\,
200-83
\ \
00D-STD-00 100D (AR)
i L:——l——4—
.-J
I- !—
the textual requirements set forth in this standard. -
200-84
DOD-8TD-001OOD(AR)
. 1 . 1 I . + . I “ 1 . 1 .
This sample drawing is informntfonal only and complete to the degree necee.sav
to illustrate a type of dravirig. Actual format and drawing shall confora to
●
the textual requirements eet forth in this etandard.
200-85
OOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR )
, 1 . r . 1 “ ● I . I . I .
This sample drawing is informational only and complata to the degree neceaaary
to illustrate a type of drawing.. Actual format and drawing shall conform to
the textual requirement set forth in this standard.
●
200-86
DDO-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
> I t . I . 4 . 1 “ I .
●
I
1
✍✎
‘>+
* . . . . . . I
1. I 1 T 1 1 . 1
ThiIIsample drawing io informational only and complete to the degree neceeemy

to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing ehell conform to
●
the.textual requir~enta eet forth in thie etendaid.
200-87
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR) I
201.12 Camouflage pattern drawing. The camouflage pattern drawing depicts
the system and requirements for the contrasting color bands and patches
aPPlied over a base color to disrupt the silhouette of an item as observed
from 1000 meters and beyond. Generation of the pattern is the responsibility o
of Ft. Belvoir RD&E Center. Changes and/or adjustments to the pattern
requires approval of Ft. Belvoir. 8ee FIGURE 200-43.
201.12.1 Requirements. The camouflage pattern drawing shall describe the

pattern generated by Ft. Belvoir RDAE Center. The following requirements
shall be included:
a. The location and size dimensions for bands as required. The black
disruptive bands shall be within ~ one ( 1 ) inch of the specified width of
the band, and the relation of the band shall be within ~ one ( 1 ) inch of
the specified a as igned location on the item as depicted by the drawing.
b. Notes aa required.
o. ,Marking style, size, location, and color of paint to be applied.
d. Identification of all surfaces not to be painted.
e. Type of paint in accordance with MIL-8TD-171. Chemical Agent

Resistant coating ( CARC) is required.
f. Cross reference to Ft. Belvoir drawing number, date and revision of

their drawing describing the camouflage pattern.
200-88
0
1 I I I . I I 1
ml I 1(
!:, ,,
,.!, ,, $
E
—, .
.
—
—
—
—
— &“ ‘HI-t
1 ! I
—
-,
—
—
i—
!
:–
W-tEt-
{
n
~– -
l—
Li,.,..,
;:=,
-d
I
I I I T I I I
This sample drawing ie informational only and complete to the degree necessary
the textual requirements .eetforth in thie otandard.
●
200-89
I . 1 I I . ! I . I
i-k
I
I
s
*. f 1
I 1 I 1 I I .
l%ie sample drawing is informational only end complete to the degree neceaeary
to illustrate a tme of drawing. Actuel format and drewing ehall conform to
the textual requik-menta net f~rth in th~a standard.
200-90
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
IL
I , , ! I I I
file sample drawing ie Informational only and complete to the degree neceeaarY.
to illustrate ● type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall confom to ,
the textual requirements aet forth in thie etandard.
●
200-91
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
. I I I i . I I
Ill i
i
I
I I 1 I 1 I I
nis eemple drewing is informatfonal only and complete to the degree necesea~
to illustrate ● type of drawing.. Actual format and drewing ehall conform to
the textual requirements get forth in this etandard.
200-92
DOD-STD-00100D(AR)
I
1. I 1
1 1 1 I , t I
L
fiis sample drewing is informational only and complete to the degree neceeeary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actuel format and drewins ●hall conforu to
● the textual requirement set forth in thie ●tandard.
200-93
DOD-STD-00100D (AR)
201.13 Vehicle drawing. (top assembly) A vehicle top assembly drawing

depicts configuration of the vehicle. See FIGURE 200-44.
201.13.1 Requirements. A top assembly vehicle drawing shall include the

following requirements and information as a minimum.
a. Drawings shall depict the following views.
(1) Saok
(2) Front
(3) ToP
(4) Curb Side (Right Side)
(5) Road Side (Left Side)
b .“ The drawing scale ia dependent upon the actual size of the vehicle.
( 1) Vehicles whose overall length is twenty five (25) feet or less,

the drawing scale shall be one eighth (1/8).
(2) Vehicles whose overall length is greater than twenty five (25)
feet, the drawing scale shall be one tenth (1/10).
c. Drawing sheet size shall be “E” in. accordance with ANSI Y14.1.
d. Dimensions shall define the length, width, height, and location of

the center of gravity (CG), lifting Points and tie do~s.
e. Depictional detail shall be sufficiently accurate to indicate

reference pointa from which dimensions emanate.
f. All pertinent vehicle characteristics shall be listed, such as

weight, size, type of engine, performance, armament and personnel capacity.
g. Vehicle markings, as required, shall be indicated and located.
h. The information to be added to the data or nameplate shall be

apecif ied in the general notes.
i. The zeneral notes will also include the auDlicable final inspection
record and r~ferencea to the interface control an~-electrical interconnection
drawings.
j. All associated lists such as, On Vehicle Equipment (OVE). SpeCial

Tool Sets, Special Kits, and vehicle specification shall be listed.
201. IU Vehicle camouflage pattern drawing. See 201.12. See

FIGURE 200-45.
201.14.1 Requirements. See 201.12.1.
200-94
●
DOD-STD-OD 100D (AR)
4 ‘%%.-%WI%5L
., ,Ca .r. D!me,ao?a7-
c mm‘“, —---
Unnl
s?l,xm
— -aw---- —- -- —
.
.
,-” ,-
FIGURE 200-44. Vehicle drawing (top assembly)”

necessary to Illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing
shall conform to the textual raquirementa set forth in this standard.
200-95
DOD-STD-0010OD( AR)
I 4 I n i , .— I I (
.“,-
-,,., --,- ,“. .-, —
Mml
-.” . . . . . “c... -.—, . . —

. .. ----
----- .-”.-.
i- ,-
,,,, ,.
.
.
.- -. . --
“., “., -. “m-
FIGURE 200-45. Vehicle camouflage pattern drawing
~la aemple drawing ia informational only And complete to the degree neceeaary
the textual requirements Bet forth in this standard.
200-96
DOD-STD-00100D (AR)
201.15 Package content drawing. A package content drawing is a drawing
o prepared
nomenclature
convenience
logistic
packaging
to provide
for stock
of handling,
support
a package
operationa.
which constitutes
Identification
identification
storage,
Package
issue,
a synthetic
number and appropriate
of military
or functional
content
materiel
drawings
grouping
packaged
selectivity
are prepared
or combination
in
package
for
for that
of items,
which in themselves do not constitute a functioning, engineering, or
production assembly. Representative examples of such groupings are sets of
repair parts and engine and container units. See FIGURE 200-46.
201.15.1 Requirements. Drawing format shall be in accordance with

FIGURE A-9 of APPENDIX A. Entries on the drawing shall be in accordance with
lettering requirements of paragraph 101.2, except titles may aleo be
typewritten. Entries shall be as follows:
. a. PACKAGE STOCK NO.: The National Stock Number assigned to the

package.
b. PACKAGE NOMENCLATURE: The nomenclature of the package.
c. THIS PACKAGE PERTAINS TO: The nomenclature and model number or, if
model number doea not apply, the part number of the system/ aubaystem to which
the package applies.
d. QTY: The quantity of each item which is necessary to make up one

unit of the package.
● e.
f.
NAME OF ITEM:
DUG NO.:
Nomenclature
The drawing number

of
of
each
each
item
item
contained
listed.
in the package.
h ,’, ,A,E ,oDE : The code number of the Design Activity whose drawing
~ number is assigned to the items listed.
h. PART NO. : The part number of each item listed.
i. STOCK NO.: The National Stock No. of each item listed. If no Stock
Number exists, leave blank.
j. Title Block: The nomenclature of the package contents drawing.
200-97
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
PACKAGE STOCK NO.

PACUAGE NOMENCLATURE ~ao-”’=-’=
,7H18PACKAQE PERTAINST0 NO-
PACKAGE CONTENTS
WN4: Wm%l
— DES14M
—
m B8Jr4!nla
—
I :’ ”[” ’ ”.
——
— — =WN
—
A UNITw S14ur
FIGURE 200-46. Package content drawing
l%ia sample drawing ie informational only and complete to the degree neceeaa?y
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawi~ ●hall conform to
the textual requirements ● et forth in thie ●tandard.
. ●
200-98
DOD-STD-001 OOD(AR)
201.16 Software and Firmware Data. Drawings defining software realdent in a

firmware device will be prepared as SOFTWARE CONTROL DRAWINGS for the master
media and ALTERED ITEM DRAWINGS for the firmware.
o
201. 16.1 Software Control drawing. A software control drawing will describe
the characteristic of the executable software and its media which will
subsequently be used for programming the firmware. l?iedescription will be
that of the master, a copy of which Hi11 be provided to the IGanuf acturer for
.
use in programming ❑icro-circuits. Bit patterns will not be defined as truth
tables but rather supplied as a master in magnetic form.
201. 16.1.1 Requirements. The software control drawing shall specify the
.
type of media, i.e., magnetic tape, disc,, etc., its identification number and
revision level. In addition, its characteristics shall be fully described,
such aa number of tracks, density, size, etc. Any other information
necessary to completely describe the ❑edia*s characteristics and how it must
be used, such as specifications, shall also be Included. The repository
where the MASTER is stored and maintained shall be shown. The, note, ●A ,cOpY”
OF THE MASTER, SUITABLE” FOR USE IN IJ)ADING DEVICES Mft Ah , WILL BE FURNISHED UPON
REQUEST, TO THE MANUFACTURER BY THE CONTRACTING oFFICERJ/ shall be ahown on the
drawing. See FIGURE 200-47. Part number shall only be shown as a daah number
Ldentif ier of the ❑aster media in the general notes.
1’1 NOTES: “’ “ ● ““- ‘-=’’-’-

LAPPLICAaLE STANOARDS/SPECIFICATIONS
A.COD-sTD-001000 (AR]
I
z THE WT PATTERNSFORPROM LOADINGARE CCNTAINED
ON MAGNETICTAPE123xxxX8-I ,VERSION02.
s THE MAGNETICTAPEHASTHE FOLLOW!NG CNARACTSRWTIC9
& NUMaEROF TRACKS: 9
B, DENSITY:1600aPl
. C. SIZE:2400FEET
p. BLOCKING:1’200
F.FORMAT:ASCII
4 REPOSITORY FORTHE MASTERIS:
US.ARMY ARMAMENTREsEARCH, DW.ELOPMENT AND
ENGINEERING CENTER
PICATINNY ARSENAL,NJ,07e06‘S000
s. A COPYOF THE MASTER,SUITA6LE FORUSE !NUIADU4G
o cCVICES 123xxXX6,
WILLSE FURNISHEDUPON REouEST,
TO THE MANuFACTURERaY THECIJWTF&UXlffi
C+FICER.
SOFTWARE,CWATm DRAWlhG
-----
.
FIGURE 200-47. Software control drawinq
o l%ie sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necaaaary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall confom to
the textual requirements aet forth in this etandard.
200-99
DOD-STD-OO1OOD( AR)
201.16.2 Firmware drawing. The drawing describing the requirements of a

single programmed device will be prepared as an AL’fERED ITEM DRAWING in”
accordance with para 201.4.4. Circuit boards with multiple devices that
require programming at that level will be prepared as an assembly drawing.
Eevices assembled at that level will be supported by appropriate
specifications or drawings that specify requirements prior to downloading.
201. 16.2.1 Requirements. The firmware drawing shall define the

requirements of the device prior to programming either on this drawing or by
specification for source control drawing if MILITARY specification item is
not available. In addition, the requirements for programming (bit pattern
downloading) of the device using Government furnished media and instructions
shall be included. The same type of requirements shall be included on
drawings for circuit boards with multiple devices programmed at the same
time. Notation pertaining to acceptance inspection requirements shall also
be included. See FIGURE 200-48.
. I i 1
I NOTES: 1-.. .—- ..—,_
1.APPLICABLE
mANOARDS/3PEClFlCAT10
NS:
A.00D-STD-OOIIX)O(AR)
2 MICROCIRCUIT
SHALLaE INACCORDANCE WITH
REQUIREMENTS OF 123xxxX5, EXCEPT FOR
PROGRAMMING BY DOWNLOADING BIT PATTERNS
CONTAINEO ON MAGNETIC MEOIA OESCRIBEO ON
SOFTWARE CONTROL OWG 123XXXXe.
i SPECIFICATION
19200-55xXX APPLIESFOR BIT
PATTERNDOWNUIAOINGANO VERIFICATION.
4.QUALITYASSURANCEPROVISIONS (DAPl
123XXXX6APPLYTO THIS ITEM.
S.tTEMIDENTIFICATION:
APPLYTHE FOLLOWING
MARKINGTO CONTAINERINACCORDANCEWITH
MIL-STO-130.
“19200-123XXXX6“
MFR-c--n
MANUFACTURERS
L CAGE COOE
ALTERED ITEM DRAWING
PAM m GcXxm
=- -==.= —- -—
~= —
. —
:+.+: .. .. ... . - .- —— -. - -,
—-
FIGURE 200-48. Altered item drawing (Firmware)
fiis sample drawing ie informational only and complete to the devae neceasam
to illustrate a type of drawing.
Actual format and drawing shall confom to
the textual requirements aet forth in thie standard.
200-100
~
CHAPTER 300
DRAWING TITLES
300 General. This chapter establishes procedures for creating titles for
engineering drawings and for parts detailed thereon.
301 Definitions. Definitions for words and terms marked with an asterisk
(*) are located in Chapter 700.
301.1 Drawing title. The drawing title shall be the name by which the part
or item will be known and shall consist of a basic name, government type
designator, if applicable, and sufficient modifiers to differentiate like
items in the asme major assembly. Only drawing titles shall be in the title
block. References to next assembly/major item shall not be shown unless. part
of the drawing title.
301.2 Approved item name. An approved item name is a name approved by the
Directorate of Cataloging, Defense Logistics Services Center and published in
the Cataloging Handbook H6, Federal Item Name Directory for Supply
Cataloging.
301.3 Type designation. Type designators are a combination of letters

and/or numbers assigned by the Government to identify an item(s) in
accordance with NIL-STD-1 464.
301.4 Assembly. The term ASSEMBLY* when used as a part of the drawing
title will conform to the definition for the terms contained in Chapter 700
and meet the requirements of Federal Cataloging Handbook H6 series.
302 Procedures for creating drawing titles. Titles for drawings requiring
modifiers shall be in two parts. The first part shall be the name. The
second part shall consist of those additional modifiers and government type
designators necessary to complete the identification of the item. The
drawing title shall be shown in upper-case letters.
302.1 General rules. The following rules apply to all drawing titles:
a. No abbreviations of any portion of the name (first part of the title)

shall be made, except those necessarily y used trademarked names and the words
ASSEMBLY (ASSY), SUBASSEMBLY (SUBASSY) , or INSTALLATION ( INSTL) .
Abbreviations may be used in the second part of the title; however, they
shall conform to those abbreviations listed in MIL-STD-12. In general,
the use of abbreviations shall be avoided.
b. Titles of detail parts shall be consistent with the titles of their

next aasembl y drawings, except where interchangeability y of such detail parts
between assemblies makes consistency impractical or ia prohibited by the
Government Design Activity, or when such use limits application.
c. When a drawing is prepared to replace an existing drawing with a

different number and the title of the drawing being replaced ia in accordance
with instructions contained herein, the same title shall be used. When the
title of the drswing being replaced ia not in accordance with these
instructions, a new drawing title shall be developed.
300-1
DOD-STD-00100D(AR )
d. A drawing title shall be as brief and simple as possible, shall

describe the item and shall distinguish between similar items.
e. The names of parts* detailed on a drawing shall consist of a noun or

noun phrase. Modifiers may be used to distinguish between parts on, the same
drawing.
f. For words with dual or multiple definitions, the Military definitions

as published in the Federal Item Name Dictionary for Suppl Y Cataloging,
Section A, Cataloging Handbook H6-1 shall have precedence.
g. Multi-sheet drawings shall have the exact same titles on all sheets.
302.2 First part of title. The first part of the title shall be one of
the following in order of preference.
a. An approved item name selected from the Federal Item Name Directory
for Supply Cataloging, Section A, Cataloging Handbook H6, whOse definition
describes the item (e.g. “PIN, STRAIGHT, HEADED”, “SpRING. HELICAL.
COMPRESSION” , ENGINE, GASOLINE, RIB, WING SECTION, INNER).
b. Where the procedure outlined in paragraph 302.2a does not provide a

suitable name, the following procedures shall be followed:
(1) The basic name shall be a noun or noun phrase. Modifiers shall
be Included as required by paragraph 302.2c.
(2) This noun or noun phrase shall establish a basic concept of an

item. A compound noun or noun phrase shall be used only when a single noun
is not adequate to establish a basic concept of an item. Cataloging Handbook
H6 shall be used aa a guide in establishing the noun or noun phrase.
(3) A nOun or noun phrase such as “casting”, “forging”, “weldment”,

etc. , shall not be used in the title of a drawing for a finished part, even
if shown on a separate sheet. ,, Casting,l etc. , may be used in the title of a
drawing for a casting that is subject to further fabrication as described on
another separate drawing. In lieu of such a name, a noun or noun phrase
shall be asaigned which indicates what the item is or what it does, e .g. ,
llBRACKETll in the title , ,, BRACKET, SUppORT MIXING VALVE!, .
(4) The noun or noun phrase shall be used in singular form, except
as follows:
(a) Where the only form of the noun ia plural, e.g., ‘! TONGS”.
(b) Where multiple single items appear out on the same drawing,
e.g. , llFIJSESll , !!co NNECTORSN, ‘tFASTENERStl .
(c) Where the nature of the item requires the plural form,
e -g ., ,, CLIMBERSI, , IIGLOVESII.
300-2
(5)The word “ASSEMBLY” shall be used in names selected from

Cataloging Handbook H6 exactly as published therein, e.g. , “CABLE ASSEMBLY,
SPECIAL PURPOSE, Electrical . When no applicable name appears in Cataloging
Handbook H6 the word “ASSEMBLY’! shall be used as the last word of the noun
phrase , e -g ., ,1INTAKE-MANIFOLD ASS EMBLy, GASOLINE ENGINEII.
(6) An ambiguous noun, or one which designates several classes of

items, shall not be used alone, but shall be used as part of a noun phrase.
Example:
Acceptable Unacceptable
SLIDE RULE RULE, SLIDE

SOLDERING IRON IRON, SOLDERING
..
NOTE: One of the most difficult tasks in naming any item ia the
determination as to when a noun should be qualified as being ambiguous. The
general rule quoted above is amplified to some extent in the succeeding
paragraph. When a noun does not expressly fit under any of these rules, a
guide in determining whether the selected noun is or is not ambiguous, is to
refer to Cataloging Handbook H6 to see if it is listed.. For eXample, if
there ia a question on the noun “plate” , a review of the index will reveal
many item names with the noun ‘plate’r used, indicating that the noun is not
considered as being ambiguous.
(7) A trade-marked or copyrighted name shall not be used as the noun

or noun phrase except where the technical name is extremely difficult, e .g. ,
‘FREON 12n rather than l!
DICHLORODIFLUORMETHANE!l or where no other name is
available.
(8) When an item is not a container or material, but its name

involves the use of a noun which ordinarily designates a container or
material, a noun phrase shall be used as the basic name.
Examples:
Acceptable Unacceptable
JUNCTION BOX BOX, JUNCTION

CABLE DRUM DRUM, CABLE
SOLDERING IRON IRON, SOLDERING
300-3
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
(9) The following words shall never be used alone but may be the
last word of a noun phraae:
Apparatus Equipment Plant

Aaaembly Group Ship
Assortment. Installation Subassembly y
Attachment Kit Tackle
Compound Machine Tool
Device Mechanism Unit
Element outfit Vehicle
EXCEPTION: In certain instances, some of the listed words may be used as the
first word in a basic noun phrase, e.g. , ‘1MACHINE SHOP’! or ‘1TOOL KIT!!.
c. When the noun or noun phrase represents an item to which types,

grades, varieties, etc., are applicable, the remainder of the first part of r
the title shall consist of one or more modifiers.
(1) A modifier may be a single word or a qualifying phrase. The

first modifier shall serve to narrow the area of concept established by the
basic name and succeeding modifiers must continue a narrowing of item concept
by expressing a different type of characteristic. A word directly qualifying
a modifying word shall precede the word it qualifies, thereby forming a
modifying phrase, e.g. , ‘BRACKET, UTILITY LIGHT!!. It is to be noted the
LIGHT!l and precedes it in the modifying
word ‘lUTILITYN qualifies the word ‘!
phrase.
(2) A modifier shall be separated from the noun or noun phrase by a

comma and from any preceding modifier by a comma. The hyphen in compound
words and the dash in type designators are not punctuation marka.
(3) The conjunction ‘or” and the preposition “forn shall not be
used.
(4) The first part of the title shall be separated from the second
part of the title by a dash.
302.3 Second part of title. The second part of the title shall consist of
such additional modifiers, modifying phrases, or government type designators .
as are required. Modifiers indicating what an item is (its shape, structure,
or form) or what the item does (its function) are preferable to modifiers
indicating the application (what it is used for) or location of the item
(where it is used) (e.g. , !!SPRING, HELICAL COMPRESSION - RECOIL ADAPTER”) .
First Paz of Title Second Part.of Title

I
a. When two or more drawings are similar, and the partsg detailed on
them perform the same general function, they shall be distinguished by
additional modifiers indicating their location, relative position, forma,
dimensions, etc., for example: ‘RIB , WING SECTION, INNER-STATION 276n .
b. Non-part drawings (e.g. , schematic, wiring diagrams, etc. ) may include

the drawing type as the second part of the drawing title (e.g., AMPLIFIER,
FIRE CONTROL - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM) .
300-4
303 Disclosure of security categories. No word(s), symbol(s), nor anY of

their possible combinations which would disclose information in any of the
● established
Appendix B.
security categories, shall be used in drawing titles. See
304 Titles for kit drawings. Titles shall be determined from Cataloging
Handbook H-6. Typical examples are:
a. Modification kit: “MODIFICATION KIT, RIFLE RACKS MOUNT ING.”
b. Accessory kit: “HEATER KIT.: PERSONNEL CAB.”
c. Conversion kit: “CONVERSION KIT, SEMITRAILER, VAN, M80X:
300-5
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
TliISPAGE LEFl BLANK INTENTIONALLY
300-6
DOD-STD-00100D (AR)
CHAFTER 400
NNIU3ERING, CODING AND IDENTIFICATION
0 400 General. This chapter establishes numbering, coding and

ident-n procedures for engineering drawings, associated lists and
documents referenced thereon. It also provides identification direction for
parts, materials, processes and treatments specified on these engineering
drawings and associated lists.
401.1 Referenced documents. Referenced documents as used in this chapter

are design activity standards*, drawings, specifications, pamphlets or other
documents referenced on drawings or lists.
401.2 Contractor and Government Entity Code (CAGE Code). CAGE (code
identification) number ia a five-digit alpha-numeric code applicable to all
activities which have produced or are producing items used by the Federal
Government. It also applies to Government activities which control design,
or are responsible for the development of certain specifications, drawings,
or standards which control the design of items. These numbers are assigned
in conformance with Cataloging Handbook H4/H8, CAGE Code. Activities not
assigned a CAGE Code shall request such identification in conformance with
Cataloging Handbook H4/H8. Organizations which neither manufacture nor
control design such as dealers, agents, or vendors of items produced by
others are not included in the H4/H8. CAGE Code shall be entered in the
● appropriate
401.3
block
Document
of the
identification
engineering
number.
drawing or
The document
associated
identification
list format.
number
consists of numbers of combinations of letters, numbers, and dashes.
$ nunber is assigned to a document, in addition to the title and CAGE Co~~sfor
identification purposes.
\
401.4 Drawing number. The drawing number consists of letters, numbers or
combination of letters and numbers, which may or may not be separated by
dashes. The number is assigned to a particular drawing for identification
purposes by the design activity. The drawing number shall be assigned from a
block of numbers provided by the Government Design Activity. Package
content, all kit drawings and vehicle top assemblies may require selected
identification numbers as determined by the Government Design Activity. (See
paragraph 402.5).
401.5 Part number. Part numbers consist of letters, numbers or

combination of letters and numbers, which may or may not be separated by
dashes that are assigned to uniquely identify a specific item. The part
number shall be or shall include the design activity drawing number, and may
include a dash number suffix (if applicable) . (See paragraph 402. 6)
400-1
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
401.6 Find number. A find number may be assigned to an item* (part,

assembly, etc. ) on the field of a drawing for purposes of cross-referencing
to items on a parts list; and as locators in lieu of using the item part
number. The parts, assemblies, etc., so marked have other identifying
numbers for purposes of procurement and marking which are cross-referenced to
the find numbers in the integral parts lists, or in a table on the drawing.
Reference designations in accordance with IEEE Stds 200 and 315 may be used
as “find numbers”. (See paragraphs 603.2.9 and 201. 1.2). Find numbers will
be considered for use only on drawings of complicated electronic devices and
mechanical assemblies, tools, gages, or fixtures. Find numbers shall be
cross-referenced to part numbers in a table, located preferably above the
title block (See APPENDIX A-9) or as directed by Government Design Activity.
on the drawing. Prior authorization by the Government Design Activity la
required. Find number system with a separate parta list is not permissible.
402 Identification requirements. All drawings and associated lists shall

be assigned identification in conformance with t~is chapter.
402.1 New drawings and associated lists. New drawings and associated lists
shall be assigned a CAGE Code in accordance with paragraphs 401.2, 402.4;
drawing number in accordance with paragraphs 401.4, 402.5; and part numbers
in accordance with paragraphs 401.5, 402.6, 402.10.
402.2 Existing drawings and associated lists. Existing drawings and

associated lists which do not contain a CAGE Code shall have one aasigned in
accordance with paragraph 401.2 and placed as near as possible to the-
drawing or associated list number. The CAGE Code shall be preceded by the
phrase ‘!CAGE CODEn.
402.3 Referenced documents. All documents other than Government or non-

government specifications and standards* referenced on drawinga shall have a
document identification number, and a CAGE Code. These numbers shall be
placed in a conspicuous location on the document. The contractor design
activity is responsible for assigning or obtaining document numbers and the
CAGE Code for documents used with drawings. Technical orders, pamphlets and
recordings are not considered referenced documents.
402.4 Contractor and Government Entity Code for Manufacturers. Unless

otherwise specified, the CAGE Code shall always be the CAGE Code of the
design activity whose drawing number is assigned to the drawing and shall be
entered on the drawing in the appropriate block, as ahown in Figure 400-1.
402.5 Drawing number. The drawing number shall not exceed 15 characters.
These characters may include numbers, lettera, and dashes with the following
limitations: (See paragraph 402.6).
a. Lettera ’11”, ‘lOIV, 18Q’q, ‘tS~t, ‘*X’t, and ‘12!! shall not be used; however,
letters ‘!S” and !lZ1! may be used only if they are a part of the existing
drawing numbering system. They shall not be used in the development of new
drawing numbering systems. Letters shall be upper case (capital lettera).
b. Number shall be arabic numerals. Fractional, decimal and Roman

numerals shall not be used.
400-2
PART NO. 123X X XXO

U.S.ARMY TANK-AUTOMOTIVE COMMAND
WARREN, MICHIGAN 48397
utiign A~v@
*OVAL
“z= ;;87 123XXXX0 _ . .
VAL
BCALE ?1 WIT w-f 8HEE7
FIGURE 400-1. Example of CAGE Code, Drawing No., Design Activity

Relationship as originally specified
400-3
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
c. Blank spaces are not permitted.
d. Symbols such as: parenthesis ( ) , asterisks ●, virgule /, degree ,

plus +, minus -, shall not be used, except when referencing the Government or
non-government standardization document whose identification contains such a
symbol.
e. The CAGE Code, drawing format size letter, and drawing revision
letter (see paragraphs 503.2 and 602.3) are not considered part of the
drawing number or part number.
f. A system based on a significant numbering system or a sequentially

assigned non-significant numbering system designed to preclude duplication is
acceptable.
402.6 Part numbers. Part numbers shall not exceed 15 characters. This
number shall be or shall include the drawing number on which the item is
described. Where more than one item is described on a drawing, unique
identification shall be provided by the addition of a suffixed dash number,
with the following limitations: (For bulk materials see 402. 16.4).
a. The total length of the part number including the suffix shall not
exceed 15 characters.
b. Suffixed dash numbers (-1, -2, -3, etc. ) may be used on the following
type of drawings:
(1) Multi-detail, drawings.
(2) Tabulated detail drawings.
Detail
(3) assembly drawings.
$
(4) Tabulated assembly drawings.
(5)
Inseparable assembly drawings.
,,
c. Suff,ixed numbers shall not be used where
on a drawing.
only one item is described
..
d. Suffixed part numbers shall not be used for items previously
identified by their own drawing, Military Standard/Specification number, etc.
e. Suffixed part numbers shall not be used on ?!Separable Assembly

Drawings” where individual parts/subassemblies and Military Standards/
Specifications are identified by their respective part number.
f. Part numbers shall not Include the drawing revision, (See paragraph
402.5. e).
400-4
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
g. Items already identified by part number shall not be reidentified

with a dash suffix, If drawing is changed to incorporate additional items by
tabulation. The additional items shall be identified with a dash suffix.
h. Part number shall not be specified on documents that do not define an

item. Examples follow:
(1) Schematics (electrical/mechanical)
(2) Wiring diagrams
(3) Logic diagrams
(4) Interface drawings
(5) Camouflage drawings
(6) Installation drawings
(7) Elevation drawings
(8) Connection diagrams
(9) Printed Wiring Maater pattern drawing, etc.
NOTE: Contractor-manufacturer part and drawing numbering aysterns.

Contractors and manufacturers are encouraged to forward to the Commander
Defense Logistics Services Center, ATTN: DLSC-CTC, Federal Center, Battle
Creek, Michigan 49016, an explanation of their part and drawing numbering
aystema to be included in Cataloging Handbook H7, Manufacturers Part and
Drawing Numbering Systems for use in the Federal Cataloging System.
402.7 Records. A complete and accurate record of drawing numbers shall be

maintained by the activity allocating or aaaigning the numbers.
402.8 Associated lists. Associated lists and documents shall be assigned

the same identifying numbers (part numbers) as the assembly drawing to which
it pertaina. This identifier shall be prefixed by the letters “PL”, “QAPn,
‘PSn, etc.
402.9 Transferring design responsibility to another activity. When the 1

design reaponslbility for engineering drawinga ia transferred from one design
activity to another, the drawing number(s) and part numbeti) shall be
transferred to the new design activity for administration; The new assignee
shall add his CAGE Code on the drawing by revision action to identify change
in design responsibility. In no ease will the original drawing identity be
changed or relocated to indicate a new CAGE Code. In addition, the CAGE Code
of the original design activity specified in the item! identification marking
requirement shall not be ohanged. (See paragraph 108.1.1 ). The new design
activity shall be identified in a manner ahown in FIGURE 400-2.
402.9.1 Source contrcl drawing. When the

drawing engineering ia source
control, the name and address of activity
the cognizant design in the note
.%NLYTHG ITEM QESCRlaEO” “‘etc., shall also be revised to reflect the transfer
of design responsibility.
400-5
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
CURRINT DESIGN ACTIVITYCAGCCODE W200
ARU.”lMT RESC”
us. bnuv .
RCII,DIVILOP”CM ANDE. GI.lERINECCEICS
OCAII..1 &, SE.&L,IIEWIIMSC1071-. S000
.
o
cuMtti Vtii-gn ActiIJtiY
ldentiy and CAGE Cd~
PART NO. IZ3XXXXX — ‘
0ss,.” ACmvnv
U.S.ARMYTANK-AUTOMOTIVECOMMAND* -
WARREN,MICHIGAN
48397-5000
Ot-igi.nat Duig n Act.iwtiY

CAGE COL% P& No., and
VacuuingNo.
.
8’”;2~7 123XXXXX
FIGURE 400-2. Example of Drawing Notation when Design Responsibilit~

is Transferred
402.9.2 Maintaining design activities identities. When drawings are

redrawn, the original design act ivity CAGE Code, Drawing and Part numbers
shall be shown in their applicable locations as on the original
documentation. The current and original design activity identity shall be
as shown in FIGURE 4CI0-3a.
CURRENT DESIGN ACTIVITYCAGE CODE S9200

U,. ,,”.
AR”,SIII1
N5C,RCM, ”E”, ANUC“C,”[EWWC
DWC,O, CWIIS
PtC1ll#”V
,RS1”lL,
Ill.JCRS[,
O?, OS-SOOb
I Oabi,gnAtiui.ly
Zdtnti-tyand CAGE Coda
PART NO. 123XXXXX — ‘
DES00.●CIWOTV
U.S.ARMY TANK-AuIGMOTIVECOUM8ND * —
WAR REM,ISICI!lGAN
48397” /
+%
0
OtigZnat Utiign AtivtiY
M FSCM No., P& Mo., and
h Om.wing NO.
Y
. “=’1 l%; I 123XXXXX
I
1 1
SC.LE UNITWV ISHEET
FIGURE 400-3a. Example of Drawing Entries when Nedrawn after Design

Responsibility was Transferred,
400-6
o
—
402.9.3 Drawings with “00000” CAGE Code
CAGE Cede ( CODE IDENT) of ‘t
design activity drawing number shall
(CODE IDENT) .
be changed to reflect
Drawings
OOOOO” which is associated with the originai
having a
the current CAGE

Code of that original design activity. See FIGURES 400-sb and 400-3c.
r
1.40 lot? .62 .400 .f4 I.ffzs “
.,”.
CODE IDENT. NO.-

PAS? NO. SEE ‘7ff& r
S*CW!CO on,.,”., oar.
ORDNANCE CORPS
OIZFTOF TWg ASMY
.{ -- QUICK ,RELEASE, “a—~_
.-..0 “ -. I.N
FIGURE 400-3b . Example of ‘oOOOOn CAGE Code (CODE IDENI) prior to change
400-7
1.40 1.12 .62 .400 .14 1.125
\
.—
— .
I I I I
CURRENTDESIGNACTIVITY
CAGECODE19200
1“ @J@
US. ARMY
ARMAMENTRESEARCH.
DEVELOPMENT mmusmnw.ma CEN7EE
PIC&TINNV
ARSENAL.
NEW JERSEY07806.
S000
ORIGINAL CODE IDENT. NO.%XSfSf 19207 _
“-O-
RDNANCE CORPS
PIN,. DEPT OF THE ARMY
QUICK RELEASE OETR131TARSENAL
n“,.
FIGURE 400-30. Esample of change to the current CAGE tide of the

original design activit~
400-8
●
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
402.10 Item identification and part numbering. Each item*, e.g., detail
part, assembly, etc., shall be identified as follows:
a. An item* covered by an approved standard and used without alteration

or selection shall be identified by the standard part number (such as MS
number for Military Sheet form standards).
b. An item* covered by an approved government specification containing a

part identification system and used without alteration shall be identified by
that specification part identification.
c. All other items* shall be Identified by a part number and CAGE Code
on a drawing, except for a deviation granted to construction drawings in
paragraph 402.11. (See Note 1.)
d. Government Design Activities* using items other than their design

without alteration or selection shall identify such items by the other
Government Design Activity part number and CAGE Code.
Items* referenced above which are altered or selected shall be

iden~~f ied by a part number established (see pargraph 402.14, Condition 4) by
the using design activity drawing which depicts requirements for such
alteration or selection. The using design activity drawing shall also
contain the original item identification part number which was applicable
prior to the alteration or selection. (See paragraphs 201.4.4 and 201.4.5).
NOTE 1: Specification control drawing numbers (with any applicable dash

numbers, if tabulated) is the part number. The part number shall be used to
physically identify the part without obliterating the original vendor(a) Part
number. (See paragraphs 201.4.2 and 402. 10. d).
NOTE 2: Source control drawing numbers are part identification numbers. When
more than one vendor is listed on a source control drawing for items that are
repairable and the repair parts are identified and not interchangeable
between the vendors, each vendor’s item shall be assigned a daah number of
the source control drawing number.
402. 10.1 Re-identification. When items are identified by more than

fifteen characters or do not meet the other requirements of paragraphs 402.5
and 402.6 and a design activity has no control over this assignment, it may
assign a design activity control number to the item in order to meet the
identification requirements of paragraphs 402.5 and 402.6.
400-9
402.11 Identification on drawings. Items* shall be identified on the

field of the drawing either by showing the identifying part numbers
(paragraph 402. 10) or find numbers (paragraph 401.6) cros.%ref erenced to the
identifying part numbers appearing on an integral parta list except that on a
monodetail drawing the item need not be identified on the field of the
drawing. When several items* are detailed on a single drawing, such as
tabulated, multi-detail, detail assembly or installation drawing, (paragraphs
201.2.2, 201. Z.3, 201.3.1 and 201.5) each item shall be assigned a separate
identification in accordance with paragraph 402.6. The complete part number
shall be shown on drawings and lists. On construction drawings (paragraph
201. 8) each item shall be identified to permit construction as designed. The
identification need not include an identifying part number or a find number
aa specified herein unless stock storage and issue is intended.
a. Part/Assembly Identification. The format identification on assembly

and installation drawings shall be Quantity, dash, Nomenclature, dash, CAGE
Code (if applicable) and Part Number. Parts shall be identified on the field
of the drawing as follows:
(1) Quantity When quantity is one, no entry shall be made. For

bulk mater ial~~ “~ REQuIRED” is acceptable. ( See paragraph
402.16.4).
(2) Nomenclature. The nomenclature shall be abbreviated to the

basic noun or basic noun phrase of title exactly as shown on its own drawing.
It shall not be shown in plural form unless the item drawing title is such.
i.e. “2-SPRING-7265329” shall not be sPeCif ied as

“2- SPRINGS-7265329”
and \’
“BOOTS -M!33109-,133° shall not be specified aa
uBOOT -MS3109-03”’
(3) CAGE Code. If applicable, in accordance with paragraph 402.12.
400-10
●
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
(4) Part Number. The complete part number shall be entered aa it

appears on its drawing (Including dash suffix). The part number shall not
contain the drawing siZe or revi9i0n level.
“SPRING- 7267035”
EXAMPLES: “2 -PIN -505509”

(5H0WN ON DRAWING 1234xxx I)
“GEAR ASS Y- 12206391 -I”
‘BRACKET- 19200 -997 XXXX”
“PIN-MS17985-408”
b. Items completely defined in a Specification (other than Bulk

Material). When an item has all its physical and functional characteristics
completely defined in a specification, identification shall be in accordance
with the following:
(1) When a specification has a part identification numbering system,

that number, if within 15 characters, shall be used as the Part number. l’he
specification (Detail specification, if applicable) shall be specified in the
general notea.
EXAMPLES:’@ IN ACCORDANCE WITH MI L- R-10509’J(In general notes)
‘6-RESISTOR- RN60C2432F @“ (In field of drawing)
‘@ IN ACCORDANCE WITH MIL-S-19500/260’ (In general notes)

“Q
\ ~tj-sEMICONDUCTOR- JAN lN1202 @. (In field of drawing)
400-11
(2) When a specification does not have a part identification

numbering system, the specification with all necessary data, i.e., form,
. . .. .
graae, class, type etc. , shall Be Speclfiea in the general notes.
~MMpLES: *@lNACCOROANCE W,7HWW-C-440. 7YPEI,6RAOE B. SIZE t/2{*

(In general nates)
W3- CLAMPS @n (In field of drawing)
If the descriptive requirements are lengthy and result in a number exceeding

15 characters, a detail drawing shall be prepared to define the specification
item and establish an identification number for the item. For example, when
SPEC V-F-106 for Interlocking Slide Fasteners applies, data necessary to
define the item could consist of as many as 32 different requirements;
therefore, preparation of a separate detail drawing would be required.
402. 11.1 Specification control and source control drawings. When

specification control or source control drawinga are used (paragraphs 201.4.2
and 201. U. 3), and it is necessary to refer to the articlea depicted thereon
on the next assembly or other applicable drawing or list, reference shall be
made by specification or source control government part number on face of
drawing and in the part or identifying number column of the assembly parts
liets.
,402. 11.2 Parenthetical identifier. Parenthetical in-house identifying

numbers shall not be used. The Assembly and
individual parts shown on Detail
Inseparable Assembly drawings shall be identified by the part number followed
by a dash number beginning with “-l“, unless the part is a tabulated part;
then the succeeding dash number will be used. See FIGURE 200-9.
402.12 CAGE. Code and part numbering.
a. Part numbers identifying items or assembly drawings shall be preceded

by the CAGE Code when the following occur: (’fhis applies to callouta in the
field of the drawing as well as callouts in the general notes. )
(1) When the original CAGE code for the item Identified (callout) is
not common to the original CAGE Code of the containing assembly drawing.
EXAMPLE: A part number issued by 19200 and called out on Original design
activity Of lg207 wOuld be ~RACKET-19200 -997XXXx”. ‘
(2) Part number callouts for SAE and GM standard hardware (if
authorized by the C.overnment Design Activity) require the respective CAGE
Cade to precede the part number callout unless a condition cited in paragraph
402. 12b(l) applies.
b. Part numbers identifying items on assembly drawings shall not be

preceded by the CAGE Cade when the following applies:
(1) When the part 1s a standard or specification item, and the

documentation is listed in the Department
of Defense Index of Specifications
and Standards (DODISS), or in a recognized non-government standardization
document.
400-12
I
(2) Also when the original CAGE Code for the item identified
(callout) is common to the original CAGE Code of the containing asaembly
drawing. See FIGURE A-10 in APPENDIX A.
@
402.13 Numberhrg of related Parts. Numbers to identify special relation-
ships between parts shall be asaigned aa follows:
402.13.1 Matched part designation. Parts which must be mated and for
which replacement aa a matched set or pair is essential, shall be assigned a
single number to designate each matched set or pair. Component parts
detailed on matched set drawings, in lieu of separate detail drawings, shall
be identified in accordance with paragraph 402.11. For serialized number
application to the item, see paragraph 108.1.2.
402. 13.2 Symmetrically opposite parts*. Symmetrically opposite parta, if

not described by separate drawings, shall be described by separate
individual views and identified by the dash number system. Do not spectfy
9~WN” and “oPPOSITE”.
402.13.3 Inseparable assembly. Nhen two or more pieces are permanently

faatened together by welding, riveting, brazing, cementing, bonding, etc., to
form an ‘inseparable assembly, the assembly shall be assigned an identifying
number. The individual pieces shall be assigned part numbers as described
in paragraph 402.10 or daah number system in paragraph 402.11.
402.14 Change requiring new identification. Items shall be assigned new

design activity numbers different fromthe original identifying numbers under
●
the following conditions:
a. A new drawing number or part number as described in paragraph 402.10

shall be asaigned when a part of assembly is changed in such manner that any
of the following conditions occur:
.? Condition 1. Performance or durability is affected to such an extent

that superseded items must be discarded for reasons of safety or
malfunctioning.
Condition 2. Parts, subassemblies, or complete articles are changed to

such an extent that the superseded and superseding items are not functionally
or physically interchangeable.
Condition 3. When superseded parts are limited to use in specific

articles or models of articles and-the superseding parts are not so limited
to use.
Condition U. When an item has been altered or selected (see paragraphs

201.4.4 and 201.4.5).
Condition 5. When interchangeable* repairable* assemblies contain a

non-interchangeable part, its next assembly, and all the progressively
higher assemblies shall be changed up to and including the aasembly where
interchangeability ia reestablished.
● b.
computer
When an item*
corresponding change
program,
is changed in such a way that
to an operational,.
the part
self-teat
number identification
necessitates
or maintenance
of the item and
a
teat
ita neXt
assembly and all progressively higher assemblies shall be changed up to and
Including the assembly where computer programs are affected.
400-13
DOD-STD-0010OD(AR)
402.15 Changea not requiring new identification. When a part* or assembly

is changed in such a manner that conditions of paragraph 402.14 do not occur,
the part number shall not be changed. Under no condition shall the number be
changed only because a new application is found for an existing part. When
an item* has been furnished to the Government, the applicable part number
shall not be changed unless conditions in paragraph 402.14 apply. However,
when a design activity desires to create a tabulated listing or a standard
because of a multiple application of an item, the forementioned need not
apply. The superseded drawing shall identify the document which superseded
it. The superseding document shall identify the part numbers the items
replaced.
402.16 Identification of materials, processes and protective treatment.

Materials, processes and protective treatment necessary to meet the design
requirements of an item shall be identified on the drawing or parts list-by
reference to applicable specifications or standards. The applicable type,
grade, class, condition, etc., shall be indicated. Revision or amendment
symbol of the specification or standard shall not be shown. Additional
reference to other equivalent specifications is permitted.
402. 16.1 Group identification. Where necessary identification involves

several different specifications or standards, these specifications and
standards may be grouped into a single document which shall be referenced on
the applicable drawings or lists of parts by the single document
identification. This document shall be part of the set of drawings. Where
several processes or protective treatments are involved and sequence ia
necessary to meet design requirements, they shall be shown in the order of
sequence and be so noted. A single document prepared to group together
several specifications and standards shall not be used to circumvent the
requirement to prepare a specification. (See paragraph 201.9.1. )
402. 16.2 Other identification. When parts, materials, processes and

protective treatments are used which cannot be identified adequately in
accordance with paragraph 402.16, a separate drawing or specification (if
applicable) shall be prepared. The document/part number shall be specified
on applicable drawings.
402. 16.s ●Formulation identification. Formulation (Chemical constituents

of explosives, propellants, pyrotechnics, fillers, etc. ) shall be considered
and treated as a part and identified in accordance with paragraph 402.6 (part
numbering) or 402.10a and 403.10b (specification or standards
identifications) .
402. 16.4 Bulk materials* identification. Bulk materials* shall be

identified by a discrete identifier in accordance with paragraph 402.10 or
402.16. Where practicable, the quantity or measurement of material shall be
included. Separate engineering drawings shall not be prepared for specific
quantities of bulk materials, unless the conditions specified in paragraph
402.16.4a(2)(c) or 402.16.4a(3), (4) Or (5) apply. .
a. Bulk materials shall be identified on assembly/installation drawings

in accordance with the following:
●
400-14
(1) Bulk materials which support a process such as paint, solder,

weld rod and adhesives shall be identified in the general note area of the
drawing, by specifying all information necessary to completely define the
required material (form, grade, class, type, etc. , and specification number).
EXAMPLE: (In general notes)
“@ IN ACCORDANCE WITH MIL-A-470,4, TYPE,, CLASS ~;’
(In field of drawing)
“AR -ADHESIVE @“
(2) Bulk materials which have a finite shape such as wire, tubing,
cable, chain, tape and hose shall be identified as a component of the
assembly/installation as follows:
(a) If the specification defining the material contains an

identification numbering system, such a number shall be used for
identification along with the specification number.
@ IN ACCORDANCE WITH WIRE- MIL-W-16B7&9
“wIRE-M16878/lB FE94 LENGTH-AR@
(b) If the specification defining the material does not contain

an identification numbering system, the material shall be identified by
specifying all information necessary to completely define the required
material .’l
“TAPE –LENGTH 12,25 @u
(c) When required to support provisioning requirements, a

discrete part number consisting of the drawing number and a dash number may
be assigned to identify each size, length and/or quantity of bulk material
used in an assembly/installation. Preparation of a separate drawing
is preferred.
When practicable, the quantity of the material shall be

included with(~~e identification. The abbreviation “AR” (for “as required” )
is acceptable.
400-15
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
(e) The fifteen character limitation for part numbers imposed

in paragraph 402.6 does not apply for bulk material.
(.3) Separate drawinga shall not be prepared for bulk materials

“covered by specifications or standards except when required to support
provisioning/maintenance requirements, e.g. , Package Contents/Kit Drawings.
(4)If an item made from bulk material to a specific size has been
designated in the provisioning process for separate atockage, then a separate
“detail drawing is required.
(5) If a bulk material requires a NSN for provision and doea not
have a discrete part, numbering system, a drawing may be required, such as for
chain and attached links and hooks.
402. 16.5 Identification of precious metals.
a. Precious metals (gold, silver, platinum, palladium, rhodium,

‘ruthenium, osmium and iridium) shall be identified on the engineering drawing
according to type of precious metal and amount in grams.
b. Precious metal identification shall be shown on component and part

drawings. Repeat or summarization on assembly drawings is not required.
However, for assemblies with parts containing precious metal(s), entrY in the
PMIC block of the assembly drawing shall be in accordance with Note 4,
FIGURE 400-4.
c. The type and amount shall be specified by use of the Precious Metal
Indicator Code (PMIc) , shown on FIGURE 400-4.
d. The identification of the precious metal location on the item is not

required.
e. Precious metal identification shall be shown in applicable block (in

title block) citing the PMIC and weight in grams (rounded off to the nearest
whole number) . See FIGURE A-1 in APPENDIX A.
f. The drawing notation for a part containing 6. 8g of silver shall be:

mE, 7 GRAMS71
.
g. If the com~nent part or assembly does not have precious metals,

enter code ‘1A8Vin the PMIC block.
h. If PMIC iS not applicable, i.e. , installation drawings, interface

control, schematic diagrams, non-item, etc. , then enter l*NA*t(for not
applicable) in the PMIC block.
400-16
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
mm,
,.”.
T...
. ., .
“. .D..,,l, ,. “Cm”,
. . , ,,,. ...”. ,,.. .,,
, . . ... . . . . . . ,,.
.“,, , .,,, . ..”.
:D Cmwnent Orawing(s)specifiestype Owonent Drawing(s)

specifiesaontent
1A PnICis not applicable to drauing NotApplicable
A No known Precious Metal None
B Item is knohn to containRec%ousIPetal(s) khilnoml
but the amxmt(s) are unknoum
c The presenceor absenceof Recious Hetals
variesbetweenitems of produatlonfor same
item of supply
D’ S1lver Equals 15 grams or more
E Silver USE than 15 gr=s
F Gold Equals 10 grsm or more
G Gold baa than 10 gr%n
H Platinum 1 Equals 10 gr=s or more
I Platinum Less than 10 grsoa
J Palladium Equals 5 grams or mwe
K Palladium Less than 5 grcas
L Iridium Equals~ gramsor mare
II Iridium —see Note 1 Isa thanSO grams
N Shodium Equals15 gramsor more
o P$lodfum Lessthan 15 grsos
P Osmium Equals10 gramsor mbre
Q Osmium Lessthan 10 grins
R Suthenium Equals10 gramsor mm-e
s Suthenium bss than 10 grma
T 4
Silver-co Combinationequals15 gram
or ❑ ore
u Silver-cold Combinationoontainsless
than 15 grams
v Silver-PlatinaFamily Combinationequals15 gr~s
or more
w Silver-Platlnuo
F&mily I
Combinationcontainsleas
than 15 grams
x’ Silver-Gold.Platinun
Family See Note 1 Combinationequala 15 grma
t- or more
T Silver-Cold-Platin!m
Fanily Combinationcontainsless
than 15 grams
z Gold-PletinunFsmily Combinationequals 10 gram
or ❑ ore
2 @ld.PlatinunFamily I Combinationcontainsless
1 than 10 grins
3 Determination
of PreciousMetal content
FIGURE 400-4. Precious Metals Indicator Code
NOTES: 1. Platinum Family includes platinum, Palladium, Iridium, Rhodti, Osmium,

and Ruthenium.
2. When the type of precious metal is known but the content value is unknown, uae
the ‘tLess than 10 gramstt code for that metal (i.e., for Gold, use Code nGw; for
Silver, use Code “E*V,etc.)
3. When the ~ and amount of precious metal 1s unknown, use Code

IIBll .
4. For Assembly drawings with components containing precious metal,

use CD for PMIC.
400-17
402. 16.6 Nuclear hardness critical items and processes.
402. 16.6.1 Items. Where survivability considerations are applied and

nuclear Hardness Critical Items (HCI) are identified, all applicable drawings
shall identify individual HCIS on the drawing, and on the parts list (see
●
paragraph 603.2. 17). Nuclear Hardness Critical Items are any items at any
assembly level which are mission critical and could be designed, repaired,
manufactured, installed or maintained for normal operation and yet degrade
system survivability in a nuclear environment if hardness were not
considered. Not only the top assembly for item(s) containing nuclear
hardness critical components but subassemblies, detail drawings, schematics
and wiring diagrams shall include the nuclear hardness critical note. In
addition, the applicable Radiation Hardness Assurance (RHA) level shall be
specified by a designator shown in FIGURE 400-5.
RHA Level Designator Radiation and total dose Level Neutron fluence
(Rad <Si>) (n/cm~ )
M 3000 2X10’4
D ,04 2X1O’A
R ,OJ ,.l;
H ,04 ,.l;
- ●
FIGURE 400-5. Radiation Hardneaa Assurance (SEA) Level $
402.16.6.2 Processes. Nuclear Hardness Critical Processes (HCPS) shall

also be identified on the drawing and drawing notes as applicable. HCPS are
processes, specifications, and procedures which are hardness critical, and
which, if changed, could degrade nuclear hardness.
402.16.6.3 Marking. HCIS shall be identified on the drawing by the symbol

plus the RHA level designator. HCPS shall be identified with its symbol plus
the RHA level designator. Identifiers shall be shown on the drawing adjacent
to the feature/note in a box as defined below.
~~-=p88
,31 HCI- R
r .19
HCP-M
=s!- RHA LCVtiDs4ignatoa
●
~oO_18 (FIGuRE400-51
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
NOTE: Drawings that depict HCIS or HCPS shall also have the following note
shown on the face of the drawing. The pertinent identifier, Hardness
Critical Item (HCI) or Hardness Critical Process (HCP) or both shall be
o indicated if applicable.
“THIS ORAWING DEPICTS HARDNESS CRITICAL ITEMS (I+CI)AND or) HARDNESS

CRITICAL PROCESSES (HCP). ALL CHANGES TO OR PROPOSEO SU \ ST IT UTIONS OF HCIS
AND(or) HCPS MUST BE EvALUATEO FOR HARONESS IMPACTS BY THE ENGINEERING
ACTIVITY RESPONSIBLE FOR SURVIVABILITY.”
402. 16.7 Critical Safety Items*. Each critical safety item and critical
assembly process shall be clearly identified as such on the engineering part
drawing or assembly drawing. The engineering drawing shall alao clearly
identify all critical characteristics* of that item.
402. 16.7.1 Critical Safety Item Drawing. The drawing for a Critical
Safety Item (CSI) shall have the following legend above the title block:
● J-
L
.50 CRITICAL SAFETY ITEM
> d 4.50
402. 16.7.1.1 The following note shall be in the general notes:
*
CRITICAL SAFETY CHARACTERISTICS ARE INDICATEO wITH THE SYMBOL m“
a, The CSI symbol shall be adjacent to each critical dimension,

tolerance, process note or other critical requirements. A leader line may be
used to show a specific location. The CSI symbol shall be aa shown below:
J- .19
‘I-.4
.!)0
qT
Csl
1- .93
400-19
b. Method of Identifying Critical Safety Items on drawings when a leader

line is used shall be as shown:
The symbol may read left to right, up or down.
c. If the critical safety characteristic is a note, the symbol shall be

placed at the end of the note as ahown:
“s HEAT TREAT IN ACCORDANCE

....
a “
The critical safety item legend and symbol may be a decal, stencil or rubber
stamp.
d. For A and B size drawings, the symbol may be typed as shown:
.4- .10
.31
rl
‘
=F
Csl
++.33
1
402.16.7.2 Critical Safety Item Assembly. If on an assembly drawing the

process or method of asaembly is critical, the same rules apply aa for a
drawing of a critical safety item.
400-20
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
402. 16.8 Sensitive electronic devices (SED). Oetall, assemblies,

equipment/equipment enclosures, kit, installation and package content
drawings for electrical and electronic parts classified in accordance with”
o DOD-STD-1686 and DOD-HDBK-263 as sensitive to damage from electrostatic
discharge shall be annotated as follows:
a. The following symbol and note shall be placed adjacent to the title
block .
%F’i)#
i
(J
/preferred
CAUTION
ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE
SSNSITIVE
FIGURE 400-6. Sensitive electronic devices (SS0) symbol
/’$ +F2-2- Permissible
\“ V II
CAU’TION
ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE SENSITIVE
-.
FIGURE 400-6a. Alternative Sensitive electronic devices (SED) s~bol
400-21
DOD-STD-00100D(AR)
b. Protective handling procedures shall be specified in the general

notes using the applicable version of the following note:
(1) When Class 1 or 2 applies:
*ELECTROSTATIC ‘DISCHARGE CONTROL PROGRAM

FOR PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC
PARTS,ASSEMBLIES AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE IN
ACCORDANCE WITH DOD-STO-16B6 CLASS—
AND DoD-HDBK-263.*
SPECIFYCLASS 1 OR 2 -/
WHICHEVER1S APPLICABLE
(2) When Class 3 applies:
%LECTROSTATIC DIscHARGE CONTROL I=ROGRAM

FOR PROTECTION OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC
PARTS,ASSEMBLIES AND EQUIPMENT SHALL BE IN
;;;;;D~,$E WITH DOD-STD-1686 AND DOD-HDBK-263,
400-22
402.17 Original date. The method for specifying the date On a drawing
shall be numerical - year, month, day (e.g., 75-10-15). The method of
specifying numerals less than ten shall include zero, e.g. . ‘IO1‘i.
402.18 Order of precedence of specifications and standards. Where

identical items are identified by more than one document, the document to be
utilized shall be selected in accordance with the order of precedence
specified in MIL-STD-143. Selection shall be limited to the groups listed in
APPENDIX I.
402.19 Interface Control Identification Symbol. Features which are

identified for interface control shall be flagged with the symbol shown
below. Interface flagging shall be only as directed by the Government Design
Activity. The approximate size of the symbol shall be as shown:
402. 19.1 Location of symbol. The symbol shall be placed adjacent to the
requirement if in note form and under the dimension for the feature as shown
in the following example:
dam
,\
3x L85+. C6 “
IN
D
a. Nhen interface dimensions are tabulated, the table shall include a

column for entry of interface s~bols next to appropriate dimensions.
b. On drawings containing interface dimensions, the following note shall

be in the general notes:
B
IN = INTERFACE
I
DIMENSION*
400-23
402.20 Item replacement notation.
402.20.1 Interchangeable items. When an item is replaced by another

existing or new item, which is physically and functionally interchangeable., .:
the note “FOR NEW DESIGN WORK ANO PROCUREMENT, USE Port/hfSA5@cifimtti
NUMBER”, shall be aPplied over the title. block of the drawinK for the
replaced item, as shown in FIGURE 400-7. The new item will replace the old
in all present and future applications. The addition of the note constitutes
a change; therefore, an applicable entry in the revision block in accordance
with Chapter 500 is required.
( 43==== PROCUREMENT USE PART NQ1234xxx
FIGURE 400-7. Example of Interchangeable Parts Hotation
400-24
402.20.2 Non-Interchangeable items. When an item is to be replaced by

another existing or new item which provides a design improvement but is not
interchangeable, the note ‘FOR NEW DESIGN WORK USE Fort/hfSX5jWCI?ti%tkW
@ NUMBER”, shall be applied over the title block of the drawing for the
replaced item as shown in FIGURE 400-8. The new item will replace the old
item only in new design work. The old item will continue to be used in all
its applications. The addition of the note constitutes a change; therefore,
an applicable entry in the revision block in accordance with Chapter 500 is
required.
FIGURE 400+ Esample of Uon-Interchangeable Parts Eotation
400-25
402.20.3 Obsoleted items. When an item is no longer used and not replaced
by another item, the word “OBSOLETE” shall be added to its drawing over the
title block as shown in FIGURE 400-9. ,, When a drawing consists of
multi-sheet and/or book-form the ‘“OBSOLETE” cloud shall be added to all
sheets. The addition of the word constitutes a change; therefore, an
applicable entrY in the revision block in accordance with Chapter 500 is
required.
-.
PAFiT NO.
. . Mlmw
0 OBSOLE’TE
-
&
.“waln-. . elm.
.. . l..
FIGURE 400-9. Example of Obsolete Notation
400-26
●
402.20.U Superseded items. When an item is replaced by another item

(different number) or when a drawing is redrawn (same number), the word
● “SUPERSEDED. shall
‘in FIGURE 400-10.
Chapter 500.
be added
Revision
to the old drawing
block entries shall
over the title
be in accordance
block
with
as shown
PART NO.
—. [OwllMmm I
h—— t ————— l
..,,— A
P.nm -.
..U pml.
I I- I
FIGURE 4OD-10. Example of Superseded Wotation
400-27
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
402.20.5 Notation size and location. Notations cited in paragraph
●
402.20.1, 402.20.2, 402.20.3, and 402.20.4 shall be stamped or printed in
characters not less than 1/4 inch high, as near to the title block as
possible, preferably just above the title block. The notation shall be
encircled with a wavy line or cloud.
402.21 Ordnance Engineering Standards (TAXI). Parts described by Ordnance

Engineering Standards drawings shall not be used for new design. Equivalent
Military Standard or Specification shall be specified. If none exist, an
applicable product drawing shall be prepared.
402.22 Identifying optional parts. Optional parts/assemblies shall be

identified on assemblies/installation drawings as indicated.
i-
61
u ‘2- TERMINAL- 127 XXX
2- TERMINAL- 12EXXXX2T OpT’ONAL
402.23 Distribution Statement. A Distribution Statement shall be specified

in the location on the drawing in accordance with APPENDIX H. The
distribution statement to be specified shall be as provided by the Government
Design Activity.
400-28
DODATD-00 10OD ( AR)
@
402.24 Duplicate original. When’ a drawing is replaced by the duplicate
original process (same number), the words “DUPLICATE ORIGINAL” shall be added
to the drawing in the lower right hand border as show in FIGuRE” 400-11. “he
addition of the words constitutes a change; therefore, an applicable entry in
the revision block in accordance with Chapter 500 is required.
2 I REVIS1ONS
1
0,s..8.,0.” pm ..*I —
REPLATIO WITHOUT CHAN
-vu
Dn.w!n. — 812E CaQccu
DUPLICATE ORIGINAL
FIGURE 400-11. Example of Duplicate Original notation
400-29
LX)D-STD-DO1OOD(M)
THIS PAGE IZF1’BLANK INTENTIONALLY ●
●
400-30
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
CNAPTER 500
REVISION OF ENGINEERING DRAWINGS
500 General. This chapter covers methods for revising engineering

drawings and for identifying and recording revisions on original drawings.
502 Revision methods. Revisions* shall be made by erasure, addition of

information or by redrawing.
502.1 Change in dimensions. In general , any change in a dimension of a

part should also be made to scale on the affected portion of the delineation;
however, it is permissible to leave the delineation unchanged when the new
proportion of the part is not noticeably different from the original one. If
change to scale is not made, the practice outlined in ANSI Y14.5M-1982 shall
be followed. If the drawing is redrawn, delineation shall be made to scale.
502.2 Crossing out. Crossing out method of revision shall not be used.
502.3 Drawing practices. When revising an existing engineering drawing,

the graphic symbols, designationa, lettering style and size, material (lead/
Ink) and method of application and drawing practices ( line width etc. ) used
in creating the original drawing format shall be followed for any changes
unless otherwise directed by the Government Design Activity. When a drawing
is being revised and does not reference the dimensioning and tolerancing
standard, a determination of the applicable standard shall be made using the
matrix depicted in FIGURE C-1 and the proper standard, or reference to that
drawing (12579607), be specified in the general notes.
503 Identifying revisions on drawinga.
503.1 Identifying revision locations. The location of revisions on the

drawing shall be identified by one of the following methods as directed by
the Government Design Activity in accordance with APPENDIX E.
a. Description in the revision block.
b. Zone In the zone column within the revision block.
c. Revision authorization document referenced in the description block.
d. Combination of a, b, and c above when required for clarity.
503.2 Revision letters. Upper case letters shall be used in alphabetical

sequence. The letters “ 1’9, “On, ‘Qvf, *lSW, and ‘tZ” shall not be used. Nhen
revisions are numerous enough to exhaust the alphabet, the revision following
WYV shall be *AAt~, and the next I$ABI*, then ‘*ACn, etc. Should ‘tAAn to *lAY” be
exhausted, the next sequence shall be l*BAII, ‘l BB’l, etc. Revision letters
shall not exceed two characters. The letter “X” shall only be used in
accordance with methods described in APPENDIX E.
503.3 Multiple Changes. All changea to a drawing incorporated at one time

shall be identified by the same revision letter.
500-1
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR )
503. U Additions. When a multi-sheet drawing is revised to add a new

sheet(s)”, ,the following note, “THIS SHEET ADDED*, shall be placed in the
description block of the new sheet(s), in addition to other notationa. See
FIGURE 500-1.
REVlalONa
\ ZM L~ DESCRIPTION DAIE ~4ba0u AWaeWe
~ THIS SHEET ADDED
NOR W6A2235 76-01-16 76-03-18 —
,:
FIGURE 500-1. Example of Revision Block Wotation for Multi-sheet Drauin~

,,
503.5 Change in righta

technicalto data. When the righta to a drawing
change due to an engineering revision to the drawing, the right shall ba ao
indicated in the description column of the revision block with the contract
number under which the change was approved. See FIGURE 500-2.
NOTE: Reference to. only a revision authorization document is not be

acceptable in this case.
REvlaloNa
Z* Lm DE8CW710N. Mm (maw ~
A NOR W5A2678 76-01-18 76-05-24 .

‘B NOR W6A2317 76-12-21 76-12-30 —
PROPRIETARY. RIGHTS EXPIREO
c CONTRACT NO. DAA— ----
NOR W7A2456 77-08-05 77-10-13 ‘—
FIGURE 500-2. Example of Revision Block Motation for Changes in

Drawing Righta
500-2
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
503.6 Required revisions. Prior to Cwernment acceptance of ‘configuration

management authority, changes to drawings and associated lists shall be
recorded as a revision only as directed by the Government Design Activity.
All subsequent changes to any aspect of the documents shall be recorded aa a
revision.
504 Recording revisions on drawings.
504.1 Revision block. The revision block format shal,l,co,nform to

requirements specified in APPENDIX A. To provide for future revisions, all
of the space beneath the revision block on B size shall be left clear. On C
size and larger, a minimum of 3.5 inches of clear space shall be provided,
under the revision block.
504. 1.1 Letter. The identifying letter pertaining to the particular

-?.
revision being recorded shall be entered in the LTR column.
504. 1.2 Description. Changes shall be described in accordance with

APPENDIX E by method(s) as directed by the Government Design Activity.
504. 1.3 Approval. Approval of the revision shall be. indicated by

signature of the authorized Government Design Activity representative entered
in the APPROVED column with the associated date entered in the DATE column.
See APPENDIX G for signature requirements for manual and CAD generated
revisions.
a. CAD prepared drawings shall be signed for each revision. Subsequent

generations may show printed signature(s) for those who initially signed the
previous revision(s).
b. For microfilms generated directly from the computer without an

original drawing (prior Government Design Activity approval is required), the
signature and date shall be applied to the back of a master silver microfilm
aperture card in a block duplicating that of the drawing format. See FIGURE
100-12. Subsequent generations may show printed signature(s) of those who
initially signed the previous revision(s).
504. 1.4 Zoning. When changes are recorded by zoning, the zone in which
each chanze is made shall be entered in the ZONE column on the same line as
the description of change.
504.1.5 Revision date. The date sequence shown in the revision block
shall be the same as specified in 119.2, ” YR-MO-DA.
504. 1.6 Separating revisions. Each revision shall be separated by a

horizontal line drawn between each separate action.
500-3
DOD-STD-OOIDOD(AR)
505 Revision of Multi-sheet and book-form drawings.
505.1 Procedure.
a. Concurrent changes made upon any or all sheets of a multiple-sheet or

book-form drawing shall be identified on each sheet so revised by the same
revision letter. Each’ revision affecting any or all sheets shall be
identified on the revision record sheet or status of sheets block on sheet 1.
See FIGURE 500-3.
b. The revision status of each sheet comprised in the group shall be

indicated on Sheet 1 in revision status block. For all sheets that have
never been revised, a dash shall be entered in appropriate box.
c. A revision to any sheet requires a rise in the revision level of that

sheet.
d. An entry in the revision status summary requires that the revision

level of Sheet 1 also be raised. Sheet 1 is revised whenever any sheet is
revised; therefore, the revision of Sheet 1 represents the revision level of
the entire docunent.
e. Unchanged sheets retain the revision levels which are carried forward
on the revision status summary. Only one line of revision symbols shall be
utilized in the revision status block. See FIGURE 500-4.
f. No sheet may contain a revision level higher than that shown for
Sheet 1. Concurrent changes to any or all sheets shall be identified by. the
same revision letter. See FIGURE 500-3.
505.2 Adding sheets to multi-sheet and book-form drawings. Added sheets

constitute a change to the drawing and shall be entered at the revision level
next in sequence for sheet 1. This revision shall be entered both on the
added sheet and on the revision status summary. Additional sheets inserted
between existing sheets require renumbering of all subsequent sheeta. The
action shall be explained on the Notice of Revision, e.g. , ‘IADDED NEW SHEET
5, SHEETS PREVIOUSLY NUMBERED5 THROUGH 13, RENUMBERED6 THROUGH 14.0 When
all sheeta of an existing multi-sheet drawing contain the same original date,
added sheets shall be assigned an original date identical to that shown on
the existing sheets. When all sheets of an existing multi-sheet drawing do
not contain the same original date , added sheets shall be assigned the date
of the revision when they were added as their original date. When one or
more sheets are added to an existing (single sheet) drawing, added sheet(s)
shall be assigned an original date identical to that shown on the existing
sheet.
SOS. 3 Deleting sheets from multi-sheet and book-form drawings. When sheets
are deleted, the remaining sheets shall be renumbered to retain the
sequential order. The revision of sheet 1 shall be raised, and the revision
status summary shall indicate that the deletion(s) occurred at the end of the
order. .The action shall be explained on the Notice of Revision, e.g. ,
,lsH~&~~> AND 6 DELETED, SHEETS previously N(JMBERED~ THROUGH 14, RENUMBERED
5 .3’t+ROUGH12N. When sheets are deleted. the word ‘IOBSOLETEW shall be added
to the sheet over the title block as ehown in FIGURE 400-13. The addition of
the word !IOBSOLETE!I constitutes a change: therefore, an applicable entry in
the revision block is required.
:*:..’-
- 500-4
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
I . .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. . . I I I 1 I I
,.. , t , ,
,...,,, S,,*,S 2 Am ,
?0
..,,, s,,,, ,
.Olzt S,,,, , s,.,” ., * c a s
.,- ,,,,,,m
1 1 1 1 1
cum,, ?0,,,”,z Uo , 08$
cm,,, ,, ‘,,,,?i x An ,.
en,,,,,u, ,x.,s,,,,,, *, , - ●
,,.,,,,. ,,.,, 0. ., ,,,
S**,*&liml -
3
I,,,,,,, UWAS, I I 1-1 -1-1
n., e, mu,,, ,. C+comu,, ,.s 1s4 Sss 912 S*1
‘,
FIGURE 500-3. Typical change and effeet on revision,status block and

revision status of drawing sheets (1 through 5)
,t.,t.-
,.
Example only, not to appear on the drawing
D ~~~
-.”
-. —...-
.—
,,
.,, ,
.“. . . -, 94,
.. .1”!. .!A!La m ,
.-
-, .
m—.
—“----
””,-,.
FIGURE 500-4. Revision status to existing”drawings “’
500-5
DOD-STD-00100D(AR)
505.4 Computer generated/revised drawings. In the case of computer

generated/revised book-form drawings, all sheets shall be Identified by the
same revision letter without regard to the specific sheet(s) to which the
revision applies.
506 Redrawn or replaced drawings.
a. Redrawn with same number.
(1) Superseding (new) drawing. me ~rigin51 date of the old

drawing shall apply for the new drawing.
The revision block of the new
drawing shall contain notation as shown in FIGURE 500-5. Changes shall be
\ described in accordance with APPENDIX E by method(s) as directed by the
Government Design Activity.
All previous revision symbols, cross-outs and
revision notations shall be omitted from the superseding drawing.
,.
G ,-
Enz&damiption o{ change oe medtience
to the change authorization docmnenZ.
See Appendix E.
REVISIONS
C+4ElLlR DE8CRIP11ON / 4TE rmmou
REDRAWN WITH CHANGEj <
k
——. . -. ___ _
)
4’
oa id appfkzbte, enta notion
REDRAWN
————
WITHOUT
__
CHANGE,
____
7
~
EntwLILe@.w; to the aehaw autho.tizti document
.
I
. apptovat
)
FIGURE 500-5. Superseding (new) Drawing Notations Redrawn with Same Number
500-6
00D-sTD-00looD (AR )
(2) drawing.
Superseded (old) Notation as ahoyn in FIGURE 500-6
shall be entered in the revision block of the superseded drawing. The word
‘SUPERSEDEDil shall be added just above the title block as shown in
@ FIGURE 400-10.
I
REVlalONS
OI!8CRIPTION @AIE (n-w I AWROVEI
,
- VO NOT enzm hevtiion &ynbot oh date ot t.igna.&
?EPLACED
?Ev ~<
<oh ii
“:
/------’”” ‘“W””
WITti CHANGE
~ Etiu nti wquentiaf
applicable,
0V2U
ae.~ion
BY
“#
‘6ynbot
noi?a.!ion ,
‘E(?- I‘
!EPLACED WITHOUT CHANGE BY A
Entu next bequcn.tid Rtvtiion &ynbot
1“
FIGURS 5004. Superseded (old) Drawing I(otations”

Redrawn with same Number
,!
500-7
b. Replacing drawing with different number.
(1 ) Superseding (new) drawing. Notation as shown in FIGURE 500-7

shall be entered in the revision block of the superseding drawing. The
drawing shall contain an original date different than the superseded drawing.
Changes shall be described in accordance with APPENDIX E by method(s) as
directed by the Government Design Activity.
RI
= ! ! ?x : : : =
iEpLACES WITH~CHANGE
En.ZU duc%iption 06 chanqe oh heiuence

to the change outhotizhon document.
I I
~ Do NOT etia aewi.&on h ymbot oh !a.IA
(05i.ginu.t chauing dale app.fiu )
FIGURE 500-7. Superseding (new) Drawing Hotations Replacing Drawing with

Different Number
500-8
(2) Superseded (old) drawing. Notation aa shown in FIGURE 500-8

shall be entered in the revision block of the superseded drawing. The uord
‘SUPERSEDEO1t,shallbe added just above the title block, as ahown in
0 FIGuRE 400-10.
I-R]
don
REVISIONS
DESCRIPTION ]DATE tw4a30il I APMOVEO
I
mbm
-)
EtUM mep&cing (ned’ -9
71
-7
~Entu debctiption o{ chunge oa aeiuence
.to the change authotiza-tion do~enz
)
i.gna.zw
FIGURE SOD-8. Superseded (old) Drawing Notations Replaced by Drawing with

Different Number
500-9
CNAPTER 600
o
ASSOCIATED LISTS
600 General. This chapter establishes minimum requirements for the

preparation of Associated Llats.
a. Associated Lists will be prepared only when required by the

Government Design Activity.
b. Information regarding procedure, forms, and design activity logo will

be provided by the Government Design Activity when appropriate.
601.1 ‘Parts list (PL). A parta list is a tabulation of all parts and
●bulk materials (except those materials which support a process) used in the
item to which the list applies. Reference documents may also be tabulated on
a parts list. Items listed on a subordinate assembly parts list or specified
in a referenced document need not be repeated in the using assembly parts
list unless it is necessary to limit options perfnitted by the subordinate
document.
NOTE: The term “List of Materialsn (LM) is no longer used; it was formerly
used interchangeably with Parts List (PL).
NOTE: Whenever Parts Lists are used, a note, *SEE SEpARATE pARTS LIST-
120 XXXX5-1~ shall be located above the title block of the parent engineering
● drawing. See FIGURE 200-8.
601.2 When PLs are required, a separate parts list shall be prepared for
each assembly regardless of what level the assembly ia used within the
equipment or system. Drawings and other documents to be listed shall be
segregated into groups as specified in the parts list detail requirements of
this standard.
#
602 General Requirenients.
q 602.1 List preparation. Parts lists may be prepared manually or by the

application of autOmatic data processing system (ADPS) techniques. The
type(s) of list(s) to be prepared, drawing aasembly level at which lists will
be prepared, and whether parts lists shall be prepared integral to or
separate from the drawing shall be as determined by the Government Design
Activity. Lists prepared integral to the drawing shall follow format design
and location shown in FIGURE A-3, in accordance with ANSI YIU. 1. Entries
shall follow rules established for appropriate columns as provided in this
chapter.
602.1.1 Manual preparation. Separate Parts Lists prepared manually shall

utilize 8-1 /2 x 11 inch size format and follow format design and preparation
requirements as provided herein. See FIGURE 600-1.
600-1
FIGURE 600-1. Manually Prepared Parts List Format
This sample drawing is informationel only and complete to the degree necesoary
to illustrate e type of drawing.. Actual format and drawing ehall conforo to
the textual requirements ● et forth in thie standard.
600-2
602. 1.2 Automatic data processing system (ADPS) preparation. Lists

prepared by utilization of Automatic Data Processing System (ADPS)
● techniques, shall follow preparation requirements as provided herein.

However, preprinted formats need not be utilized
can duplicate format headings
if normal machine
and listing.
operations
See FIGURE 600-2. Size of ADP.S
listing shall be commensurate with machine capability and normal size
.m~~ginally punched continuous blank paper stock. See FIGURE 600-3 for
example of ADPS prepared Parts List.
NOTE: Automatic Data Processing System (ADPS) data or Electronic Accounting

Machine (EAM) cards to be stored by the design activity for subsequent
automatic list preparation may be acquired in lieu of machine or manually
prepared lists at the option of the cognizant Government Design Activity.
Instructions for the preparation of these kinds of submissions will be
provided by the Government Design Activity.
r I
● ●
● ●
● ml,. .,,,
● :
“,,,,. tmnn
● m,,. “**-* ●
u
● .,1 ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
● 1
● b
● ●
:* ●
● ●
● ●
● b
● ●
● ●
● ●
● ●
FIGURE 600-2. Sample Format for Automatic’ Data Processing System (ADPS)
Prepared Parts List
‘i%issample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree necessary

the textual requirements aet forth in this standard.
600-3
... . . .
.
● ●
● —.-&&5&-_ ●
I.X,M, -.,A ..-, .*-
● u“ w-,”, - .---, Ga. mlamL - -,W .,. .,,,,.””

,“,, ●
““”.+:
-.,”., - , ,“,- “,,s,. lm.t. ● ✞☛☛ ✎
●
●
co.!
.-
n#
. .
.,.
“.
.W1.u.
c-ma
.,,
..-
-
-*
. ..!
,“”,”,-
-,
.
m
ML.,.-”
ml
Wmanul:-.
.-
‘+”” --- m — mu
.,0. ““ 14 m “’
✘
R:: ::::::=
“,,.,*
● : ..,,.., ●
: M :::WX
“s,,,s
.“ ,,,,
‘ 9
: w %:x:
.,.,
“,,.,?
>!. ●
w,,, .,.,,,0.. .*.,, *
● “.,.,,
.,s,,,,
●
: ::::: ::::::::
, w,.’ .s,...-,. .*.,..,
● 1
.,,,,,
: ::::: :::::::::: “.,,.
●
“s: :::;:7s
.s.,..,
● : .s,9s, ●
,“tt ,
●
●
● ●
● —...”s. —-
-.”-..”-.*- ●
●
● ,“” ,,,, ..,”,”” ---, --—--$-. -,.”,~ ,, *,,
+“
“u.!.,””, - , ,“ M,” ● ●
“,, ,.,,.IL, “.,,,- Is,,,” ,
● .- .-- -, UI.”IU,,* -“.““0#~ *,
● ●
p :! ~!~ ~ ._~-m. .- ~m~m -ma- . — ,,n# -
“,
,“.,” , “..,..
9 ●
1
● Hy: %,-.
: :%: : .tN. ● ●
‘o : R::;: : ::::::: “.4 . “s,,,.
* ,.,,,,. . ,“,,,, “.s.
.,,,,.,
“sc,,-
u,.. ● ●
R% ::::: “tn. -,,,”
●
,
:
.,?,.”
,.,.,,,
..,,,,,,
, .,,..,,
““.: , ● ●
e-.
●
: :::::’ :::::: ,.-.
Wm.
-,,,*
-,,,4.
,--.,,
,.,”WI.,,
-“,”
“*C,,. ● ●
● : :%:: : :%: h’% -“-’ ““’-”’” -“r:-
: ::::+ : :%:: ●
.
●
: M:: : ::;%
● : :::%: : ::::3
; ::::2: : ;::::2:
● ,,,, >s4, . ,,,,,”,
,.,, !!.2 , ,,,,,,.,
● , : ::::3 : :::::% ; a,.,-,. ●

: K% 0 ‘“’””’
.. ....... ct.,, =“,” ,
● ,..,l . .; ; ;;;;;,;: ‘i””
“,s., -, ,
J
●
:
* H
::::
,,,,
>,,. x:% -+:!s
,
; : :%::
● l.!l>.r, ,-,,,,
: w%:” : ::::::: I“,,u
.,, .-.
●
: :::::W : :%::s::
U..”.,
cow”
cIMm. : ●
-.”
● : ::::%: : %::: .,.. “,,,.,.
●
: :X:::J : :;::ti: {C!,.,.,.,
.,.0. “,.,.,.
Wnn
●
: :%:: : :%:;: .,-.
cccl”.,,.
.,,,.,.
,- ●
a ,05,,.., . ,“,,,,, .U
●
a . “ MOM* *, . u,-.. “, . -1,... ..-. .I- ●
FIGURE 600-3. Example of ADPS Prepared Parta List
I
~ks sampla drawing is informational only and complete to the degree neceaaary
tha textual requiremente oet forth in thie standard.
600-4
●
, —
602.2 Multiple sheets. When more than a single sheet is required to

prepare or revise a list,, the list title may be shown on each sheet; however,
It is required on the first sheet only. ADPS prepared sheets shall utilize
the first or last sheet to indicate total number of sheets.
602..2.1 Sheet numbering. All sheets shall be numbered consecutively

starting with number one (1) when prepared manuall Y. The first sheet shall
indicate the total number of sheets. ADPS prepared sheets shall utilize the
first or last sheet to indicate total number of sheets. Sheets 2. 3. etC. ,
shall bear sheet number only in this block.
602.2.2 Legibility requirements. Lists shall meet legibility requirements

of MIL-D-5480.
602.2.3 List maintenance. Lists shall be maintained as separate original

documents with appropriate revision levels and dates.
602.3 Revisiona. Liata may be revised independent y of the associated

drawings; however, related changes should be incorporated concurrently.
602.3.1 Revision identification. A revision letter and the date of

revision shall be applied to each list or each affected sheet of a list when
any change is made. The lettera ’11”, “0’1, ‘*Q’*, ~rS”, and ‘*Z’! shall not be
used as revision letters. The letter llX1l shall only be used in accordance
with APPENDIX E by method(s) as directed by the Government Cesign Activity.
602.3.2 Deleting items. Items to be deleted shall be erased, or, when

using ADPS techniques, omitted on the next list run.
602.3.3 Adding items. New or superseding items may be either added

chronologically at the end of a list or inserted in the list in the proper
sequence. Additional “sheets may be added when the last sheet will not
accommodate additions.
602.3.4 Revision description. A description of every change, addition or

deletion processed shall be recorded
with APPENDIX E byin accordance
❑ethod (s) as directed by the Government Design Activity.
602.4 Design activity identification. The current design activity’s name

shall be entered on all associated lists in the block provided by format.
602.5 Block and column size and arrangement. The size and arrangement of
all blocks and columns shall be determined by the preparing activity
according to the method of preparation used.
602.6 Additional blocks and columns. Additional blocks and columns may be
added for use of the preparing activity.
603 Parts list preparation .’
603.1 Format. Parts liste shall be prepared in the format illustrated in’
FIGURE 600-1.
600-5
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
603.2 Entries. Entries shall be

made on the form single spaced as
follows~isting shall be in
ascending numerical order by document
number (See the instructions for entries in column 14).
603.2.1 Block 1, Design Activity Identification. The name of the original

design activity whose CAGE Code appears in Block 2 as original shall be
entered.
603.2.2 Block 2, CAGE Code. Enter the CAGE Code designating the original
(and current if applicable) design activity on each sheet.
603.2.3 Block 3, Original Date. The date when the list is initially
prepared is entered in this block. Enter date iri six numeric characters,
year-month-day, e.g. , 72-04-28 (date authentication signature obtained).
This method of dating will also be used for revision date in block 18.
603.2.4 Block 4, Parts List Number. Enter the identifying part number of
the assembly drawing ( see 402.8) with the lettera ‘?PL” on each sheet of the
list.
603.2.5 Block 5, List Title. Enter the exact title from the title block
of the drawing to which the list applies.
603.2.6 Block 6, Authentication Signature. The signature of the approving

official is entered on all sheets. New authentication signature will be
required on retyped lists.
603.2.7
sheet.
paragraph
Block
The total
7,
602.2.1.
Sheet Number.
number of sheeta
Enter the appropriate
in the list shall be
sheet number
as specified
of each
in ●
603.2.8 Block 8, Drawing Number. Enter drawing number preceded by the
drawing size letter. For multi-sheet documents, enter size of sheet 1.
603.2.9 Column 9, Find Number. Enter find number for alternate/optional

entries when used.
a. Alternate/optional parta or bulk items. The find number column on

the parts list and the quantity required column will be used to indicate
alternate/optional parts or bulk items. An alternate sequence number (e.g. ,
,,/1/ ,,, 11/2/,,) will be shown for the preferred item in the find number column,
and the actual quantity required will be shown in the “Quantity Required’!
column. The alternate/optional item is indicated by entering the same
alternate sequence number as the preferred item in the find number column and
ALT’l for alternate part; NOpTN for optional part will be
the abbreviation l*
shown in the Cuantity Required column.
600-6
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
EXAMPLE:
o Find
&
/1/
Qt y
@
AR
Identifying
No.
MMM-A-131T1c1-2
Document
- No
MMM-A-131
Nomenclature or
Description
Adhesive, Glass-to
Metal for Optical
Elements Type 1,
Clasa 1 and 2
/1/ ALT MMM-A-131T2 MMM-A-131 Adhesive, Glass-to

Metal for Optical
Elements, Type 2
603.2.10 Column 10, Quantity Required. Enter the quantity for each item
required to produce a single assembly to which the list pertains. The symbol
AR (As Required) shall be used for bulk material. When AR is used, add “AR -
As Required” at the end of the list. If other symbols are used, they will be
explained at the end of the list.
603.2.11 Column 11, CAGE Code. Enter the appropriate CAGE Code assigned
to the design activity whose document number appears in column 14. When the
CAGE Code for an item is identical to that entered fOr the liSt (COluMn 2),
it is not necessary to repeat the Code in column 11. Whenever Government or
Industry standards or specifications are specified as bulk item identifiers,
● ~~
the CAGE Code must be listed.
603.2.12 Column 12, Part or Identifying Number.
a. Enter the part number and dash number (when applicable) for parts and
bulk material.
b. The part number will be repeated for each dash numbered item.
?
c. Enter MS or AN number and dash number in this column for parts so

identified.
d. When an item is controlled by a military specification and is

individually identified by a designation (such as RC20GF013J. UG-58 D/U).
enter this designation.
e. When type, grade, class, condition, etc., are required fOr

identification, such information shall be entered.
f. Part number sequence shall be determined by the listing order of

Drawing/Documents Number listed in col~n 14.
603.2.13 Column 13, Drawing Size. Enter the letter size (sheet 1) of the
drawing entered in column 14.
600-7
603.2.14 Column 14, Drawing/Document Number. Enter the drawing or

standard
specif
following
specl,fying
on which the number entered
Ications
specification
shall
bulk
are used as identifying
identification
apply
issue
for order
in column
of listing
and type designator
numbers,
(e .g. , MIL-S-12345)
12 is Identified.
enter the complete
in this
and for special
items.
column.
Where
The
consideration in
0
a. Order of listing. Listing shall be in ascending numerical order
within the following order of document groupings: (This listing will
coincide with order of listings on computer-generated parts lists) .
Product Drawings
BFAX (Ordnance Taxi Drawings) not to be used in new designs
Military Standards (MS)
The following shall be listed alpha-numerical in the following
sequence:
Federal Specifications
Military Specifications
Miscellaneous
b. Identifying bulk issue, typ e designator items and reference

drawings. These items shall be identified on a parts list in the following
manner:
(1) Bulk Material Entries on Parts List. Where bulk ❑aterial

items are covered by a federal/military document with no selections, use the
federal/military document number for the document number and the part number.
Column 12 Column 14 Column 15

PART NUMBER DOCUMENTNUMBER NOMENCLATUREOR DESCRIPTION
QQ-W-470 CQ-W-470 WIRE, .004 DIA

MMM-A-13 1 MMM-A-131 ADHESIVE, TYPE 1
MMM-A-187 MMM-A-187 ADHESIVE
MIL-S-1 1030 MIL-S-1 1030 SEALING COMPOUND , TYPE 1
MIL-S-11031 MIL-S-1 1031 SEALING COMPOUND
(2) Specification type designator entries on parts list.
(a) When federal/military documents utilize the type

designation system for identification of resistors, capacitors, etc., the
following shall apply:
(A) Where the federal/military document has no subordinate

slash sheets, use the federal/military document number as the document number
and the type designator as the part number.

Rx29v100 MIL-R-19365 RESISTOR
(B) Where the federal/military document has subordinate

slash sheets and the slash sheets have no subordinate designators, use the
federal/milltary document number, as the document number and the federal/
military document number with slash sheet number as the part number.
600-8
DOD-STD-00100D (AR)

0 MIL-C-27072/l MIL-C-27072 CABLE
EXCEPTION: Where the federal/military document number with slash sheet

number specifies only one item and has no identifying military part number,
and this item has a recognized industry identifying number (i. e.,
semi-conductor devices, electron tubes, etc. ), use the federallmilitary
document number with slash sheet number as the document number and the
industry number as the part number.

2N706 MIL-S-19500/120 TRANSISTOR (MIL-S-1 9500)
(C) Where the federal/military document has subordinate

slash sheets and the slash sheet has subordinate designators, use the
federal/military document number with slash sheet nhber as the document
number and the designator from the slash sheet as the part number.

MEJ42s/11-01 MIL-B-542s/11 BOOT (MIL-B-5423 )

IECBA290EP MIL-C-38102/l
. . CAPACITOR (MIL-C-38102)
● (3)
of Identifying
Reference
Number
drawings entries.
Column 12 to designate
Use “REFERENCE DWG” in the Part
reference drawings (e. g.,
schematic diagram, wiring diagram, printed circuit master, etc.). Enter the
\ reference drawing number in Column 14.
+
9 603.2.15 Column 15, Nomenclature or Description. ~ter the nomenclature
of the item whose part or identifying number appears in column 12.
603.2.16 Column 16, Supplemental List. Enter an “X” in line with each
item (assembly) that has its own associated list(s).
603.2.17 Column 17, Notes. Enter letter symbols (three letters maximum)
for appropriate entries where special notes are required. Symbols shall be
approved by the Government Design Activity prior to use. The symbols and
related notes will be entered at the end of the list.
603.2.18 Block 18, Revision Letter/Description/Date/Approval.
a. Revision Block. The revision block format shall conform to that

ahown in FIGURE 600-1. A revision block is not required on ADPS prepared
lists; however, it shall contsin the latest revision letter and date. See
FIGURE 600-3.
b. Revision Letter. The identifying letter pertaining to the
●
particular revision being recorded shall be entered in the LTR column.
See APPENDIX E.
600-9
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
C. Description. Changes shall be described in accordance with

APPENDIX E by method(a) aa directed by the Government Design Activity.
d. Date/Approval. Approval of the revision shall be indicated by

signature of the authorized Government Design Activity repreaentative entered
in the ADPR column with the associated date entered in the DATE column.
603.2.19 Revision Letter/Date/Approval of ADPS. Prepared Lists. Revision

date and letter shall be shown for each sheet and be the same for all sheets.
Approval shall be indicated by signature for each revision adjacent to
AUTHENTICATION.
604 On Vehicle Equipment List (OVE). OVE lists designate equipment and
material ( such as shovels, first aid kits, machine gun mounts, etc. ) which
may be added to a systemlsubsystem. These items may be issued at the troop
or depot levels, or may be required to be installed or furnished by the
manufacturer. ‘fhis list is identified or noted on Sheet 1 of the vehicle
drawing (top assembly). There are two categories of OVE: BII and AAL. The
On Vehicle Equipment (OVE) lists, consisting of the Basic Issue Items (BII)
and Additional Authorized List (AAL) are the only lists that will be
automatically prepared. The format shall be aa directed by the Government
Design Activity.
604.1 Basic Issue Items (BII) . These are the minimum essential items
required to place an end item in operation and to perform emergency repairs.
This is equipment that is furnished with the end item, and must stay with the
end item when it is issued or transferred between accountable officers.
604.2 Additional Authorized List (AAL). These are items available to the
troops at the discretion of the Company Commander. These are usually items
which are peculiar to the end item for a particular area or end item
application. This list identifies items that do not have to accompany the
end item when tranaferred between accountable officers.
605 Special Tool Set List. Special Tool Sets will be identified and noted
on Sheet 1 of the vehicle drawing (top assembly). These are special tools
peculiar to the support of the vehicle. They do not accompany the end item:
they are for maintenance support units. The format shall be as directed by
the Government Design Activity. They should be designated as:
TOOL SET. MAINT, ORG SPRT, A XX XXX XXX
TOOL SET, MAINT, DIRECT SPRT, A XX XXXXXX
TOOL SET, GENERAL SPRT, A XXX XXXX~
TOOL SET, DEPOT SPRT, AXXXX x XXX
605.1 Special Tool Sets. Inasmuch aa special tools do not constitute a

functional or production assembly of the vehicle system, reference
identification must be cited as indicated above to reflect data visibility/
availability and maintenance consideration.
600-10
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
CHAPTER 700
DEFINITIONS
This chapter establishes definitiona for words and terms used in this
Standard and Specification DOD-D-1 OOO. Definitions have been developed
specifically for support of the standard and specification or have been
extracted from either the Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR), IX3D1a
Supplement (DFARS), Military Standards, or Department of Defense
Instructions.
Acceptance. The act of an authorized representative of the Government by

which the Government assumes for itself, or as an agent of another, ownership
of existing and identified supplies tendered, or approves specific services
rendered, as partial or complete performance of the contract on the part of
the contractor.
.
Accessory. A part, subassembly, or assembly designed for use in conjunction

with or to supplement another assembly, or a unit or set, contributing to the
effectiveness thereof without extending or varying the basic function of the
assembly or set. An accessory may be used for testing, adjusting, or
calibrating purposes. (Examples: test instrument, recording camera for
radar set, headphones, emergency power supply).
Allocated Configuration Identification (ACI). The ACI is the technical

documentation governing and specifying the performance, physical, and
interface requirements for CIa that are part of a higher level CI, typically
a system; this documentation is in the form of specifications, drawings, and
associated lists, and documents referenced therein, and is usually prepared
during the validation phase. If there is no validation phase, the ACI may be
prepared during the Initial part of the full-scale development phase. Like
the FCI, the ACI includes teat provisions to assure all of the specified
requirements are achieved by the developed CI.
Altered item. An altered item is one which, prior to the alteration, is

taken from existing government stock or procured from a vendor and altered to
meet design requirements. The item is then altered to meet specific design
requirements.
Assembly. A number of parts or subassemblies or any combination thereof

joined together to perform a specific function. (Examples: power
shovel-front, fan assembly, audio-frequency amplifier).
NOTE: The distinction between an assembly and a subassembly is determined by

individual application. An assembly in one instance may be a subassembly in
another where it forms a portion of a higher asaembly.
Associated list. A tabulation of pertinent engineering information

pertaining to an item depicted on an engineering drawing or on a set of
engineering drawings.
Attachment. A part, subassembly or assembly designed for use in conjunction

with another assembly or a unit or set , contributing to the effectiveness
thereof by extending or varying the basic function of the aasembly, unit, or
act. (Examples: hoisting attachment on a truck, milling attachment for a
lathe) .
700-1
Base Line. A base line is a definitized status of a configuration

identification (CI) document or a set of such documents, which describe a CI
and/or the relationship between CIa, at a specified time during a CI!S life
cycle. (The record of the documentation revision status is maintained by the
configuration status accounting system. ) There are three initial base lines,
the functional base line, the allocated base line, and the product base line,
which are configuration identification departure points for further
documentation development (documenting materiel development) in the
validation phase, the full-scale development phase, and the production/
deployment phaae of the CIts life cycle. The relationship of these base
lines to the various configuration identifications is as follows:
Allocated Baae Line. The allocated configuration identification. See Base

Line.
Functional Base Line. The functional configuration identification. See

Ssse Line.
Product Base Line. The product configuration identification. See Base

Line.
Bulk materials. Bulk materials are those necessary constituents of an

assembly or such as oil,
part wax, solder, cement, ink, damping fluid,
greaae, powdered graphite, flux, welding rod, thread, twine, and chain for
which the quantity required is not readily predeterminable or if the quantity
is known, the physical nature of the material is such that it ia not
adaptable to depiction on a drawing; or which can be cut to finished size by
the use of such hand or bench tools as ahears, pliers, knives, etc., without
any further machining operations and the configuration ia such that it can be
fully described in writing without the necessity of pictorial representation.
Combination of items. A combination of items is defined as a single

composite unit consisting of one or more items with the related equipment,
tools, and spare parts which make the unit complete for issue. A combination
may alao consist of two or more items without equipment, tools, or spare
parts.
Commercial item. A commercial item is a term which includes both supplies

and services of a class or kind which (a) regularly is used for other than
Government purposea and (b) ia sold or traded in the course of conducting
normal business operations.
NOTE: Services, per se, normally are not subject to delineation on

engineering drawings.
Configuration Identification (CI). A configuration identification is the

technical documentation which described design and/or product functional
andlor fabricated requirements for CIS.
Contract. Contract meana all types of agreements and orders for the
procurement of supplies or services. It includes awards and notices of
award; contracts providing for the issuance of job orders, task orders, or
task letters thereunder; letter contracts, and purchase orders. It alao
includes supplemental agreements with respect to any of the foregoing.
700-2
Contracting officer. contracting officer means any person who, in accordance

with departmental procedures, is currently designated a contracting officer
with the authority to enter into and administer contracts and make
@ determinationa and findings with respect thereto, or with any part of such
authority. The term also includes the authorized representative of the
contracting officer acting within the limits of his authority.
Contractor. Contractor means any individual, partnership, public or private.

corporation, association, Institution, or other entity which Is a party to a
oontract.
Corner. An intersection of edges.
Critical safety characteristic. Any feature (i. e., tolerance, finish,

material composition, manufacturing, assembly or inspection process) or
product, material, or process, which if nonconforming or missing. could cause
the failure or malfunction of the critical safety it~m.
\
Critical safety item. A part, asaembly, installation, or production system
with one or more critical characteristics that, If not conforming to the
design data or quality requirements would result in an unsafe condition.
Unsafe conditions relate to hazard severity categories I and II cf
MIL-STD-882, System Safety Prcgram Requirements, and include conditions which
could cause loss or serious damage to the end item or major components, loss
of control, or serious injury to personnel.
o Deficiencies.
In
a. conditions
compliance with
Daficienciea
specified
consist
or characteristics
configuration,
in
of two
any
types:
or
hardwarelaoftware which are not
w
b. inadequate (or erroneous) configuration identification which has
> resulted, or may result, in configuration items that do not fulfill approved
operational requirements.
Design activity, current. “A government activity currently having

responsibility for design, drawing and associated documents preparation/
maintenance. Current design activity could be the criginal activity, or new
.
activity when that responsibility was transferred from another government (or
contractor) organization.
Design activity, original. A Government design activity having had

responsibility originally for the design of an item and whose drawing number
and CAGE code is shown inthe title block of all drawings and associated
documents.
Design agent. A design agent is an activity contracted or tasked to develop

details of a design for which the design activity retains responsibility.
Distribution Statement. A distribution statement identifies documents that

contain information of which the dissemination is controlled by statute or
regulation; also it Indicatea the extent of secondary distribution that is
● permissible without further authorization or apprcval cf the originator. ”
700-3
Document. Document applies to the specifications, drawings, lists,

standards, pamphlets, reports, and printed, typewritten or other information,
relating to the design, procurement, manufacture, test, or inspection of
items or services under the contract.
Drawing format. A format in accordance with an accepted standard used for

the preparation of an engineering drawing.
Duplicate original. A replica of an original engineering drawing made by a

photo-duplicating technique, or a combination of a photo-duplicating
technique and drafting on a medium (vellum, plastic base material, etc. )
suitable for reproducing other reproducible and non-reproducible drawinga.
n A line Of division bounded by twO surfaces.
End-product (end-item). An end-product is an item, either an individual part

or assembly, in its final or completed state.
Engineering data. Engineering documents such as drawings, associated lists,

accompanying documents, manufacturer specifications, and standards, or other
information prepared by a design activity and relating to the design,
manufacture, procurement, test, or inspection of items or services.
Exterior corners and edges. Corners and edges having included angles leas
than 180 degrees (measured through the material).
Exterior Edge/Corner Break. Unless otherwise specifically defined with a

radius or chamfer requirement, the phraae ‘! SHALL BE BROKEN” is defined as
either a radiua or a basic 45 degree chamfer. Therefore, ,, SHALL BE BROKEN
.02 + .02” allows a R .02 to R .04 or a basic 45 degree chamfer with sides
from .02 to .04.
First tier. Normally used with specifications. The “top” specification.

Other specifications reference the !ttoptt or !Ifirst tier’! specification.
Formal Engineering Change Control. The method of controlling revisions to

engineering drawings by means of configuration management procedures
involving release of data to the Technical Data Repository and subsequent
preparation of Engineering Release Record(s) (ERRs), Engineering Change
Proposal(s) (ECPS), Notice of Revision(s) (NORS) and related documentation.
Formulations. Formulations are mixtures such as explosives, fillers,

propellants, pyrotechnics, etc. Each formulation la discretely identified.
Formulation are not to be construed as ‘*bulk material”.
Full Scale Development Phase. During this effort, the system, including all
items necessary for its support, is designed, fabricated, and tested. The
intended output is a hardware configured system and the documentation rieeded
to produce the hardware. The objectives of Full-Scale Development are to
ensure that the engineering design is completed, that all major problems have
been resolved, and that this has been demonstrated by actual performance
testing as systems progress through the development process. These
objectives are under continuous review from the definition and refinement of
requirements through the evaluation and selection of alternatives to the
management and direction of production.
700-4
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
Functional Configuration Identification (FCI). The FCI is the technical

documentation for a CI as set forth in specifications, drawings, and
associated lists, and documents referenced therein, which is initially
prepared during the conceptual phase, to establish performance and physical
requirements for a CI to be developed or produced. The FCI addresses the
technical and mission requirements of a system (or major equipment) as an
entity, and includes test provisions to assure requirements are achieved.
Government Design Activity. Government agency responsible, or scheduled to

become responsible, for Configuration Management and design requirements of a
Configuration Item.
Government drawing format. A drawing format on which a Department or Agency

of the DOD affixes its identity.
Government procurement quality assurance (PQA). The function by which the

(kwernment determines whether a contractor has fulfilled his contract
obligations pertaining to quality and quantity. ‘fhis function is related to
and generally precedes the act of acceptance.
!@!u A collection of units, assemblies, or subassemblies which is a

sub-division of a set or system, but which is not capable of performing a
complete operational function. (Examples: antenna group, indicator group).
Interchangeable item. When two or more items possess such functional and
physical characteristic as to be equivalent in performance and durability
and capable of being exchanged one for the other without alteration of the
items themselves or of adjoining items except for adjustment, and without
selection for fit or performance, the items are interchangeable.
Interior corners and edges. Corners and edges having included engles greater
than 180 degrees (measured through the material).
a A non-specific term used to denote any unit or product including

materials, parts, assemblies, equipment, accessories, and attachments.
Level. Classification of engineering drawings as selected from CCID-D-1OOO.
Limited production. Production of only a few pieces as opposed to quantity

(mass) production.
Manufacturer. Manufacturer is a person or firm
a. who owns, operates, or maintains a factory or establishment that

produces on the premises the materials, supplies, articles, or equipment
required under the contract or of the general character described by the
specifications, standards, and publications; or
b. who, if newly entering into a manufacturing activity of the type

described above, has made all necessary prior agreements for manufacture
space, equipment, and personnel to perform the manufacturing operations
required for contract performance.
700-5
DOD-.STD-OO 10OD ( AR)
Matched parts. Matched parts are those parts, such as special application
parts, which are machine matched, or otherwise mated, and for which
replacement as a matched set or. pair is essential.
e
Module. Depending upon context, the term “module” can mean any in a series
of standard units for use together. A packaged functional assembly of
electronic/mechanical components for uae with other such assemblies. An
independent unit that is a part of the total structure.
Non-part drawing. An engineering drawing that provides requirements,

procedures, instructions, etc., applicable to an item, when it is not
convenient to include this information on the applicable part drawing.
Examples include test requirements drawing, wiring diagram drawing, etc.
Original date. An Original date (located in the title block) is to establish

a base line and is retained throughout the life of the drawing for historical :
record purposea.
Original drawing. An original drawing is the drawing or “marked” copy

thereof on which is kept the revision record recognized as official by the
design activity.
Part. One piece, or two or more pieces joined together, which arenot
normally subject to disassembly without destruction or impairment of designed
use. (Examples: outer front wheel bearing of 3/U ton truck, electron tube,
composition resistor, screw, gear, mica capacitor, audio transformer, milling
cutter. )
Part drawing. Anengineering drawing that defines an item and assigns a part c
or control number to identify its configuration.
Product Configuration Identification (PCI). The PCI (also referred to as

Technical Data Package) is the technical documentation establishing the
technical requirements for production of Army materiel. The technical
documentation shall specify form, fit, and function to insure interchange-
ability of CIS andlor detail design disclosure to permit the delivery of
identical items, within specification tolerances, by qualified sources. This
documentation is in the form of specifications, drawings, and associated
lists, and documents referenced therein, and ia initially prepared or
acquired during the full-scale development phase. All items for which
individual procurement is projected, repair parts as well as prime items,
shall be supported by a PCI which includes performance and quality assurance
requirements as well as form, fit, and function, and/or detail design
disclosure, as. applicable.
Production. The process of converting raw materials by fabrication into

required material. It includes functions of production-scheduling,
inspection, quality control, and related processes.
Proved. Use of an engineering drawing in producing, inspection, and testing

of a sstiafactory product.
Quality assurance. A planned and systematic pattern of all actions necessary

to provide adequate confidence that the item or product oonforms to a
established technical requirements.
700-6
Repair part. Any part, assembly, or component that is required for
O
installation in the maintenance of an end item.
Repairable. Having the capability of being repaired.
Replacement drawing. A replacement drawing ia defined as a new original

drawing substituted for the previous original drawing of the asme drawing
number.
Revision. The term revision refers to any change to an original drawing

after that drawing has been released for use.
Revision authorization. A revision authorization is a document such as a
.
Notice of Revision, Engineering Change Notice, or Revision Directive which
describes the revision in detail and is issued by the activity having the
authority to revise the drawing.
Revision symbol. A revision symbol is an identifying letter which maybe

accompanied by a suffix number and enclosed in a circle or, in the case of
ADPS, may be the printed letter in a revision column or block.
Set. A unit or units and necessary assemblies, subassemblies, and parts

connected or associated together to perform an operational function. (Set 1s
also used to denote a collection of like parts such as a tool-set, or a set
of tires). (Examples: radio receiving set; sound measuring set, which
includes parts assemblies, and units as cable, microphone, and measuring
0 instruments;
Standard,
a Government
radar
Government.
Activity.
homing set).
Government standard is a standard developed by or for
Standard, non-government. A nationally-recognized standardization document,

issued with intent to establish common technical requirements by a
$ non-government organization, which conducts professional standardization
activities and which is not organized for profit. (Includes “INDUSTRY
Standards . Does not include ‘COMPANY Standards).
. Standard,
similar
sheet form.
to the MS sheet
Sheet
format
form
or
standard
MIL-STD
is a standard
unit page format.
prepared in format
Standards. Standards are documents that establish engineering and technical

limitations and applications for items, materials, processes, methods,
designs, and engineering practices.
Standards, Company. Company standards are those developed to establish

engineering and technical applications for Items, materials, processes,
methods, designs, and engineering practices to facilitate atandardization
within that company.
Subassembly. Two or more parts which form a portion of an assembly or a unit

replaceable as a whole, which are individually
0
but having a part or parts
replaceable. (Examples: gun mount stand, window sash, recoil mechanism,
floating piston, telephone dial, Intermediate Frequency (IF) strip, terminal
board with mounted parts).
700-7
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
Sub-contractor. ..
Supplier. distributor, vendor. or firm which furnishes
supplies or services to or for a prime contractor or another sub-contractor.
Symmetrically opposite parts. Symmetrically opposite parts are those parta

which are mirror images of each other.
System (electrical - electronics). A combination of two or more sets,

generally physically separated when in operation, and such other assemblies
and parts necessary to perform an operational function or functions.
(Examples: Airborne early warning (AEW) electronic system, anti-aircraft
defense system, telephone carrier system, Ground controlled approach (GCA)
electronic system, fire control system including the tracking radar,
computer, and gun mount).
System (general). A composite of equipment, skills, and techniques capable

of performing or supporting an operational role, or both. A complete system
includes all equipment, related facilities, material, software, services and
personnel required for its operation and support to the degree that It can be
considered a self-sufficient unit in its intended operational environment.
~ An assembly or any combination of parts, subassemblies, and assemblies

mounted together normally capable of independent operation in a variety of
situations. (Examples: Hydraulic jack, electric motor, electronic power
supply, internal combustion engine, electric generator, radio receiver. )
NOTE: The size of an item is a consideration in some cases. An electric

motor for a clock may be considered as a part inasmuch as it is not normally
subject to disassembly.
Validation. The process by which the preparing activity for a document

determines that the document reflects accurate and current requirements,
including reference to current documents that are clearly and specifically
applicable to the document being validated.
Validation Phase. The Validation Phase is the second effort of the weapon
system life cycle. During this effort, the major characteristic of the
program/project are defined and validated for the alternative(s) selected in
the previous effort. Validation is the first step in the development phase’
during which preliminary design and engineering are verified or accomplished
and firm contract and management planning are performed.
Vendor. A design non-Governmental’ activity, manufacturer, seller,

wholesaler, or agent from whom are acquired items for use in the performance
of the contract.
700-8
● Key word listin~
Assembly
Associated List
Baseline
Sulk Material
Diagram
Document
Drawing
Government Design Activity
Item
Part
Revision
Standard
Subassembly
System
Title
Tolerancing
Custodian: Preparing Activity:
Army - AR Army - AR
(Project DRPR-A283)
Review hctivity:
Army - AT
700-9
TNIS PACE LEFT BL4NK INTSNTIONAILY

J I
,,
700-10
APPENDIX A
DRAWING POIUIAT& SUPPI.EHSNTARYSLOCXS SNYRIES
Shall be in accordance with ANSI Y14.1-1980 except aa daacribed herein.
A-1
A-2
ti
,0~~
DRAWWW
CHECKER
OAmlmw
ENGm./EER
,’6
.
1
ORAWINGAPPROVAL
j’ DESIGNAPPRWAL
MA?LENGR
REVISION APPROVED 0A7Ew990.oAI
FIGURE A-2. Format for Aperture Card Signature/Revision Blocks
● ~ia sample drawing ie infonnsttonal only and complete to the degree neceaaary
the testual requiremente aet forth in this etandard.
A-3
:..
FIGURE A-3. Integral parts list (format and location)
This sample drawing is informetfonal only and cnmplete to the degree necessary
to illustrate a type of drewing. Actual format and drewing ehall conform to
A-4
SIZE MARGIN
El!il
DE GNATI N A B
B Q62 Q38
c 0.500.75
D 1.000.50
E 0.501.00
F 0.500.50
H 0.500.50
K 0.500.50
FIGURE A-4. Drawing format for B siz’eand larger
● This sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessary
the testual requirements set forth in this ●tandard.
A-5
DOkSTDOOIOOD(AiI)
APPLICATION
●
REVIS1ONS
o
w,,,”, [ “S, om ,~ m*cnlP,lO” Cam— Ummt
I
- ~
‘
●
-’J’+-ll”-
“,0
,,!,,
,
.,”E,W,SC
01.s”s,0”s .,.
mt...ci.
.
W,arl,o.
In Iltc”’,
COI17RACT
IWM8U
Co”nue?am
O,*la”
.“IVKV
J
J
.
,- ..- ~ 1.06-
.. .. .
Loo
0“.s(” ,“ DAn,ln-al
‘J’ —
;CEJ “y . .7 —
mm U?mvu
I scam Iu””wr I*IIC”
—
9’ I I
k--l. m-+ Loo-
I L------7.7;50
FIGURE A-5. Drawing format for A alze
l%is sample drawing ia informetional only ind complete to the degree neceeeary
to illustrate a type of drawi~. Actual formet ●nd dreui~ ●hell conform to
the textual requirement ●et forth in thie ●tandard.
A-6
-.
optional
@
I
7.74
8.50
FIGUlfEA-d. Drawing format for A size continuation sheet
l%is sample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree neceaeary
the textual requfrementa aet forth in this standard.
A-7
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
●
.,
“‘L \
w
AP*LICA11ON I “,”!*,ONS
Bi X.ml,c. l.m —,-
\, <
[
\
‘w,
‘.,... .-
--%
“.., man
I
.,,- I I ‘1
I AwmOv.
m.,, p.!,
.l [*M”
FIGURE A-7. Drawing format for Book-form drawing (Title sheet)
.
~le sample draviug ie informational only and complete to the degree necessary
to illustrate ● type of drawing. Actual fomat and drawing shall conform to
●
A-8
DOD-STD-OO1OOD( AR)
●
mm
m I COMBL!INION5OFAQO?lco
Ucm I I
mm
.<.
I 1 1
. —. .$lmaonnl’l ,
nnmwm
“,, -
Cuu.in. -- q
COMBINATIONS
●“!W.4 OF
d —
AWPTEO ilC16
r-- . .-
*—
I
&“ 1-
L
FIGURE A-8. Drawing format for Combinations of Adoptsd Items drawing

,;
Ti@ sample drawing ie informational only ●nd complete to the degree necessary
to illuotrete ● type of drawing. Actuel format ●nd draving ●hall confore to
,.
the testual raquiremente aet forth in this atmdard. ‘
A-9
‘
[ PACKAQC STOCKNO.
?ACKAOE NOMENCIATUMl
TWO PACKAOE PERTAINS TO
PACKAGE CONTENTS
m ..
Mu#0*MM D!Mw, . PAMMO. ~’ m
0
-, . . — . . —
MYmm
“,, —
,“ — -1
“A
——
r- . --
—
S
1
.=
-w
I 1-
4
~IGuRE A-9. IWawing format for Package Contents drawing
Tlks sample drawing is Informational only and complete to the degree neceaaary
the testual requirementa set forth in this standard.
o
A-10
APPENDIX B
SECURITY CLASSIFICATION MASNINGS AND NOTATIONS
B-1
B1 Security Classification and Notation. Looation of espionage, special

security and regrading notes shall be in accordance with DOD-5220-22 and the
following:
B1. 1 Assigning Classif icatlon. SSCUrity classification of drawings and

associated lists shall be consistent with project/program classification.
Classification of associated lists shall be based on the content of the list
and not on the classif Icatlon of the drawing.
,
1===71 SECURITY
NATIONAL iNFOflMATION DOWNGRADE
10 sEcifn
IJHAUJHORUED
DIKIONJRE
JUBJEC3
kFIOEt4TIAL
ON
D[aAJsln
on
mm 00tUMENI cOtsTAINs maw SCNSITWEIN. (WINED Bf
FORMATIONWHICH WOULD BE W SIGNlflCANl
ISTEUJGENCE VALUE TO A PDTENWSL ENEMY.
&CESS WM. BE SEVERELY UMITSD 70 lNDSE
INDIVIDUAL WNO MUST KNoW DESIGNDATAAND
PSDUJC.TIONTECHN1OUES OF lMPNOVEDCONVEN.
TIONAL MUNITIDNS m 0ss+ss 10 EXECUTE Om
Clu. Dunss
=1 p iiiim q aAJmD BY
‘L
NJBJKl10 GOS OFEO11652
AIWOMANIA1lYDOWNGRADED
Al 3W0
IRESTRICTHIDATA YEAANN[RVAU
DE(JAJSUIEO
on DKEM3ER
31,_
B-2
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
B1. 2 Application of Security Classification. Security classification

markings shall be applied by decals, rubber stmnps, or by lettering template.
● Markings
B1. 3
shall
Size
meet the reproduction
of Security
requirements
Msrkings.
of the drawing.
Security markings shall be equal to or

larger than the largest lettering on the drawing or list.
B1. 4 Color of Security Markings. All security classifications and

notations shall be black.
RESTRICTED
DATA
IHl$MAKRllJ
[OIIIANZ DAIA
RCSIRIOEO
AZOMINIO
INlHf AIOMK1MRG%A(ZOF
1954.IU OMMWAIION OR OISCIO$URE
10ANYUNAUI!IORUEO
PiRSOHIZPROHIBIZEO.
I WICUS91?1EDc.JBTROLLED
~CLEIR ln?ORRl?lOl
sol MU PUBLICDIss&N1#AT1O1 I
lhl.uthO,iSd ..bj.ct to .1?11 .“4 c,M1os1
di.,mln.ti.”
. ..ct%m. tmn MB or w. hto.ic rn*.sJ Ad .1 1954,
..d.r m..
.. ...nd.d(42use2W8).
? “~
pa, COntstn “n@*s*trl.d
subj..~
COr.troll.d mcl.mr int.lntton
*.S9ction !49 .1 m. &@81e RI.*8Y Ad .1 !9S4
B-3
DOD-STD-OD 10OD (AR)
B1. 5 Location of Security Markings on Drawings. Security notations; i.e.,

espionage special security, and downgrading notes shall be Dlaced above the
title block on classified drawings. Security classification shall be located
within the body of the drawing above and below the microfilm arrows. See
FIGURE B-1 . For the location on roll size drawings, see FIGURE 52.
..
~———-_
1-
I
L—_?__
FIGURE -1. Location of Security Markings on Drawings
onRmn$t $IK
7
-----
\
;
U4
1
I suvam mmms I
I I
1,
I i ~L--_.J
mu BL6CR
-
Lp!m!.m I $Cnnm
I Ssomln
_ ly~
‘“ 4 on!masc >
SIDI
FIGURE B-2. Location of Security !larkingson Roll Size Drawings
B-4
B1.6 Location of Security Markings on Associated Lists. Security

classification shall be centered outside the border at the top and bottom of
the lists. Security notes shall be placed as shown on FIGURES B-3 and B-4.
.—. --—————
FIGURE B-3. Location of Security Markings on Associated Lists
rm~r=.q
——.&-”-—-
-. —-----
-------- w
“.”
-----
“.
,.
?zns -.”
.,”,. .
”-.
.
..”..!
.“T7.“$
.
-,.
.
-,.-
..-,
. . . . . . -
““-
!.””.s
-
.
..-
m
..”.-
‘5-’ . . . . — -
-
;~ :
u“ . --.,.
,,.,. . . . . ..
,,!.’.. . .. .
~,.: ..,,,.
.,”,,
. . .
,,.. -,,.. m-.,. “.?,,.
w.. . . .. . m.”-.,. “-C,,.
~:, ,.,,c., “,-,. “a,,,.
:.-,,..,, .
.,.”,. ., -,, w “n!
~
.,,,.,
.,,,..
.!0,..
..,., ,
..,,
“,.
-,,.. ..{,,.
.,,. cc.,,,, .
.1..
“,., -. s
... ”. “...., -
.“,.., C.-.,. -
~:,,
.!. ,“,-.
. ..”.. ‘,..”. :
*=..
~-- ,----- ----- — — -------------

1
L.––--___
“ . “ .--,.
FLrnF__n-___J----_-__J
.,, . .,.,-. ”, -, . -,,-.,, . . SUln,- ●,)..,
C=ZEE”EI
FIGURE S-4. Location of Security Markings on Computer Generatad

Associated Lists
B-5
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
B1. 7 Location of Security Markings of Book-Form Drawings. Security

❑arkings shall be placed on pages containing classified information.
..
security notes shall be placed above the title block. Securitv
classification shall be placed at top of pages. Place the foliowing note on @
the cover sheet. “COVER SHEET IS UNCLASSIFIED WHEN SEPARATED FROM SHEETS
(Lkt 011 C%s#ied Sheet AbJ ‘ See FIGURE B-5.
T
!...=
.“
.“,.. . . -
!.
~- r
I—-_-d
=m. ——
1 ..- m,.-1”. -,
““
1
,
) I I 1 1 I 1 , 1 1 r ! 1 1 1 ) 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 # 1 I 1 1 I , 1 r 1
-.
.-
“.- “.
.“,
t
,
1 , 1 1 t 1 1 r I 1 1 1 i 1 I
1 1 1 1 ,
PART m -- —. —- ——— —— ---—---

—- .-—
-#a------ . I 1 1
I L?—”—-!?
~%
L_-–-——=—-–.--–––
I r——
.L
. --
r -m
I
, ,.- ●
FIGUBE M. Iacatlon of Security Markinga on Sook-Form Drawinga
B-6
B1.8 Regrading Classification. Documents shall be regraded by lining out

classification and related notea. The current classification shall be placed
ad Jacent to the previous clasaif ication. The reclassification action
e constitutes a change; therefore, an applicable entry in the revision block In
accordance with Chapter 500 is required. See FIGURE B-6.
—.-
MJI&WiM&.
ord--L c~ll&~
I Utwnnr
Mwlm
-- “L ———— -
_&s8t?iu110#=
+i i i iXi
FIGURE B-6. Regrading Classification Location
,B-1
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
B-8
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
APPENDIX C
INTERPRETATION OF DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING
c-1
D~D-STD-OOIOOD(AR)
—
.—
t . 1 v 1 .
i
C-2
APPENDIX D
SAMPLE DRAUIIIGS
, I 1 i ,
I 1
“,”,,,..,
-,,,”, .,,,..,,.. ,.. ,.. a, s
140TC, I
. .. .-. _ a ,0 m,
WCCTW W C= w .. _., mm
MCCIC+I c+ S,RAm .,._ w, mm
mu c+ STRAW u, 237 REV -
~ 14A1, RI AL, .,.+,, s,”,., S, EEL, SPEC 00-,.470. T,Pf w [m,—_
.
,... . . . . . .
., .-.,
L#OA~CO~RL
. . . . .
>>,, L[W3T” cf_,700
5SLD 16%1 “ C+_ S30
““”Bsc R-LB*LAu
8S, -.,0, LB
,630 LB / N IW
c
.
\
PART NO. f
-,.. -.! ,.. . -Lo”::r,.:i:-,.w.::. ,m,..,, -, . ,W .,,,,,,,
“o,,. !,,,
!.,...C,, a. ‘o.l..er..
! .,.- . . ...
,.
M,.. . . .!,,.. -...,
.
,.,..,. ,-,7
-..- ,-..
.=.,.,
.“,..,- -~ - ..,, ,..” C.,w.“”...,
I 0..,, ,W,., ,,-,,
FIGURE D-1. Spring, Compression
This sample drawing i.einformational only and complete to the degree neceseary
to Illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform to
the textual requirements eet forth in thie standard.
●
D-2
“*W.-A:” —- -- —
.
.
.--”
i--
.,- -. . --
-- ..,.” 01361 123xXXXZ

.-
I ,-” f,.”
t
FIGURE D-2. Assembly (with Find 31mbers)
Tliissample drawing is informational only and complete to the de~ree neceessry

to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual f ormet and drawin8 shall conform to
●
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AS)
& s-OJsnuLu*.
a-s-uwz.
cmwn.1”
W?t 1. M .
s.uc’s%a
w.mmm Gaa91c.uc6al18u E
SauM m,mil ,. m,” al..
r-l
—-
*+ —
u-
—..
—
.._ +
—.. ““0’
●
pART No.
-...
-..-— .!. -..-. . . . . . ‘-!-. -. .- .s-,.
---- ------
:- ,..m ,-
,, ; . .
+
-
-—- -.” . . . .
———
FIGURE &3. Spring, Compression
to illustrate ● type of drawin8. Actual fonriatand drawing shall conform to
the textual requirements ●et forth in this standard.
D-4
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
1 * I 8 i * I ‘1 I
.,”,,w~_
-,,., “,,.. !.. 0.. ,-..,, —
WTm
1. APPUC49LE STANDK+U9 SPfC,F,C,TW. ,., .-

&, Do. .S,o.cmwmm
B, Am, “,,.,.4982
t. HEM lRUIMEM STRESS RELIEF> AWE* FMUWfO,

BAKE FOR 30 MIMJTES Al S?5. ? *2$-F,
3. rl.b, PROTECT,% ml% $,,2.3 OF hllL.m.,7t,

A, IH!CKMESS .C.2D2., M,
B. EMB.W1lLEMENI NELIEf 375W*-P FOR
3 DOmS MINIUUW WTER PLATINO,
C, MME IISONAL L)M#T$ DliO LObO REQJIRCUE~
AF?L” TO SMIN6 W,,” CAOMIUM K,lC
w’
Y?M DAM
mu rm v am LE, T W
,,,,, ccl,. ,, m“
lMmlz AT “r., mwm _ —.213LB N ,.ZLON
maul *r ~N4L POw+-— ——3#, A*.A* .3 LO M
C+FLEC1ON wnwix w_________
c4uKTm c= Ww WC? Wlox -. Km,,- ?m
CPRMG.11, —047mJ. /or.m,
PART NO,
“r. ..-.! .- .
-.!., ——— ‘-w. w.”:::.%::” ‘-.”.” -’” ‘“- ““”,’.
.:.:. . . ..— —. .—-: :?”.%’ ~ ?%,, ‘-’””c’-

,,, ..__. _ . . . .
. . ._
-—. .—-— ..— ,,
~;:~~
., . . . . ... . -::. .
T: ,, -- ~:, .. ...0 -.., .,,. ---
“,. .,,. ..-. —...

- .w-~ -*— ..!, . . . . . . .. .
.“, =.,- ,..,, 1“.,! .? I.w
L I
FIGURE D-4. Spring, Torsion
.- ,’ -. ,
IIIiS sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree ,:,.,,
necessary to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing, i.
c-5
FIGURE D-5. Radioactive material drawin~

D-6
I ● I I
.
t
Q!-wwn /fno.Tcnf W?-_
—.. D
‘ wlz-l’ ~.,
’ ””: :=7...
~:;’cy” “’-’’”’”
1
I
I . . . . . .. . I
..... ..-
““
-.- ...
..
.
:_,JL;~ .,,,
I
..w
. ..
““””-””
I ““”’
.,- .-..., -—;,,,,_. ~,
““”’”
-m
.! ,,.,,
FIGURE D-6. Interface control drawing
This sample. drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessary
to illustrate a typa of drawing. Actual
format and drawing shall conform to
the textual requirement aet forth in this ●ta,ndard.
D-7
FIGURE D-7. Electronic Assembly (with IiardnessCritical Items)
This sample drawing is informational only and complet,e to the degree

D-8
DOD-STD-0010OD(AR)
o
!s
,
FIGURE D-8. Apparatus List
This sample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree necessary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and dravlng ehall conform CO
D-9
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
0
II* I
g,
This sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree neceaaary
the textual requiremante aat forth in this standard.
D-1o
DOD-STl)_OO10OD(AR)
II 1:1--–-–1 --l—-’
_pF7y
FIGURE D-10. Altered item drawin~
: This sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree

D-n
●
APPLICATION REvls80Mn
,,,, ,’,, “,tb 09 L’IU
NOTES: -
1. APPLICABLESTANOARDS(SPECIFICATIONS:
A. 00D-STD-00100D(
AR)
.9. ANSI Y14.5M-1982
c. MIL-T-23991
2. ALL COORDINATED334ENS1ONS
ARE BASIC.
3. ALL HOLES (REGARDLESSOF SIZE) ARE[+I O.olo@lxl Y{.
nrv
wm.T
mm - - - - - -
slam 1 2 3 4 5 6
REVSIAIUS REV
w Snrrls SHEET
PART NO.
.,. A cO”T”ae, ““”mu 0s mow Acnvnl
mlLEss O1”cnwl*, ,Plx,,lcm
00”E”SW”* &“,? lMlllo”*,
CoMlnAovon
~yncn:c[; &
,* DRAW” ,, OA,’t . . ..e+u
D“AW!JIO A?movu
U?L Ellaa
I .Ss,a” AUnevu
FIGURE D-n. Printed wiring hole location drawin&
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format end drawing ehall conform to :
tha textual requiramenta eet forth in thie etandard.
D-12
/. ■ +” “.
,+..+o””an”.
“’”-p .— .+:
. 8+ . ,.
+*-$--V- J“i- ‘+...”. :
,A,..&..+ ”+” , +. .+- ,
.*“
*-
.“” ,+ #
+- -i.= ● +
———= %._ .
.+., . .,
‘.”*.
. .+, +
‘. +.+
+. ..+
■
&’
.“+ :+..
“’. .”
.
‘“
,
●
●
.
.4.
:++*
+ * .-” *+* +=* ■ -.$...A”’+.-,+s+
.
.J.L— — .-*1
-.
, :+7 .+ .$ . ** +<:., ,+, + ● +
~
..” -a .“.O...—
-
‘- .
,,~+“.+’
,“-
..+ * .“..+
.t—
- .’———+ +$--- ,
,g +,\ : “.,t
y .“ .l. + +x * 4 *+. . .
Y . . + +‘A. .%
+.. ● ‘● ‘:#-. ‘*” “
“ —%4.4.:%.-*L”2A%.%+- #tn+AAm” .“
c1 .!s . . . .
Lx
, x
DRILL D9T0 T!2ELE

,,”01.OR SIZE 07, PL., INC
!$’
+ ..,, * .**, S,,
“Es
w .,3, !:::: e,,
e .,,, ,.,,, 4 “o
mx .,,. ,.,,, 2
,.. TrLE
l“’ ,,-
1 F!EWSJON LEVEL a
FIGURE D-11. Printed wiring hole location drawing (tint’d)
● fife sample drawlns is informational only and complete to the degree neceees~”
to illustrate A type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform to
the textual requiramenta aet forth in this ctandard.
C-13
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
FIGURE D-11. Printad wiring hole location drawin& (Catrd)
This sample drawing fe informational only and complete to the degree necer.saryT
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform “to ,,2
the textual requirements set forth in this ntmdard.
●
..
~$
D-14
DODATD-00 10OD (fLR

)
f’j
,.
printed wiring hole location drawing (ContSd)

FIGURE D-1 1.
~is @emple drawfng is infotmntional only and complete to the degree neceeeary
to”illustrate ● type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform to
the textual requirements aet forth in thie standard.
D-15
11.E WE eAGE Cooe

[
1’‘ 1
I REVISION
LEVEL I 1- 5
FIGURE D-11. Printed wiring hole location drawing (tintSd)
~is mample drawing ia informational only and ctiplete to the degree neceaamy
to illustrate ● type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform to ;
J
tha textual raquirementa ●et forth in this standard.
,,
D-16
IX)D-STD-001 OOD( AR)
FIGURE D-11. Printed wiring hole location drawing (tinttd)
*
!fhissample drawing IS informational only and complete to the degree neceaeary
D-17
DODSTD-DO 10OD (AR)
w 1
n. “,,-
WTK+ .,.,,., “W,- .. . . . . . —
,.
$
.=
FIGURE D-12. Specification control drawing
,.
,.
This sample drewing is informational only and c~plete to the degree necesemyf
to illustrate a type of drawing, Actual formet and drawing ehall conform to %
tha textual requiramente aet forth in thie ●tandard.
D-18
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(M)
.,.,,,M,
-,,
,., ......- ,..
..-,—
NOICSJ
APmKA@l.c STWC6 /aKcmuTm
A -. STD-9UW D (AR)
Onl.lrl Aa- Roam lam m.

m 10 TIB8 ,lSW
SLlmsrm mm(s) w Sk-t”
,,,1 NO ,Om;y ,W ,W :,~a gk,,e,,m

y+z, ~ ~,”
- - IL%%:%=%%
~y . . ,=~ l=%-!%% ,,
SFfCIFICATIONCC+4TROLCRAWING PART NO. mWXX?.6

.—. -. .&.=&.-.””:. -...! .—”. “- =!””.
-.!., 1
.. ,-,...s4, “ ----
. ..’. .- ,,
. .
.
.
-.. q,
“...x,-
,,,
t
FIGURE D-13. Specific.ationcontrol drawing
This sample drawing io Informational only and complete to the degree necessary
D-19
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
-.
PART 0.
-C..-.L
“m.,..
.-’ co ~:.”..~-,.r””m”...c.:o.m,..c! -. ~- ~,!,,,
j,: — !m,..w,, ~ -,”< !-

—. .—.. :.-. , ..-
“ “,.. ,. .,,,.. -..:
.
,...,. ,-,.
a..- —.., .. . r.- -
FIGURE D-14. Radioactive assembly drawin~
This sample’ drawing is informational only and complete to the degree ~

necessary to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing $
D-2(I
. .
ND-STD-00 10OD(AR)
1 . 1 . 1 1 1 I_
“.-
-,,”, . ..c-- W. . . ..-
.,
7—--”-;
1,1 ! I
S&
~
Em-m
‘6?
s --, ,.-. —..
M!”CAT Al IWOW IZH ~ WC M.
*.,SC lcMmnArmE 10 *m.r
*Z9P DND
mm u “CM Mmn noun, OJEllCll ❑ ❑ L.
-C lEME. FOR TW IICURS (EAUITCWR CICLCl
‘M I!ARONES$ SPEC~CD SOAK Al-IDO-fFM TWO IUJRl
OETmrEN mu 7EMER CYCU
WEc U1-w-un A$?Lu.
---s=.--” —— “-“-
. .
.
. -. . --
I 1
.,
i
FIGURE D-15. Involute Spline Data Drawing
l’hissample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessary

to illustrate a typa of drawirig. Actual fomat and drawing shall conform to
the tewtual requirements eet forth in this ●tandard.
D-21
OOD-STD-OOIOOD(AR)
..
I L m,.., ,,Amms- ii
tircmld
-.” ..- -.. --- .- a,”..

-— ..-,
. . ,.— . —.
. ..C. ,-
. .
D “.. “ “#—
.
. . -
.
.- -. - . “-.
-- ..- ----
I ,-,. ,-
FIGURE D-16. Spur Gear Data ~aiting
I%ia sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessa~
to illustrate a type of drewirig. Actual format and draving shall conform to
the textuel requirementa eet forth in this standard.
D-22
...
.. .
●
✼✎
)
PART NO.
,. ~-., .- . -,,,
“-.,., -— .s...”, “,,...
,. .-., ‘-!..,! -. ..- .C!m!.
,a,.. ~. - -...-, -
, .,” ,.q
——- ——— ,.
.
-~{~ . ----
..*:*. ,- “T,m .- . . . — -— —
FIGURE D-17. Spur Gear Data Drawing
lhis sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree

D-23
I)OD-STD-OO1OOD(
AR)
WC*
,. m-
Swxn lIU owns I* IN IN ,tnbwo

Cwnm- CYUIAIE MU-UN 9ur urn
Umlmwmm”b TERmm
. . . .
M .hxlMm IllImmlffi mu
-R.TM SKUD E+ 2S7
SLOW T* .Wtw SW*IEO
cm Wcc”,m r[w+eAnnL
w sm.. HAMS, CR m
“ITRICCD c—,
●
8 ,~ CtAS% # “IWC.L ,x KUWIC
C-ML, 6f worm As Cwm+mn
MAW mmm Wlw.mm
“, “,,.(,1% mwm,,m Wml a
,amuu w @m.
m To,& C&s ,sfPrm
w 91T1CE IumKs.
c. ma CL,,, # “Imm, ,- ArR,cmt Q
Imlmla ,s L !SIW IN USz?m
SULL 6% Smc.lul m 1. C—T
mbwnc
6. U.mm w mmctmu cawnc ICAT
?
TRm,m”, RKwwK”ls.
-.0
%wmxr.’%s “-’”-’ - -- “-’
,-,.-,
s. - -”-,~
“
. . .. -,. .“. . .
“., ,W .! ,“..
FIGURE D-18. General requirements drawing

necessary to illustrate a type of drawing.
Actual format and drawing
shall COnfOrIn to the textual requirements set forth in this standard.
D-24
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
4
I s 1 z I I
., “WC-a
loll% -.,,., “K..,. - ,.. --.., —
1. APPLE*CU Srmmmw,tx-mt$
: ~fo,05mMmmmm
z.-a N1fRFAcr mm
,,.::!::-:::] k ‘E.t
●
E- Ez+ E-
Jg+
*- *
INTERFACECCNTRC’ACR/%lNG
APPRW2.LSLOCM a,,, .!!.- ---- —, - . . ..-
I “—= - “ -- ..-,
—,. —
e- s-
.,
-nut.. ..” “ .!—!
-6... ,,
.- -. . --
--.,, + mm. ~ ~ . .. .. .. . ..- . . —
----- I .,., ,- “ ,..,.
+ 1
FIGURE D-19. Interface control drawin~
●
Th’iasample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessary
C-25
a I , i * I .,”,. -,_ ‘
coma: -,,., ““..,”— h. . . . . .
1. APPUCABLE SIASDASOS/SPECIPICATIDBS
PART NO.
- ., -,,-- . . .. ...-, ““.. -,..., - .- “-.
---
,.,-, “ ---
,..” ..- -“
,,.
. ,
:ti ~!.-~ .-, ___ “,, ,- .- —.

“.,..,.. 1 “,.. ,-, .! ,“, !
*
FIGURE D-20. Photo assembly drswing
This sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degrae neceaaary
D-26
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR )
t APWCAEH STbNDARD1, 8PECIFIC.1WN3

b. oOD.sm+080mun1
s. ANSI T14.5 U-1982
,. mm, lm”xxm INTO Izsxxmr as SHww
REWCRKL7WWTWG
PART NO. (23,x.x7 WTiR RCWORIL

“...-.! .. . l,. ““,, ! .,”..,. .. . . . . c-!... ! -. ..- .=!.-.
-,. !.. s- mm. . . . . “ e ”.
. . . . . . ...1. -,..~~-
.::. _____ ——— -—— :- - - :-. =
— -—.
. .. . . . ..!, <..”..,
——.
,“ .— 0...,. .... ..
& ..- . . . m..w -.., .,,. . .
,“.,,.,~ :.,, ~._~._ ..= ~ — ..m. .?”.,.,

,“,.. !- .a.,, ,-, . 1-!.
T -1
FIGURE D-ZI. Rework drawing

shall conform to the textual requlrementa set forth in this standard.
D-27
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
, I s 1 1
1 ,
.~,u,_
-,,., “=”,-
k.. . . . . —
MI
AR.WmA. ILw .u2!m?..lLl3.@ @
●
1~”-lN%%WM230,3t,.,,O.O~
q-l
\.
‘Am WIRE. 140t04,,u .to.,~
,2
Cc+oacrm 422,””2
AR. RoD. #72xx”3
PART NO.
-.”-.! . .,
-s., -A-+zr.-.w ~-!..~, -. ---,-,
i ,.”..”, “ -!..o!-
,..” ,..M
~; —. .- ___
‘w ‘
.
_“,!&,, . —.$s?= ..!, ,-

..””. - . . . ...
1 ,,., ,W, ” ,“.,, ,
FIGURE D-22. Cable asaembly drawing

D-28
~D-.STD-OO 10OD(AR )
o
4 I a i * I
-,,., “,,”,,?.
“w,,. ~,_ ___ ‘
,H”,. -u, _
,..
yuwwomma ‘-- aJwmwaz7
PART NO.
----- .- w . ..&..-_.-_-cLy .e,.,e, -,. ~- ~,”,,.
-..,
,q,.-,, ,..=
,.K - =.!.. o,-
,.
., H... . . .,,,.. -..,
.
,...,. —- ,“., r
. . . . . .. .,,, a.
-.,...:, ...-”..= _ ,— .,- —.,
. ..w..m ,..,, ,.”! .! ,= ~
FIGURE D-23. Modification drawing (before)
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual formet and drawing ehall conform to
the textual requirements aet f;rth in this etandard.
D-29
DOD-STD-OO1OOD(AR)
PART NO.
..0..-.! .- “. -,,,
-.!.. -..”...!.!...“.
!,..H.,
. . . . . .-,..., -,. .- ..,.,,,
-— !m..”e., ~ -!..,!=.
.:.:.___ .“.- :.-
:,:
. —. ——. ~=,, p.’--- ...
,.=,. ,-,.
.
. .— C...- —.., .,,,, --
FIGURE D-24. Codification drawing (after)
This ample drawing fe informational only and complete to the degree necessary
. the textual requlrementa aet forth in this standard.
D-30
, I , 4 , I
-. ,.,._—---s.:M____
“.-!- ,.”,..
._
-, -
._
DLTfllCD IUIM 013,W,h,G PART NO.84XXXX5
IQ :
..-.
-.,..
-. -,.,
-- .,..-”..-, .“ ‘. . . e..,.., —
,a....” , ~
,..”
.,
>..C.
e-,”.!-
-- -!..,!.
A ,-,,
.. “..66, .,,,.. -.,
,“=,. -,.
-- —.. . . .
.,! ..,, [ --- 84 XXXX5
“.,, ,- .- .-.” ~
“..e!- 1 ... ,-! .!
.
FIGURE D-25. Altered item drawin~
l%is sample drawifigis informational only and c,ompleteto the degree necessary
%o illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform to
D-31
DOLLSTD-001OOD(AR)
b“
s
.!25
C-5
27E-UO
-+
IWO ITCMDRLwNG
-.”.1..-”....:. w!..’, - ----
l_
..”..0.,
!. .-,. ---
,- ,-
.,
, 1
.
,.”,.
.
.- —. . .-
-., “., -. “m,-
I
.- . . 1
,-., ,..-
*
FIGURE D&?& Altered item drawing
This aemple drawing ia informet ional only and complete to the degree neceaaa~
to.illustrate a tgpe of drawing. Actual format and drawing ehall conform to ~
the textual requirements eet forth in this etendard.
D-32
O
.*\. , $
1 t
m
I
. ...!-
.,
.!.,: s~l.__,
l.. ,=..”1
—
I
MOWS,
.
.
‘o “,,.. =.,
.“-. !..
,,.$ .
SCLECTEDITEM DRAWING
““”:!”:::,~::rm..wc::..- ....! -.
OW!”.,a
PART NO, 84 XXXX3
.- .=!-!.
pj
~ ____ ---”: , r.”
,.. . - -——- :..”
- . . ..
. ,,,:-=; -— ;~_~i
L ——.. .___ _ .---- ~44xxx,
—
== Ti- .~..::.. _~._. ..,,
., ,W -. . “..S.”
K.,,,
.4 ..”.. !- ,-! .! 1.-..
I
FIGURE IQ7. Selected item drawin~
l%ie sample drawing”is infom’tional only and complete to the degree neceaeary
●
D-33
DOD-STD-001 OOD(AR)
●
✍✍
, I 1 1 # I I
.,,,-
✎
-,,., . . ...!- ,=. ,_. _, _
mm:
t awucamt SrANMos,sPtcl,cArm
a. DoD.sm.mcw (ml
0, 4?6, “,4,514-,9Q
J l-m
I ●
Q
ALTERED ITEM DRAWING PART NO, 84 XXXX2
-“::.#..”.mtic::, m!..., -. “- ~,m,,
..,...!.,
-...,
..”0.
%
::,,.””,,, ~ -.!”e!m
, ..S,
.,
. — ~~~z
.,,, -- ,4X,X,,
“.. ,.,. —-l .,., ,.” “..-
mm.!- 1 ..,. .~
T
FIGURE D-28. Altered item drawing/part controlled by Source Control Drawing”
This aemple drawing ia informational only ●nd complete to the degree neceaaary
to illustrate ● type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall conform to
,T
s
.?
●
D-34
.,!
\b
~is sample drawfng is informational only and complete to the degree necessary
D-35
, I , 1 * I ,
00,”: -It., ..”!-.,.,,,-, ,..-..,,— 1.
, .m.m,,,--m#Ic*,m
.* -.,.0----
U,I,WM.MI
,. .,*,-C - P.n.Gm.”! }...s .-. m. Mi.mt ml..- ,
(iJW.ux’ma .“r-9nl. .. K“DC, -c+
u-m - .,s w . -W” . u!.,”.
O-r. 0’.-~-rm “ul -M*

<*..,,”,
--~-.,-
. <au,-, - < em
-
. . , ,— .,7” ~..anu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ----
.,cca.utt .1!. R ..4,,,, m
m.,ro.!aa /
. . WI.@ ●
-,,s
--
.!....
.m. . . . .-!”,!
. . . . . -. -- -.-!0.
e. -,--
-.,.,
.. ,- ,.-
.=
!.,-,
,
.
. . ...--.. - .-
.,! “.. -. -,,,-
FIGURE D-30. Wiring diagram
~is sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessary
the textual requirements eet forth in this standard.
c-36
APPESDII E
REVISION OP DSAUIliGS
..-
E-1
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
APPXSDIX E
RXVISIOM OF DRAWIUOS
1. This appendix defines the requirements for identifying the location of

and recording revisions on drawings. Optional methods are described;
however, use of any method shall be only as directed by the Government Design
Activity responsible for the data bases of the commodities involved.
2. lhe methods define the requirements for recording revisions:
a. Prior to establishment of the Allocated Baseline
b. Prior to implementation of Formal Engineering Change Control, either

by Contractor or Government.
c. After a or b or both abcve but prior to establishment of the Product

Saseline.
d. After establishment of the Product Baseline.
e. After acquisition of data in as-is condition from other sources.
3. General Rules.
a. Only drawings that are associated with an Allocated Ccnf Iguration

Identification shall be identified and Allocated Baseline released.
b. Formal Engineering Change control usually applies for data

representing the approved DT/OT II configuration.
c. All drawings shall be identified with Product Baseline release.

,. (formally identified as Production or Initial release. )
d. The only form authorized for use as a “revision authorization

document” is DD 1695, Notice of Revision (NOR).
e. Revision letters subsequent to Prcduct Baseline releaae shall be in

accordance with paragraph 503.2.
E-2
d)
o
APPENDZX E (Cent’
4. Method A. (FIGURE E-1)
a. This method utilizes the “X” revision letter system for recording
revisions. ltX$ ( ZERO) n is the first entry applied when the drawing is
prepared. ‘XAt!, ‘XBit, etc. , are used for revisions up to PRODUCT BASELINE
release. At Product Baseline, the revision symbol shall be a dash ‘-n.
Subsequent to Product Baseline. the first revision shall be ‘lA!!, the next
‘Bn, etc.
. “-; b. The method of recording changes shall be:
(1) For changes prior to Formal Engineering Change Control:
>*
A. Enter next sequential Revision letter starting with ‘XA1i.
B. Enter a brief description of the change(s) in the

description block. Include Zone location, if applicable, in appropriate
column.
c. Approval date and signature shall also be entered.
(2) For changes starting with and subsequent to Formal Engineering

Change Control and prior to Product Baseline:
A. Enter next sequential “X_l! Revision letter.
B. Enter NOR number and NOR approval date.
c. Revision approval date and signature ehall also be entered.
.NOTE: Zone indication shsll not be made.
(3) For Product Baaeline release:
A. Enter dash ‘!-n rev iaion symbol.
B. Enter Engineering Release Record (ERR) number..
c. The revision approval date shall be the date on which the

drawing is annotated for Product Baseline.
D. Enter approval signature.
E-3
APPENDIX E (Cent’d)
REVISIONS
m] DESCRIPTION DATE &m4mti ~~
0 (2 ERo)I
A DIM. ,07 +,06 ADDED 77-06-01 —
B NOR W7T3026 77-09-16 77-10-25 —
:CNOR W7T2037 ‘77-1 I -22 77-12-03 .
_ PRODUCT BASELINE
ERR W7T2122 78-02-14 —
4 NOR A8A2594 78-10-20 78-11-02 .
B NOR A9A2404 79-01-03 79-02-12 —
FIGURE E-1. Example of Recording Revisions”in Accordance with -D A
9
E-4
APPENDIX E (Cat’ d)
● 5. mTHOD B. ( FIGURE E-2)
a. This method is the same as METHOD A except when the drawing is used
for the ALLOCATED BASELINE, it shall be annotated. l%e next sequential ‘X_n
Revision letter shall be used for this releaae.
.+?
.‘% REV161VNS
●
2 ,,
\
. .
.-.
FIGURE 2-2. Esemple of Recording Revisions in accordance ulth MEfllODB
E-5
6. METHOD C. (FIGURE E-3)
a. This method utilizes Revision letter “A” for the first drawing
change, then ‘Bvt, ‘Cvt, etc. , for subsequent actions. For Product Saseline.
the Revision symbol shall be a daah “-”. Revision letters for subsequent
changes shall be the next sequential letter.
b. The method of recording the description of change shall be the same

as for METHOD A.
% -.
c. When existing drawinga are acquired on which revisions were
identified by this method, i.e., ‘A’! for first revision, then ‘Btt etc. ,
subsequent changes shall be identified as follows: ‘.
●
(1) Changes prior to Product Baseline shall continue to be

identified sequentially.
(2) Product Baseline release shall be identified by the next

sequential Revision letter.
(3) Subsequent changes shall be identified by the next sequential

Revision letter.
REVISIONS
ONE LIR DESCRIPTION )ATS (YSWO*A) APPRoveo
D8 A ADDED QAR NOTE 34-02-10 —
INC ADCN IQ3.645
B7 1) ADDED ‘@”
B
lff,&jNp?&
C4
A6 3) 62Aa WAS ‘3’ IN DIAGRA~ B4-03-01 ‘—
c ADDED PARA 9 IN NOTE 2 B4-04-23 —
D PRODUCT BASELINE
ERR FOM K2650 B4-09-O 2—
D8 I ADDED NOTE 10
c6 E J DIM 1,25 WAS 1.30
FOM K3025 84-10-I 2 —
FIGURE E-3. Example of Recording Revisions in Accordance with UEIROD C
‘0
E-6
APPEHDII’E (Cent’d)
O 7. METHOD D.
a.
(FIGURE E-4)
This method requires drawings that are released for Product Baseline
and show no record of previous revision actions. The Product Ssseline
release shall be the first entry in the revision block. Subsequent changes
shall be identified with Revision letter starting with ‘! Ati, then “B’!, etc.
b. Normallv. this method is used for in-house actions. and when no

formal records ;;e maintained in any database (Government or Contractor) for
.- previous changes.
,..
_ PRODUCT BASELINE
ERR WOS2345 80-06-12 —
A NOR W2S2569 73-07-23 73-12-22 —
B NOR W4S2922 84–03-15 84-10-13 —
●
!’
k.
..
-a
FIGURE E-4. Example of Recording Revisions in accordance with 14ETHODD
E-7
APPENDIX E (tint’d)
8. METHOD E. (FIGURES E-5a and E-5b)
a. This method provides for adaptation of existing data where revisions

are identified numerically rather than alphabetically.
b. Subsequent reviaiona shall be identified as follows:
(1) For changes prior to Formal Engineering Change Control:
A. Enter next sequential Revision number.
B. Enter a brief description of the change(s) in the

description block. Include Zone location, if applicable, in appropriate .--,
column.
c. Approval date and signature shall also be entered.
(2) After delivery of data, prior to recording in databaae and prior

to Formal Change Cxntrol, drawings shall be identified with “X$ (ZERO)n
Revision letter and approval date and signature. This procedure shall apply
only if not establishing the Product Baseline. If establishing Product
Baseline, enter dash “-”, Revision symbol, etc., in accordance with Para b(4)
below. See FIGURE E-5b.
(3) For changes starting with and subsequent to Formal Engineering

Change Control (See FIGURE E-5a):
A. Enter sequential “x “ Revision letter, starting with ‘XAN.
Q
B. Enter NOR number and NOR approval date. \
>
.,
NOTE: Zone
c. Revision
indication shall
approval
not be
date
made.
and signature shall also be entered.
.
(4) For Product Baseline release:
A. Enter dash “-” revision symbol.
B. Enter Engineering Releaae Record (ERR) number.
c. The revision approval date shall be the date on which the

drawing is annotated for product Baseline.
D. Enter approval signature.
E-8
DOD-STD-001 OOD(AR )
B7 [ I I ADDE D ‘JO6+1O2”. “.17 +,01”

1 t : z ------ -------- ,. ----- . I 1
z NUI b Z HLMUVtV 15LP bjbl —
3 .HEAT TREATMENT REVISED 101/12 /82 -
x# (Z ERO)I I lR2-0%7
----- —
XA NOR W8T2106 82-06-30 82-07-2; —
XB NOR W8T3225 82-09-07 82-10-IO —,
_ PRODUCT BASELINE
ERR W8T2222 82-11-16 —
A NOR W9T2010 83-02-11 83-03-1 I —
B NOR W9T 3007 83-05-09 83-07-09 —
FIGURE E-5a. Sx.empleof Recording Revisions for Formal Engineering

Change tintrol in accordance with MSTHODE
REVISIONS
137 I ADDED ;06 +.02’, tl? +.01” 12 JUN 80 —

2 NOTE 2 REMOVED SEP 6,81 —
3 HEAT TREATMENT REVISED 01/12 /82 —
_ PRODUCT BASELINE
ERR W8T2222 B2-11 -16 —
,A NOR W9T2010 83-02-1 I 83-03-11 —
B NOR W9T3007 83-5-09 83-07-09 ~
FIGURE E-5b. Sxample of Recording Product Saseline and Revisions in
● accordance with NElllODE
E-9
DOD-STD-001 OOD(AR)
9. METHODF. (FIGURE E-6)
a. This method may be used as an alternative to METHODS A, B, and C for

Product Saselina release.
b. The last revision symbol and date prior to Product Baseline is

carriad over and ahown in the revision block for continuity.
c. This ❑ethod is used when formal records are maintained (Government or

Contractor ) for prevIOUS changes. ..
~ La.&t ReuibLon .$ynbd ptioh Zo Ptodmt Go&%&e
REVISIONS
DEaCRIPTION DATE~-w mm
78-06-12 —
_ PRODUCT BASELINE
ERR A8A2567 78-09-14 “
FIGURE E-6. Example of Eecording Itevisionadn accordance with -D F
E-10
OOD-STD-001 OOD(AR)
10. Manually prepared ❑ulti-sheet parts lists are not required to be

maintained at the same revision level.
<I
FIGURE E-7. Essmple of IlecordingItevisionon manually prepared

parts list
E-II
DOD-BTD-OOIOOD(~)
TtUS PAGE I.SRBIANK Itl~
??
<’
$’
E-12
DOD-STD:OO1OOD(AR) ‘
APPSSDIX F
COID40NLYUSED CAGE CCIDSS
,.,. .
F-1
I
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
APPSSDII F
COM14011LTUSED CAGs COD=
CAGE TYPICAL DOCUMENT

Code PROPONENT AGENCY IDENTIFICATION PATTERNS
10060 National Standards Association NAS XXXX

NAS XXXX-XXXX
21450 Army Weapons Command, Rock Island BAOX2

DTDX1
80204 American Natiorial Standards Institute ANSI-SXX .XX

ANSI-BXX ●XX)!
81346 American Society for Testing and Materiela ASI?4-DXXX
81348 Federal Specifications promulgated by J-C-xxx

General Services Administration SW-I-XXX
GGG-P-XXXX
t31349 Military Specifications promulgated by MIL-A-xxx

Military Departments/Agencies MIL-B-xxxx
MIL-C-XXXXX
(DOD-A-XXX )
81350 Joint Army-Navy specifications promulgated JAN-P-xxx

by Military Departments
81352 Air Force-Navy Aeronautical Specifications ANXC-XXX

promulgated by the ,Aeronautical Standarda ANXXXXX
Group ANXXX-SXX
96906 Military Standards r’tsxxxx

Msxxxxx
MIL-STD-XXX
( DOD-STD-XXX)
F-2
0
DOD-STD-DOIOOD (AR)
APPSSDII G
IUITIAL/SIGNATURE REQUIREMENTS
.:
.,, , ,,
,,
$
;. ,’, .
.,. !
G1
DOD-STD-00100D(AR)
APPESDIX G
All
IM131w31GNAnRE REQUIRSHSWTS
documents that represent original drawings shall be initialled/signed

●
by appropriate personnel.
Redrawn documents with same number are considered a revision; therefore,

the original initials/signatures shall be shown as printed reproductions.
Initial original CAD generated drawings shall be initialled/signed in

same manner as for manually prepared drawings. For subsequent generations
prepared by CAD, printed reproductions of. initial slsignatures are acceptable.
For CAD generated microfilm, authentication initials/signatures shall be

provided on the back of the aperture card. Sub sequent rev is ions generated as
microfilms, printed reproductions of Initials/signatures are acceptable. See
FIGURE G-1 for matrix of initial/signature requirements for various versions
of drawings. The same requirements apply for “associated lists.
----
FIGURE G-1. Initial Signature Requirements

OOO-ATO-OO1OOD(AR)
.-,
,.,
APPEWDII H
HARCIffiAWD DISIRIBUTIOIISTATREMTS
POllTECHNICAL ~
.1
.,,
,.
,.
●
H-1
DOD-STD-00100D ( AR)
HI Distribution Statements and Additional Notices. Statements and Notices

shall be in accordance with DoD 5010. 12-M, Chapter 5 and the following:
H1. 1 Assigning Statements and Notices. Assignment of Distribution

Statements and Notices to engineering drawings and associated lists denote
the extent to which they are available for distribution, release, and
dissemination without additional approvals or authorization. Marking of
associated lista shall be based on the content of the list and pot the
classification of the drawing.
H2’ Distribution Statements. The following distribution statements are,

authorized for use on engineering drawings and associated lists.
a. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT A. APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE; DISTRIBUTION

IS UNLIMITED.
b. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT B. DISTRIBUTION AUTHORIZED TO U.S. GOVERNMENT

AGENCIES ONLY [ {i~ in, ZeaAon) [duZc 06 dtiatntina.tion; YR-MO-OA ) . OTHER
REQUESTS FOR THIS DOCUMENTSHALL BE REFERRED TO (inAekt Contiotlllng UOU
o!313ic’z) .
c . DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT C. DISTRIBUTION AUTHORIZED TO U.S. GOVERNMENT

AGENCIES AND THEIR CONTRACTORS ( 6LLLh wAon) (dale O( de.tamimtion;
YR-MO-DA) . OTHER REQUESTS FOR THIS DOCUMENTSHALL BE REFERRED TO h~
contmot%ng Uol) oddlce) .
d. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT D. DISTRIBUTION AUTHORIZED TO THE DEPARTMENT

OF DEFENSE AND DOD CONTRACTORS ONLY ( 6ZL-L in zetion] (dale o{ de.-temn.ina.tion;
YR-MO-DA) . OTHER REQUESTS SHALL BE REFERRED TO (imut Cotioting UCJV
odd.icel.
~
e. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT E. DISTRIBUTION AUTHORIZED TO DoD COMPONENTS
ONLY [6~~~in fieaon) [dafe 0.3 de.twintion; YR-MO-DA ). OTHER REQUESTS -i
SHALL BE REFERRED TO (~NAti contiotinq Doll o~dicel .
DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT F. FURTHER DISSEMINATION ONLY AS DIRECTED r

,./
By ~;nAeJLt contioi?tinq DoD od,$ice) [do.Xe v{ de.temnina.tion; YR-MO-DA] OR

HIGHER DoD AUTHORITY.
g. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT X. DISTRIBUTION AUTHORIZED TO U.S. GOVERNMENT

AGENCIES AND PRIVATE INDIVIDUALS OR ENTERPRISES ELIGIBLE TO OBTAIN
EXPORT-CONTROLLED TECHNICAL DATA IN ACCORDANCE WITH REGULATIONS IMPLEMENTING
10 U.S. C. 140c [date 06 de,tvuminu,tion; YR-MO-UA) . OTHER REQUESTS MUST BE
REFERRED TO [&IAUI cotizofing UOU oIj,ficc) .
H3 Additional Notices. In addition to the distribution statement, the

following notices shall be used when appropriate.
a. All engineering drawings and associated lists that are determined to

contain export-controlled technical data shall be marked:
WARNING ‘THIS COCUMEN7 CONTAINS TECHNICAL mTA

WHOSE EXPORT IS RESTRICTED BY THE ARMS EXPORT
CONTROL ACT (TITLE 22, U.S.C, SEC 2751 ET SEO,) OR
EXECUTIVE OROER ,12470. VIOLATION OF THESE ExPOR7
LAWS ARE SUBJECT TO SEVERE CRIMINAL PENALTIES.
H-2
APPENDIX II(Cent’d)
b. All engineering drawings and associated lists marked with

distribution statements B, C, D, E, F or X shall be marked:
H4 Application (marking) of statement and notioes. Statements and notioea

shall be applied by decals, rubber stamp, or by lettering template.
Lettering shall meet the reproduction requirements of the engineering
J drawinglassociated lists.
H4. 1 Size of lettering. Lettering shall be equal to the size largest”

note lettering on the drawing or associated list.
H4. 2 Color of lettering. All lettering snd notations shall be black.
H4. 3 Location on drawings and associated lists. See Illustrations, H-1

through H-6. ,,
H5 Additional information regarding control cf unclassified Technical Oata

la contained in DoD 5230. 25-PH.
.J
H-3
DOD-STD-OO1OOD ( AR)
●
●
APPLICATION I REvISION$
D2.m?rlon l.m —f—
ncv
911!CT
*W
Snrri
RKV STATUS mm
w W4Crn W41CT
,.
FIGURE H-1 . Distribution Statement location for ‘An size format
l’h~ssample drawing ia info~tional only and cbplete to the degree necessary

to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format snd drawing shall conform to .0
the textual requirements aet forth in thie atsndard.
H-4
OOD-STD-DO 10OD ( AR)
...
17 I
GMEcoDe
I
1
t’ I Rrvnml Lwrl. 1 1-
FIGURE H-2. Distribution Statament location for WAW size

continuation sheet
● Thie sample drawing ia informational only and complete to the degree neceaaary
the textual requirements aat forth in this standard.
H-5
DOD-STD-0010OD( AR)
● 1
.-
1,”, “-!- ,.. -., —
‘:z~t
/~ PART NO.
.-. . -.,—. OrN-. .-,
UW..A—- . . Mlmn
-.,.,
. ..- U..W. WI .-
..,,..- .U1 [“! . Inn
A
b
FIGURE H-3. Distribution Statement location for B size format
TSia sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necesaazy
H-6
-xY.-&- —— ---
FIGURE H-4. Distribution Statement location for C, D, E, F, E and K

size format
l%fs sample drawing is informational only and complete to the degree necessary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actusl format and drswing shall conform to
the textual requiremente eet forth in thie standard.
H-7
V*6* 1*S B W9W*9

?.,,,., D 1,**,*,
1.*.,.* a ,..,,,,
1,..,8, e ?,..?,.
W,,,la @ ,.0.,21
mm.lYb : ;::;:
W*012$
,,,9.,. * ,,2,..,
9$*.**, 9 .51...2
a%,,,,, : ~::
ssrws aae!ln
,,,,,08 ● ,s1,”04 NJCC1lR
$%1..09 ● ,,,,s0, C4JCC11K
8%+099 * ,,.,,,,
a.,,,.l , ●>,,,.,
,9,,,,,-1 e ,s...,,
10413$81 . ,.s,,.,,
Ia+l>sw . ,,,,,,,6
104s%,s1 n Iwlm%v
1*%1*4** o 16311,,, M.ii.cn
10*1 S,%* . ,,,,...s,. “,,,,., ”
10,,,s,, * ,,3, s,., U,,, nt”
Im, ss,l ● ,.,,3,., .,,,1,
1*51SM1 m ,,3, s,s? y:t
l*% IY%,, c 1*31,4.*
19311s65 c ,0s,1565 lows,,.. 09aerla
I u t 1s.. 8 10s8:s,6 cc,,, Um.,eo
10511%.s ● 1.s1>+,, .,.,
I* SI>%19 0 1*41> 51, ●mtsP, ,C41n,m
10$, S%P* ● ,,s,,.,, ‘*” , ● . CO..”cn 1-
:::OW:: ● 10s13419 U-” ,aa: m8P”c”,m
9 1* SB3S1* co.*#
l,s,l ,1. c I*sll*rs SIIIU LO
1,,,,,,, e ,s,,,,,, r.,,, ,,s1”,,
lC>IM,l c ,,,,,,., ,0.,1 ‘y”, C’mmmo
*,., >,.* ● ,,,,3,,, CO*1*
10ss1%,5 c 1951151s Mmc(m
, ---- -— -- --—— --—- ----- ---

1 -.
-- -- I
,, ----- -- —-- ----- ----- ----
,. la - ,, “C*”,SID.U1 . ,,,tm*,E. w, . OP, mm; m . ,U[cllm~vlout
.FIGURE S-5. Distribution Statement location for AIS% prepared parta lists
This sample drawing ie informational only and complete to the degree neceeeary
to illustrate a type of drawing. Actual format and drawing shall confotm to
the textual r’equirementeset forth in this etandard.
H-8
OOD-STD-OO1OOD( AR)
‘i’
..
FIGURE H-d Distribution Statement looation for ❑anually prepared

parts lists
This sampla drawing is informational only and complata to tha degree necessary
to illustrate a ‘typeof drawing. Actual format and drawinS shall conform to
the textual requirements eet forth in this standard.
●
H-9
DOD4TD-OO1OOD(AR )
THIS PAGE LEP1’BLANK INTENllONALIX
H-10
APPSSOIX I
ORDER OF PRECEDENCE FOB SSI.SCTIONOF STAWDARDS MO SPECIFICATIONS
..- .. .x--,-.
,7 ;,,
.-- .. . . .
I-1
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
APPENDIX I
ORDER OF PRSCSDENCE FOR SSLECTION OF STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Standards and specifications shall be selected in the group and subgroup

order of precedence limited to those specified below from MIL-STD-143
(paragraphs are referenced).
Order of precedence:
1. 5. 1.1 Special lists. When determined necessary by the Government

command or agency concerned, listing of atandarda and specifications
.
for special application may be invoked by contractual provisions.
The special lists may also contain documentation that is not in
standard or specification form. Such listings are to be organized
in consonance with the requirements of .thls standard, and when used ●
shall take precedence over the groups listed below.
2. 5.1.2 Group I. Group I ccvera atandarda and specifications

individually listed in the Department of Defeiae Index of Specifi-
cations and Standarda (DODISS).
Subgroups:
a. Coordinated Federal standards and specifications
b. Coordinated Military standards and specification (including

JANa, ANs, and ANDs)
c. Industry standards and speclf ications (e.g., those promulgated

by nationally recognized aaaociationa, committees, and technical
societies) having coordinated status established under Department
of Defense policies and procedures
d. Limited coordination military and interim Federal standards and

specifications issued by the Government command or agency concerned
e. Industry standards and apecif icationa having limited coordination

atatua eatabliahed by the Government ccmmand or agency concerned
under Department of Defense policies and procedure
f. Limited coordination military and interim Federal etandarda and

apecificationa issued by other Government commanda or agenciea
3. 5.1.3 Group II. Group II covers industry standards and apecifi-

cationa promulgated by nationally recognized industry asaociationa,
committees, and technical societies, for which status equivalent to
military documents has not been established and which are not listed
in the GODISS. Ccpies of induetry standarda and apecificationa are
not available from the Government,. and should be obtained from the
association concerned.
4. 5.1.4 Group III. Group III covers Government standards and

apecif icationa other than those of the military and Federal series,
and not listed in the DODISS (e.g. , FAA and NASA specification, etc. ) .
I-2
NOTE: Any Item known. to be in the military supplY system which may not have
been formally designated as a ‘standardm shall be used in preference
to the creation of a new item, subject to approval of the Government
Design Activity, prior to selecting from Group III.
$ “,,
I-3
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
.-;
THIS PAGE LS~ BLANK INTENTIONALLY
r- 1
●
1-4
DOD-STD-001OOD(AR)
IMDR
o Abbreviations,
Acceptance, 790
102, 102.3.3 computer-aided
product
Computer
preparation
definition
prepared
data,
drawing,
of
101.11
101.11.1
Accessory, 700
Additional signatures, 119.4 Configuration Identification, 700
Allocated Configuration Connection diagram, 201.7.2
Identification, 700 Continuation sheeta, 101.1.1
Altered Item, 700 Contour definition drawing, 201.9.16
Orawing, 201.4.4 Contract, 700
Identification of, 402. 10e Contracting officer, 700
.*.
Analog signal processing Contractor, 700
circuits, 112 Control drawing, 201.4
Application block entries, 115 Convention, line, 101.2
1 Approval, Revision, 504. 1.3 Convention, screw thread, 101.7
Approved item name, 301.2 Corner, 700
Architectural symbols, 102. 1.9 Critical safety characteristic, 700
Arrangement drawing, 201.3.8 Critical safety item, 700
Aesembly, 301.4, 700 Correlation drawing, 201.9.14
Drawing, 201.3
Inseparable, 201.3.4 Date
Associated list, 700 Original, 402.17, 700
Identif icatlon of, 402.8 Revision, 504. 1.5
Attachment, 700 Deficiencies, 700
Definitions, 100.1, 201, 301, 401,
Base Line, 700 501. 601, 700
Allocated Base Line, 700 Deacriptioi, revision of, 504.1.2
Functional Base Line, 700 Design
Product Base Line, 700 Activity, 700
Book-form drawing, 201.9.1 Agent, 700
Revision of, 505 Responsibility transfer of. 402.9
Bulk material, 700 Designation, 102
Identification of, 402.16.4 Matched parta, 402. 13.1
Reference, electrical and
Cable assembly drawing, 201.9.6 electronics parta, 102.2.1
CAD drawing signatures, 119.5 Type, 301.3
Certification data sheet, 201.9.13 Detail
Change, 402.15 Assembly drawing, 201.3.1
Multiple, 503.3 Assembly drawing, identification
Rights to data, 503.5 on, 402.11
Classification, security, 105, 303 Part, title, 302. lb
Code identif icatlon, 402.12 Diagram
Number, 402.1, 402.4, 402.5e connection, 201.7.2
Combination of adopted Electrical and electronics, 103.1
items, 201.9.11 Electronic, 102. 1.1
Combination of items, 700 Flowchart, 102. 1.3
Commercial item, 700 Flueric power, 102. 1.4
Commonly used words and Interconnection, 201.7.3
phrases, 117.2 Layout, electrical wiring, 102.1.5
Company standard, 700 Logic, 102.1.2, 201.7.5
J-1
IMD~ (Conttd)
Mechanical achematlc, 201.7.6 Layout, 201.10

One line, 201.7.4 Marine, 201.9.12
Piping, 201.7.7 Matched part, 201.3.7
Schematic, 201.7.1 Materials, 104
Single line, 201.7.4 Modification, 201.9.17
Wiring, 201.7.2 Monodetail, 201.2.1
Digital signal proceaaing circuits, 13 Multi-detail, 201.2.2
Dimensioning and Tolerancing, 101.5 Multi-view, 101.3
Change to, 502.1 Non-part, 700
c
Distribution Statement, 700 Notes, 117
Distribution ,atatemente, 402.23 Number, 401.4, 402.5
Document, 700 Numerical control, 201.9.3
!.
Document identification Optical element, 201.9.4
number, 401.3 Optical system, 201.9.4
Drawing Original, 700
Alte;ed item, 201.4.4, 201.16.2 Package content, 201.15
Application, 201. 1.1 Part, 700
Arrangement, 201.3.8 Photo-asaembly, 201.3.3
Aaaembly, 201.3 Plan, 201.8.2
Sook-form, 201.9.1 Plat plan, 201.8.3
Cable asaembly, 201.9.6 Practices, 502.3
Camouflage basis, 201.11 Printed wiring
master, 201.9.9
Combination of adopted Printed wiring
master pattern,
items, 201.9.11 201.9.8
Construction,
Contour
Control,
definition,
201.4
201.8
201.9.16
Redrawn,
Replacement,
Rework,
119.1.2
700
201.9 .10.2
●
Correlation, 201.9.14 Selected item, 201.4.5
Critical
Dating,
Detail,
Diagrammatic,
Safety
119.2
201.2,
Item,
201.3.1
201.7
402.16.7 Sensitive
402.16.8
Ship equipment,
Site,
electronic
201.8.4
201.9.12
devices,
$.-
Digital form, 201.9 .8.1.1 Size, 101.1
Elevation, 201.6 Source control, 201.4.3, 402.9.1
Engineering, 201.1 Wftware and Firmware Data, 201.16
9
Envelope, 201.4.1 Software Control, 201. 16.1
Erection, 201.8.1 Special purpose, 201.9
Exploded asaembly, 201.3.6 Specification control, 201.4.2
Firmware, 201.16.2 Tabulated assembly, 201.3.2
Format, 700 Tabulated detail, 201.2.3
Format, government, 101.1, 700 Title, 301.1
Formulation, 201.9.15, 700 Title, creation of, 302
Identification, 4?2 Tube bend, 201.2.4
Inseparable assembly, 201.3.4 Undimensioned, 201.9.7
Installation, 201.5 Vehicle (top assembly), 201.13
Installation aaaembly, 201.3.5 Vehicle camouflage pattern, 201.14
Installation control, 201.4.7 Vicinity, 201.8.4
Installation instruction, Wiring harneas, 201.9.5
201.9 .10.3
Interface
Kit, 201.9.10
control, 201.4.6
J-2
Duplicate Original,. 402.24, 700
0
DOD%TD-00 10OD(AR)
IUDEX (Cent’d)
2dge, 700 Identification

Electrical Associated list, 402.8
Magrem, 103 Bulk material, 402.16.4
Reference designation, Code, 402.12, 402.9.3
102.2.1 Cetail assembly drawing, 402.11
Symbols (graphic), 102.1 Find number, 402.11
Wiring symbols ( architec- Formulation, 4Q2. 16.3
tural), 102. 1.5 Group, 402. 16.1
Wiring symbols (graphio), Installation drawing, 402.11
102.1.10 Item, 402.6
Elevation drawing, 201.6 Maintaining design activities
Electronics identities, 402.9.2
Diagrams, 103.1 Material, 402.16
Symbols (graphic), 102.1.1 Multi-detail drawing, 402.11
End-produot, 700 New, 402.14
Engineering Nuclear hardness critical items,
Data, 700 402.16.6
Drawing, 201.1 Number, 401.3
Drawing format, 101.1 On drawings, 402.11
Envelope drawing, 201.4.1 Optional parts, 402.22
Erection drawing, 201.8.1 Parenthetical, 402.11.2
Exploded assembly drawing, Precious metals, 402. 16.5
201.3.6 Processes, 402.16
Exterior corners and edges, 700 Protective treatment, 402.16
Exterior Edge/Corner Break, 700 Reference, 114
Referenced documents, 402.3
First tier, 700 Requirements, 402
Formal Engineering Change Revision, 503.1
Control, 700 Source control drawing, 402.10
Formulation, 700 (Note 2)
Full Scale Development Phase, 700 Specification control drawing,
Funotlonal Configuration Identi- 402.10 (Note 1)
fication, 700 Tabulated drawing, 402.11
Indefinite terms, 117.4
Gears, 101.8 Industry Standards, 700
Government drawing format, 700 Initial and Signature Block, 119.3
Government procurement quality Inseparable assembly, 201.3.4, 402.13.3
assurance, 700 Installation aasembl y drawing, 201.3.5
Oovercment standard, 700 Installation control drawing, 201.4.7
Graphic symbols, 102 Installation drawing, 201.5
Electrical, 102. 1.1 Identification on, 402.11
Electrical wiring Interchangeable item, 700
(architectural), 102.1.5 Interconnection diagram, 201.7.3
Electronic, 102. li 1 Interface control drawing, 201.4.6
Flowchart, 102.1.3 Interior corners and edges, 700
Flueric power diagrema, 102. 1.4 Isometric and pictorial viewa, 101.3.1
Group, 700 Item, 700
Group Identification, 402.16.1 Alterad, .700
Logic, 102.1.2 Commercial, 700
Mechanical, 102.1.6, 102. 1.7
J ,- 3
DOD-STD-001OOD( AR)
IlllEX (Cent’d)
Identification, 402.10 Manufacturer, 700

Altered, 402. 10e” Marking and location, 108
Approved specification, 402. 10b CARC painted items, 108. 1.3.2
Approved standard, 402. 10a Matched parta, 108.1.2
Selected, 402. 10e Requirements, 108.1
Item, interchangeable, 700 Rubber produots, 108. 1.3.1
Item name, approved, 301.2 SED (Sensitive Electronic Device),
Item, Non-interchangeable, 402.20.2 108. 1.3.3
Item replacement notation, 402.20 Matched part, 700
Designation, 402. 13.1
Kit drawing, 201.9.10 Drawing, 201.3.7
Accessory, 201.9. 10b Material
Hardware conversion, 201.9. 10d Bulk, 700
Modification, 201.9. 10a Engineering drawing, 104
Software conversion, 201.9. 10c Identification of, 402.16-
Notes, 118
Lay, 101.6 Radioactive, 107
Letter Mathematical signs, 102.3.2
Revision, 503.2 Mechanical
Symbols, 102, 102.3.1 Schematic diagram, 201.7.6
Lettering, 101.2 Springs, 101.9
Level, 700 Symbols, 102. 1.6
Limited production, 700 Aerospacecraft, 102. 1.7
Line conventions, 101.2 Metric values, 101.4
List Microcircuits, 116
Additional Authorized List, Modification drawing, 201.9.17
604.2 Module, 700, 111
Associated, 700 Monodetail drawing, 201.2.1
Automatic data processing ~ Multi-detail drawing, 201.2.2
system preparation, 602. 1.2 Multi-detail drawing, identification
Bssic Issue Items, 604.1 on, 402.11
Integral, 201.1.2 Multiple changes, 503.3
Manual Preparation, 602. 1.1 Multi-sheet drawing, revision of,
On Vehicle Equipment,, 604 505
Parts, 601.1 Multi-view drawing, 101.3
Parts, preparation of,
602.1, 603 Name, item, approved, 301.2
Parts, separate, 601.1 New identification, 402. Iti
Revisions, 602.3 Nondestructive testing symbols,
Special Tool Set List, 605 101.1.12
Wiring, 201.9.2 Non-part drawing, 700
Location of notes, 117.5 Note contents, 117.6
Logic diagrams, 201.7.5 Number
Logic symbols (graphic), Code identification, 401.2, 402.4,
102. 1.2 402. 10c
J-4
DOD-STD.00 100D ( AR)
~ (Cent’d)
Cocument identlfioation, 401.3 Production, limited, 700

Drawing, 401.4, 402.5 Protective treatment, identification
Find, 401.6 of, 402.16
Part, 401.5, 402.6, 402.12, 402.13 Proved, 700
Records, 402.7
Numerical oontrol drawing, 201.9.3 Quality assurance, 700
Obsoleted items, 402.20.3 Recording revisions, 504

Officer, contracting, 700 Redrawn or replaced drawings, 506
&
One-line diagram, 201.7.4 Reference deaignatlona, electrical,
Optioal electronic parts, 102.2.1
Element, 101.10 Referenced documents, identification
..
Element drawing, 201.9.4 of, 402.3
System, 101.10 Reidentification, 402.10.1 .
System drawing, 201.9.4 Repairable, 700
Order of precedence of apeolstandards, Replacement drawing, 700
402.18 Revision, 700, 500, 501, 502
Optional/Alternative Designs, 109 Additions, 503.4
original date, 402.17 Approval, 504.1.3
Original drawing, 700 Authorization, 700
Duplicate, 104.1 Block, 504.1
Book-form drawing, 505
Parenthetical identifier, Crossing out, 502.2
402. 11.2 Computer generated/revised drawinga,
Part, 700 505.4
Depiction, 110 Date, 504. 1.5
Designation, matched, Description, 504.1.2
402.13.1 Dimensions, 502.1
Drawing, 700 Identification, 503.1
List, 601.1 Letter, 503.2, 504. 1.1
List format, 603.1 Multi-sheet drawing, 505
Matched, 700 Recording, 504
Number, 401.5, 402.6, Required, 503.6
402.10, U02. 12 Separating, 504. 1.6
Symmetrically opposite, Symbol, 700
402.13.2, 700 Zoning, 504. 1.4
Photo-assembly drawing, Rights to data, 503.5
201.3.3
Piping diagram, 201..7.7 Scale, 106
Plan drawing, 201.8.2 Drawings not to, 106.3
Plat plan drawing, 201.8.3 Dimensions not to, 106.4
Printed wiring master Fractional method, 106.2.1
drawing, 201.9.9 Indication of, 106.2
Printed wiring mast~r Schematic diagrams, 201.7.1
pattern drawing, 201.9.9 Schematic, mechanical, 201.7.6
Process, Identification of, .%rew thread representation, 101.7
402.16 Security, 105, 303
Product Configuration Selected item drawing, 201.4.5
Identification, 700 Selected item identification, 402. 10e
Production, 700 set, 700
J-5
DOD-STD-00 10OD(AR)
~ (Cent’d)
Sheet, certification data, Symmetrically opposite parts,

201.9.13 402.13.2, 700
Sheet form standard, 700 System, 700
Ship equipment drawing, 201.9.12 k
Signing and dating drawinga, 119 Tabulated

Signing drawings, 119.1 Assembly drawing, 201.3.2
Signing for another, 119.1.1 Detail. drawing, 201.2.3
Site drawing, 201.8.4 Drawing, identification, 402.11
Size and format of engineering Title
drawings, 1,01.1 Drawing, 301.1
.%urce control drawing, 201.4.3, Drawing, creation of, 302
402.1o (Note 2), 402. 11.1 Detail part, 302. lb
Specification control drawing, Kit drawing, 304
201.4.2, 402.10 (Note 1), 402. 11.1 Tolerancing, 101.5
Springs, 101.9 Transfer, design responsibility,
Standard, 700 402.9
Company, 700 Tube bend drawing, 201.2.4
Wsign Activity, 700 Type designator, 301.3
Government, 700
Industry, 700 Unit, 700
Non-government, 700 Undimensioned drawing, 201.9.7
Sheet Form, 700
Structural symbols, 102. 1.8 Validation, 700
Subassembly, 700 Vendor, 700
Subcontractor, 700 Vicinity plan drawing, 201.8.4
Superseded items, 402.20.4
Surf ace roughness, waviness and Waviness, 101.6
lay, 101.6 Welding symbols, 102.1.11
Symbols Wiring
Aerospacecraft, 102. 1.7 Harness drawing, 201.9.5
Architectural, 102. 1.9 Diagram, 201.7.2
Electrical, 102. 1.1 List, 201.9.2
Electrical wiring, 102. 1.5
Electrical Wiring (shiPs’ Plane), Zoning, revision, 504. 1.4
102.1.10
Electronic, 102. 1.1
,Flowchart, 102. 1.3
Flueric power, 102. 1.4
Interface Control Identification,
402.19
Letter, 102.3.1
Logic, 102. 1.2
Mathematical signs, 102.3.2
Mechanical, 102.1.6
Nondestructive testing, 102.1.12
Revision, 700
Structural, 102. 1.8
Surf ace texture, 101.6.1
Welding, 102.1.11
J-6
*us GOVERNMENTPmN71N0 OFFICE IW_ 704.0 36, 72820

INSTRUCTIONS: In. oanfinuhs ●ffort to IMM our stmdmdiaatton docummwsbettor,

tba00D pm?fdutbbformforUM h
oubzcdttknc
co-nti andNSSMtionrfcuimparmmeak ALl-m ofntOiWYdswkdintion docunwnu am Letitik.uwkde
formIMY k detacbd, folded stons tbe On- indicatmd; tsped atc.ng the lCVM edge (DO NOT STAPLE),
sussutioac‘17119 and
mailed. h! block
5,k n wdIIc u PcAbh Amut wttcukr problem areu such m WCUdinswbii mquimd tnterpmtatian, waI
m @d. r=~cUTO. 10CU. -biw- cu vu km@bl*. and sin POPOWJ WOWJZUcbmsa W&II would alleviate tbe
problems. .SaIterLo bkk 6 any mnwks not mhted to ● twit% pmappb of tba document. U black
7 i8fhd out,an
@
scknowtcdgement will h maitod to you wktbh SO &p * lot youknowO@ your Cc.JmMnb W8m received ad am beii
caaddend.
Nom: I% form IMY IIOt b d b IWd cOPkSOf d—ts. nortoreque,t miw% derivations,
orchrifbtiom of
spectflu~ nqulrennnbon cumenteomtmcthCcnammnta.brdttador+tkb form do notcc.nstilufa
. imply authorization
@ mire MY PO?UGOof tb@ mfemacod dacumcnt($) or toad conknchul mqulmmemta
(FOid * *b UN)
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
111111 FI
UNITEO STATES
OFFICIAL SUSINE~
‘EN~LTvF0RpRlvA7E usE~ BRus!NE~sNR~~$~HMAl~c,
“ POSTAGE
WILLBEPAID 8YTHE DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Commander
U.S. Army Armament Research, Development and
Engineering Center
ATTN, SMCAR-ESC-S
picatinny Arsenal, NJ 07806-5000
WANDARDIZATION OOCUMENT IMPROVEMENT PROPOSAL

(seeIn.umetiom- Rfverse side)
DOCUMENT NUMBER 2. 00 CUMENT TITLE
IX)D+TD-OO1OOD(AR) ~INEERIN DRAWJSW PRACCICES ,---
. NAUE OF SU6M17TIN0 01!9AN#ZATt0N 4 Tv?f OF ORGANIZATION (M- mm)
❑ “,.00.
‘ @ -.
I
. ●R08LRM AMEN+
. ●.OWQII N.mbor md WOrdl!IW
e
7. MAME OF SUOM#TTER km t. FoB:. Ml> - OP,lc.nd b. WORK TELEPHONE NUMBER (1”.lu,+#A“.

cd) -00,1.”.1
,. MAILING ADOnE= (Sb,.t, C18% .WOM. ZIP Cndd - OMIMU 8. DATE OF SUBMISSION (YYMMDC9
I
DD;OJ%1426 PREVIOUS EDITIoN IS @OLETE.
‘9

Mil Dod STD 00100d (Ar)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mil Dod STD 00100d (Ar)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mil Dod STD 00100d (Ar)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com on 2010-06-04T12:38:27.

2. genef icial comments (recommendation, additiona, deletions) and anY .

This interim Military Standard provides:

Drawing Dractioes for preparation of engineering drawings and drawing

Definitions and examplea of types of engineering drawings to be prepared

Procedures for the creation of titles for engineering drawings.

Numbering, coding and identification procedures for engineering drawings,

Methods for revision of engineering drawings and methods for recording of

Requirements for preparation of associated lists.

This docwment applies to all TACOM and AMCCOMcontracta which specify

THIS PA(X IEFC BLANK INTENTIONALLY

This standard prescribes general requirements for the preparation and

L-F-340 Film, Diazot ype, Sensitized, Moist and try

L-P-5 19 Plastic Sheet, Tracing, Glazed and Matte Finish

TT-I-1795 Ink, Marking, Stencil, Opaque (Porous and Non

UU-P-221 Paper, Direct Positive Sensitized, (Diazotype -

UU-P-561 Paper, Tracing

CCC-C-531 Cloth, Tracing

DOD-D-1 000 tiawings, Engineering and Associated Lists

MIL-D-5480 Data, Engineering and Technical, Reproduction

MIL-H-6088 Heat Treatment of. Aluminun Alloys

MIL-S-6090 Steel, Carburizing and Nitriding, Procesees for

MIL-H-6875 Heat Treatment of Steel, Process for

MIL-O-851O Drawing, Undimensioned, Reproducible,

NIL-M-9868 Microfilming of Engineering Dccuments, 35mm

MIL-W-1 3855 Weapon, Small Arms and Airoraft Armament

MIL-M-3851O Microcircuits, General Specification for

DOD-STD-00 10OD (AR)

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (tint’ d)

MIL-M-38761 Microfilming and Photographing of Engineering/ “.

MIL-P-55010 Plastic Sheet, Polyethylene Terephthalate

MIL-STD-12 Abbrev i at ion for Use on Drawings, Specifications,

MIL-STD-14 Architectural Symbols

MIL-STD-15-2 Electrical Wiring Equipment Symbols for Shipst

MIL-STD-17-1 Mechanical Symbols

MIL-STD-17-2 Mechanical Symbols for Aeronautical, Aerospace-

MIL-STD-25 Ship Structural Symbols for Use on Ship Drawings

MIL-STD-34 Preparation of Drawings for Optical Elements and

DOD-STD-100 Engineering Drawing Practices

MIL-STD-129 Marking for Shipment and Storage

MIL-STD-130 Identification Marking of U.S. Military Property

MIL-STD-171 Finishing of Metal and Wood Surfaces

MIL-STD-190 Identification Marking of Rubber Products

MIL-sTD-275 Printed Wiring for Electronic Equipment

DOD-STD-48O Configuration Control - Engineering Changes,

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (Contld)

MIL-STD-481 Configuration Control - Engineering Changes,

MIL-STD-490 Specification Practices

MIL-STD-681 Identification Coding and Application of

MIL-STD-961 Military Specifications and Associated

MIL-STD-1 174 Associated Lists for ARRADCOM Engineering

MIL-STD-1267 Dimensioning of Barrel Chambers of Small Arms

MIL-STD-1 306 Fluerics Terminology and Symbols

MIL-STD-1 464 Army Nomenclature System

DOD-STD-2 167 Defense System Software Development

MIL-STD-21 75 Castings, Classification and Inspection of

DOD-HDBK-263 Electrostatic Discharge Control Handbook for

Other Government documents, drawings, and publications. The following

12579607 Geometric Symbols for Dimensioning and Tolerancing